2020 EDGE Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

LT4J 19A321 AA

owner.ford.com ford.ca

2020 EDGE Owner’s Manual

2020 EDG

E Ow

ner’s Manual

January 2020Second Printing

Litho in U.S.A.

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2019

All rights reserved.Part Number: 201907 20191211230335

California Proposition 65

WARNING: Operating, servicing andmaintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you to chemicalsincluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to theState of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm. To minimizeexposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle theengine except as necessary, service your vehiclein a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or washyour hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals andrelated accessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash your hands after handling.

IntroductionAbout This Manual ..........................................7Symbols Glossary ............................................7Data Recording .................................................9Perchlorate .......................................................13Ford Credit ........................................................13Replacement Parts Recommendation

...........................................................................14Special Notices ...............................................14Mobile Communications Equipment

............................................................................15Export Unique Options ................................16

EnvironmentProtecting the Environment .......................17

At a GlanceAt a Glance - ST ..............................................18Instrument Panel ..........................................20

Child SafetyGeneral Information .....................................22Installing Child Restraints ..........................24Booster Seats .................................................29Child Restraint Positioning .........................31Child Safety Locks .........................................33

SeatbeltsPrinciple of Operation .................................35Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................38Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime ............................................................38Seatbelt Reminder .......................................39Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance ................................................41Seatbelt Extensions ......................................41

Personal Safety System™Personal Safety System™ .........................42

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation .................................43Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................44Front Passenger Sensing System ...........45Side Airbags ....................................................48Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags .......49Safety Canopy™ ...........................................49Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......50Airbag Disposal ...............................................51

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies .................................................52Remote Control ..............................................52Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control

..........................................................................58

MyKey™Principle of Operation .................................59Creating a MyKey ..........................................60Clearing All MyKeys .......................................61Checking MyKey System Status ...............61Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems .........................................................61MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................62

Doors and LocksLocking and Unlocking ................................63Keyless Entry ...................................................67

LiftgateManual Liftgate ..............................................70Power Liftgate ..................................................71

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System ........................75Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................76

1

Edge (CDQ) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Second-Printing

Table of Contents

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles

With: Manual Adjustable SteeringColumn ..........................................................78

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - VehiclesWith: Power Adjustable SteeringColumn ..........................................................78

Audio Control ..................................................79Voice Control ..................................................80Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise

Control ..........................................................80Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive

Cruise Control/Lane Centering ...........80Information Display Control .....................80Heated Steering Wheel ...............................81Horn .....................................................................81

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers ........................................82Autowipers ......................................................82Windshield Washers ....................................83Rear Window Wiper and Washers .........84

LightingGeneral Information .....................................85Lighting Control .............................................85Autolamps .......................................................86Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................86Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................86Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:

Configurable Daytime Running Lamps...........................................................................87

Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..........87

Front Fog Lamps ...........................................87Adaptive Headlamps ..................................88Direction Indicators ......................................88Interior Lamps ................................................89Ambient Lighting ..........................................89

Automatic High Beam Control

What Is Automatic High Beam Control...........................................................................91

Switching Automatic High Beam ControlOn and Off ....................................................91

Automatic High Beam Control Indicators...........................................................................91

Overriding Automatic High Beam Control...........................................................................91

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows .............................................93Global Opening .............................................94Exterior Mirrors ...............................................94Interior Mirror ..................................................96Sun Visors ........................................................96Moonroof .........................................................96

Instrument ClusterGauges ..............................................................98Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............101Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........104

Information DisplaysGeneral Information ...................................105Information Messages ................................115

Climate ControlAutomatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3 ..............................................131Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3/Bang and Olufsen AudioSystem .........................................................132

Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate.........................................................................134

Heated Windshield ......................................135Heated Rear Window .................................135Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................135Cabin Air Filter ...............................................135Remote Start .................................................135

2


Table of Contents

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position .................137Head Restraints ............................................137Manual Seats ................................................139Power Seats ..................................................140Memory Function ........................................142Rear Seats ......................................................144Heated Seats ................................................145Climate Controlled Seats .........................146

Garage Door OpenerUniversal Garage Door Opener ..............148

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points ...............................153Wireless Accessory Charging ..................154

Storage CompartmentsCenter Console .............................................157Overhead Console .......................................157Rear Seat Armrest .......................................157

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information ...................................158Keyless Starting ...........................................158Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................159Switching Off the Engine ...........................161Engine Block Heater ...................................162

Unique Driving Characteristics

Auto-Start-Stop ..........................................164

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions .....................................166Fuel Quality ...................................................166Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................167Running Out of Fuel ....................................167

Refueling ........................................................169Fuel Consumption ........................................171

Engine Emission ControlEmission Law .................................................173Catalytic Converter .....................................174

TransmissionAutomatic Transmission ............................177

All-Wheel DriveUsing All-Wheel Drive ................................183

BrakesGeneral Information ...................................188Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes

........................................................................188Electric Parking Brake ................................189Hill Start Assist ............................................190

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation ................................192Using Traction Control ...............................192

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation ................................193Using Stability Control ..............................194

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation ...............................196Rear Parking Aid ..........................................196Front Parking Aid .........................................198Side Sensing System ................................200Active Park Assist ........................................201Rear View Camera .....................................208180 Degree Camera .....................................211

Cruise ControlWhat Is Cruise Control ...............................212

3


Table of Contents

Switching Cruise Control On and Off.........................................................................212

Setting the Cruise Control Speed ..........212Canceling the Set Speed ..........................212Resuming the Set Speed ..........................213Cruise Control Indicators ...........................213Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................213

Driving AidsDriver Alert .....................................................223Lane Keeping System ...............................224Blind Spot Information System .............228Cross Traffic Alert .......................................230Steering ..........................................................233Pre-Collision Assist ....................................234Drive Control .................................................238

Load CarryingRear Under Floor Storage ........................239Cargo Nets .....................................................239Luggage Covers ...........................................239Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............240Load Limit .....................................................240

TowingTowing a Trailer ...........................................246Trailer Sway Control ...................................247Recommended Towing Weights ...........247Essential Towing Checks .........................249Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -

2.0L ...............................................................251Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels - 2.7L

.........................................................................251

Driving HintsEconomical Driving ....................................253Cold Weather Precautions ......................253Breaking-In ....................................................253Driving Through Water ..............................253Floor Mats ......................................................254

Roadside EmergenciesRoadside Assistance .................................255Hazard Flashers ..........................................256Fuel Shutoff ..................................................256Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................257Post-Crash Alert System .........................259Transporting the Vehicle ..........................259

Customer AssistanceGetting the Services You Need .............260In California (U.S. Only) ............................261The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................262Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only) ......................263Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada .......................................................263Ordering Additional Owner's Literature

........................................................................265Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)

........................................................................265Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)

........................................................................265

FusesFuse Specification Chart ..........................267Changing a Fuse ..........................................277

MaintenanceGeneral Information ..................................279Opening and Closing the Hood .............279Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™

.........................................................................281Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™

........................................................................282Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™

........................................................................283Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L EcoBoost™

........................................................................283Engine Oil Check .........................................283Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................284Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............285

4


Table of Contents

Engine Coolant Check ..............................286Automatic Transmission Fluid Check

.......................................................................290Brake Fluid Check ......................................290Power Steering Fluid Check .....................291Changing the 12V Battery .........................291Adjusting the Headlamps ........................293Washer Fluid Check ...................................294Fuel Filter .......................................................294Checking the Wiper Blades ....................295Changing the Wiper Blades ....................295Removing a Headlamp ............................296Changing a Bulb .........................................296

Vehicle CareGeneral Information ..................................299Cleaning Products ......................................299Cleaning the Exterior .................................299Waxing .............................................................301Cleaning the Engine ...................................301Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades

.........................................................................301Cleaning the Interior ..................................302Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens ......................302Cleaning Leather Seats ............................303Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............304Cleaning the Wheels .................................304Vehicle Storage ...........................................304Body Styling Kits ........................................306

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information ..................................307Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit ...................308Tire Care ..........................................................315Using Summer Tires ...................................331Using Snow Chains .....................................331Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........332Changing a Road Wheel ..........................335Technical Specifications ...........................341

Capacities and Specifications

Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™........................................................................343

Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™........................................................................343

Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .....344Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ......345Vehicle Identification Number ..............346Vehicle Certification Label ......................347Transmission Code Designation ...........347Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L

EcoBoost™ ..............................................348Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L

EcoBoost™, ST .......................................354Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L

EcoBoost™ ................................................361Bulb Specification Chart .........................368

Network ConnectivityConnecting the Vehicle to a Mobile

Network ......................................................370Network Connectivity – Troubleshooting

.........................................................................371

Wi-Fi HotspotCreating a Wi-Fi Hotspot .........................373Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or

Password ....................................................373

Audio SystemGeneral Information ..................................374Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ......374Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC 3/Bang

and Olufsen Audio System .................376Digital Radio ..................................................377Satellite Radio ..............................................379USB Port ........................................................382Media Hub .....................................................382

5


Table of Contents

SYNC™ 3General Information ..................................383Using Voice Recognition ..........................385Entertainment ..............................................391Climate ............................................................401Phone .............................................................403Navigation .....................................................405Apps .................................................................410Settings ...........................................................413SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ......................415

AccessoriesAccessories ...................................................428

Ford ProtectFord Protect ..................................................429

Scheduled MaintenanceGeneral Maintenance Information ........431Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........434Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

Maintenance .............................................437Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........439

AppendicesElectromagnetic Compatibility .............449End User License Agreement .................452Declaration of Conformity .......................477Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3 ............................................477

6


Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know aboutyour vehicle, the greater the safety andpleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNING: Driving whiledistracted can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash and injury. We stronglyrecommend that you use extremecaution when using any device that maytake your focus off the road. Yourprimary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. Itmay describe options not fitted to thevehicle you have purchased.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may show features as used indifferent models, so may appear differentto you on your vehicle.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of yourvehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand side.ALeft-hand side.B

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

E162384

Air conditioning system

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricanttype

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

Brake system

7


Introduction

E270480

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

E71880

Fasten seatbelt

E231160

Flammable

E67017

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard flashers

Heated rear window

Windshield defrosting system

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

8


Introduction

E270945

Horn control

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

E231159

Requires registered technician

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E231158

See Service Manual

Service engine soon

E270849

Passenger airbag activated

E270850

Passenger airbag deactivated

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

E138639

Stability control

E163957

Hill descent control

E272858

Trail control

E270969

Windshield wiping system

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDING

WARNING: Do not connectwireless plug-in devices to the data linkconnector. Unauthorized third partiescould gain access to vehicle data andimpair the performance of safety relatedsystems. Only allow repair facilities thatfollow our service and repair instructionsto connect their equipment to the datalink connector.

We respect your privacy and arecommitted to protecting it. Theinformation contained in this publicationwas correct at the time of going to print,but as technology rapidly changes, werecommend that you visit the regional Fordwebsite for the latest information.

9


Introduction

Your vehicle has electronic control unitsthat have data recording functionality andthe ability to permanently or temporarilystore data. This data could includeinformation on the condition and status ofyour vehicle, vehicle maintenancerequirements, events and malfunctions.The types of data that can be recorded aredescribed in this section. Some of the datarecorded is stored in event logs or errorlogs.Note: Error logs are reset following a serviceor repair.Note: We may provide information inresponse to requests from law enforcement,other government authorities and thirdparties acting with lawful authority orthrough a legal process. Such informationcould be used by them in legal proceedings.Data recorded includes, for example:• Operating states of system

components, for example, fuel level,tire pressure and battery charge level.

• Vehicle and component status, forexample, wheel speed, deceleration,lateral acceleration and seatbeltstatus.

• Events or errors in essential systems,for example, headlamps and brakes.

• System responses to driving situations,for example, airbag deployment andstability control.

• Environmental conditions, for example,temperature.

Some of this data, when used incombination with other information, forexample, an accident report, damage to avehicle or eyewitness statements, couldbe associated with a specific person.

Service DataService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storingdiagnostic information about your vehicle.This potentially includes information aboutthe performance or status of varioussystems and modules in the vehicle, suchas engine, throttle, steering or brakesystems. In order to properly diagnose andservice your vehicle, Ford Motor Company(Ford of Canada in Canada), and serviceand repair facilities may access or shareamong them vehicle diagnosticinformation received through a directconnection to your vehicle whendiagnosing or servicing your vehicle.Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Fordof Canada, in Canada) may, wherepermitted by law, use vehicle diagnosticinformation for vehicle improvement orwith other information we may have aboutyou, for example, your contact information,to offer you products or services that mayinterest you. Data may be provided to ourservice providers such as part suppliersthat may help diagnose malfunctions, andwho are similarly obligated to protect data.We retain this data only as long asnecessary to perform these functions or tocomply with law. We may provideinformation where required in response toofficial requests to law enforcement orother government authorities or thirdparties acting with lawful authority or courtorder, and such information may be usedin legal proceedings. For U.S. only (ifequipped), if you choose to use connectedapps and services, you consent that certaindiagnostic information may also beaccessed electronically by Ford MotorCompany and Ford authorized servicefacilities, and that the diagnosticinformation may be used to provideservices to you, personalizing yourexperience, troubleshoot, and to improveproducts and services and offer youproducts and services that may interest

10


Introduction

you, where permitted by law. For Canadaonly, for more information, please reviewthe Ford of Canada privacy policy atwww.ford.ca, including our U.S. datastorage and use of service providers inother jurisdictions who may be subject tolegal requirements in Canada, the UnitedStates and other countries applicable tothem, for example, lawful requirements todisclose personal information togovernmental authorities in thosecountries.

Event DataThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder. The main purpose of an eventdata recorder is to record, in certain crashor near crash-like situations, such as anairbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle; this data assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed. Theevent data recorder is designed to recorddata related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The event data recorder in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger seatbelts werebuckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or thebrake pedal; and

• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and• Where the driver was positioning the

steering wheel.This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

Note: Event data recorder data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data is recorded by theevent data recorder under normal drivingconditions and no personal data orinformation (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the event data recorder data withthe type of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.To read data recorded by an event datarecorder, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or the event datarecorder is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have such specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the eventdata recorder.

Comfort, Convenience andEntertainment DataYour vehicle has electronic control unitsthat have the ability to store data basedon your personalized settings. The data isstored locally in the vehicle or on devicesthat you connect to it, for example, a USBdrive or digital music player. You can deletesome of this data and also choose whetherto share it through the services to whichyou subscribe. See Settings (page 413).

Comfort and Convenience DataData recorded includes, for example:• Seat and steering wheel position.• Climate control settings.• Radio presets.

11


Introduction

Entertainment DataData recorded includes, for example:• Music, videos or album art.• Contacts and corresponding address

book entries.• Navigation destinations.

Services That We ProvideIf you use our services, we collect and usedata, for example, account information,vehicle location and driving characteristics,that could identify you. We transmit thisdata through a dedicated, protectedconnection. We only collect and use datato enable your use of our services to whichyou have subscribed, with your consent orwhere permitted by law. For additionalinformation, see the terms and conditionsof the services to which you havesubscribed.

Services That Third PartiesProvideWe recommend that you review the termsand conditions and data privacyinformation for any services to which yousubscribe. We take no responsibility forservices that third parties provide.

Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped)

The modem has a SIM. Themodem was enabled when yourvehicle was built and periodically

sends messages to stay connected to thecell phone network, receive automaticsoftware updates and send vehicle-relatedinformation to us, for example, diagnosticinformation. These messages couldinclude information that identifies yourvehicle, the SIM and the electronic serialnumber of the modem. Cell phone network

service providers could have access toadditional information, for example, cellphone network tower identification. Foradditional information about our privacypolicy, visit www.FordConnected.com orrefer to your local Ford website.Note: The modem continues to send thisinformation unless you disable the modemor stop the modem from sharing vehicledata by changing the modem settings. SeeNetwork Connectivity (page 370).Note: The service can be unavailable orinterrupted for a number of reasons, forexample, environmental or topographicalconditions and data plan coverage.Note: To find out if your vehicle has amodem, visit www.FordConnected.com.

Vehicles With SYNCMobile Device DataIf you connect a mobile device to yourvehicle, you can display data from yourdevice on the touchscreen for example,music and album art. You can share yourvehicle data with mobile apps on yourdevice through the system. See Apps(page 410).The mobile apps function operates by yourconnected device sending data to us in theUnited States. The data is encrypted andincludes the vehicle identification numberof your vehicle, the SYNC module serialnumber, odometer, enabled apps, usagestatistics and debugging information. Weretain it only as long as necessary toprovide the service, to troubleshoot, forcontinuous improvement and to offer youproducts and services that may be ofinterest to you according to yourpreferences and where allowed by law.

12


Introduction

www.FordConnected.com


If you connect a cell phone to the system,the system creates a profile that links tothat cell phone. The cell phone profileenables more mobile features and efficientoperation. The profile contains, forexample, data from your phonebook, readand unread text messages and call history,including history of calls when your cellphone was not connected to the system.If you connect a media device, the systemcreates and retains a media device indexof supported media content. The systemalso records a short diagnostic log ofapproximately 10 minutes of all recentsystem activity.The cell phone profile, media device indexand diagnostic log remain in your vehicleunless you delete them and are generallyaccessible only in your vehicle when youconnect your cell phone or media device.If you no longer plan to use the system oryour vehicle, we recommend you use themaster reset function to erase the storedinformation. See Settings (page 413).System data cannot be accessed withoutspecial equipment and access to yourvehicle's module.For additional information about ourprivacy policy, refer to your local Fordwebsite.Note: To find out if your vehicle has aconnectivity technology, visitwww.FordConnected.com.

Vehicles With an Emergency CallSystemWhen the emergency call system is active,it may disclose to emergency services thatyour vehicle has been in a crash involvingthe deployment of an airbag or activationof the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versionsor updates to the emergency call systemmay also be capable of electronically orverbally disclosing to emergency servicesoperators your vehicle location or other

details about your vehicle or crash to assistemergency services operators to providethe most appropriate emergency services.If you do not want to disclose thisinformation, do not activate the emergencycall system.Note: You cannot deactivate emergencycall systems that are required by law.

PERCHLORATECertain components in your vehicle suchas airbag modules, seatbelt pretensionersand remote control batteries may containperchlorate material. Special handlingmay apply for service or vehicle end of lifedisposal.

For more information visit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-ouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDITUS OnlyFord Credit offers a full range of financingand lease plans to help you acquire yourvehicle. If you have financed or leased yourvehicle through Ford Credit, thank you foryour business.For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or formore information about Ford Credit andaccess to the online Account Manager tool,visit www.ford.com/finance.

13


Introduction


REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONWe have built your vehicle to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft partswhenever your vehicle requires scheduledmaintenance or repair. You can clearlyidentify genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsby looking for the Ford, FoMoCo orMotorcraft branding on the parts or theirpackaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of serviceis to have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts thatconform to the specifications detailed inthis Owner’s Manual.Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meetor exceed these specifications.

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents happen sometimes.Genuine Ford replacement collision partsmeet our stringent requirements for fit,finish, structural integrity, corrosionprotection and dent resistance. Duringvehicle development we validate thatthese parts deliver the intended level ofprotection as a whole system. A great wayto know for sure you are getting this levelof protection is to use genuine Fordreplacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Ford Warranty.

The Ford Warranty may not cover damagecaused to your vehicle as a result of failednon-Ford parts.For additional information, refer to theterms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICESNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what iscovered by your New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, see your warranty guide that isavailable online. For more information,refer to our website and download yourcopy of the warranty guide.

Special InstructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fittedwith sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNING: You risk death orserious injury to yourself and others if youdo not follow the instruction highlightedby the warning symbol. Failure to followthe specific warnings and instructionscould result in personal injury.

WARNING: NEVER use a rearwardfacing child restraint on a seat protectedby an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

14


Introduction

On Board Diagnostics Data LinkConnector

WARNING: Do not connectwireless plug-in devices to the data linkconnector. Unauthorized third partiescould gain access to vehicle data andimpair the performance of safety relatedsystems. Only allow repair facilities thatfollow our service and repair instructionsto connect their equipment to the datalink connector.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data LinkConnector (DLC) that is used inconjunction with a diagnostic scan tool forvehicle diagnostics, repairs andreprogramming services. Installing anaftermarket device that uses the DLCduring normal driving for purposes such asremote insurance company monitoring,transmission of vehicle data to otherdevices or entities, or altering theperformance of the vehicle, may causeinterference with or even damage tovehicle systems. We do not recommendor endorse the use of unapprovedaftermarket plug-in devices. The vehicleWarranty will not cover damage causedby an aftermarket plug-in device.

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucksand Utility Type Vehicles

WARNING: Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please readthis Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicleis not a passenger car. As with othervehicles of this type, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury or death.

Using Your Vehicle With aSnowplowDo not use this vehicle forsnowplowing.Your vehicle does not have a snowplowingpackage.

Using Your Vehicle as anAmbulanceDo not use this vehicle as anambulance.Your vehicle does not have the AmbulancePreparation Package.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENT

WARNING: Driving whiledistracted can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash and injury. We stronglyrecommend that you use extremecaution when using any device that maytake your focus off the road. Yourprimary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Using mobile communications equipmentis becoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly inemergency situations. Safety must beparamount when using mobile

15


Introduction

communications equipment to avoidnegating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, butis not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONSFor your particular global region, yourvehicle may be equipped with features andoptions that are different from the featuresand options that are described in thisOwner’s Manual. A market uniquesupplement may be supplied thatcomplements this book. By referring to themarket unique supplement, if provided,you can properly identify those features,recommendations and specifications thatare unique to your vehicle. This Owner’sManual is written primarily for the U.S. andCanadian Markets. Features or equipmentlisted as standard may be different on unitsbuilt for export. Refer to this Owner’sManual for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

16


Introduction

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENTYou should play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.For additional information about oursustainability progress and initiatives, visitwww.sustainability.ford.com.

17


Environment

www.sustainability.ford.com

AT A GLANCE - ST• 2.7L DOHC DI GTV6 engine.• Modified front suspension knuckle for

improved wheel end geometry.• Cast rear knuckle (improved stiffness)

and alternative anti-roll-bar mountingfor improved efficiency.

• ST-tuned springs and dampers.• 13.6 in (345 mm) front and rear rotors.• Enhanced torque vectoring control with

cornering understeer control.• ST-tuned electric power steering

rack-and-pinion.• AdvanceTrac® stability enhancement

system with four modes: Default,Traction Control off, Sport andDisabled.

• Aluminum ST wheels 20 in (50.8 cm)x 8 in (20.3 cm), 2.1 in (52.5 mm) offsetor optional 21 in (53.3 cm) x 9 in (22.9cm), 2.2 in (55mm) offset.

• 245/50R20 V-rated all season tirescome standard.

• 265/40R21 A/S V-rated all season tirescomes standard with optional 21 inchwheels.

• Front seats with increased lateralsupport.

• Leather wrapped ST sport steeringwheel with improved grip contour.

• Instrument cluster with boost gauge.Performance Brake Package Options• Unique front rotors and dust shields

optimized for cooling. Unique, redpainted calipers with ST tuned padformulation front and rear.

• 265/40R21 summer only performancetires are optional with 21 inch wheels.

• Brushless cooling fan for additionalunderhood airflow.

Engine Specifications

DescriptionItem

2.7L DOHC 4V GTDI V6, cast iron cylinderblock and cast aluminum cylinder heads

Configuration

3.3 in (83 mm) bore x 3.2677 in (83 mm)stroke

Bore x stroke

164 in³ (2,694 cm³)Displacement

10:1Compression ratio

335 hp @ 5500 RPM on 93 octaneHorsepower

380 lb-ft @ 3250 RPM on 93 octaneTorque

6250 RPM continuousRedline6500 RPM three-second overspeed

124 horsepower per literSpecific output

Twin independent variable cam timingValvetrain

18


At a Glance

DescriptionItem

Coil-on-plugIgnition

250 bar fuel pumpFuel system

2.2 in (57 mm)Throttle body

Cast aluminumPistons

Alloy SteelCrankshaft

Alloy SteelConnecting rods

Single scroll / 21 psi max boost*Turbo

2.5 in (63.5 mm) diameterExhaust system

* SAE Certified Performance ratings are achieved with 19.5 psi, but up to 21 psi can bedelivered to maximize power depending on fuel quality and atmospheric conditions.

Suspension Specifications

DescriptionItem

Independent, MacPherson struts with L-shaped lower control arm with isolated

subframe and stabilizer bar

Front suspension

Gas-pressurized, hydraulic, twin-tubeFront shocks

Independent integral link, isolated subframeand stabilizer bar

Rear suspension

Gas-pressurized, hydraulic, monotubeRear shocks

0.945 in (24 mm) diameter x 0.157 in(4 mm) thick hollow

Front stabilizer bar

0.866 in (22 mm) diameterRear stabilizer bar

19


At a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL

E278541

Air vents.ADirection indicator lever. See Direction Indicators (page 88).BInformation display controls. See Information Display Control (page 80).CInstrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 98).DInformation display controls. See Information Display Control (page 80).EWiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 82).FInformation and entertainment display.GHazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 256).HAudio unit. See Audio System (page 374).IClimate control. See Climate Control (page 131).JClimate controlled seat switch. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 146).KParking aid switch. Auto-start-stop switch. See Parking Aids (page 196). SeeAuto-Start-Stop (page 164).

L

20


At a Glance

Parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake (page 189).MKeyless start button. See Keyless Starting (page 158).NAudio control. Voice control. See Audio Control (page 79). See Voice Control(page 80).

O

Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 78).PHorn.QCruise control buttons. See Cruise Control (page 80).RHood release. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 279).SLighting control. See Lighting Control (page 85). Power liftgate release button.See Power Liftgate (page 71). Traction control switch. See Using TractionControl (page 192).

T

21


At a Glance

GENERAL INFORMATIONSee the following sections for directionson how to properly use safety restraintsfor children.

WARNING: Always make sure yourchild is secured properly in a device thatis appropriate for their height, age andweight. Child safety restraints must bebought separately from your vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions andguidelines may result in an increased riskof serious injury or death to your child.

WARNING: All children are shapeddifferently. The National Highway TrafficSafety Administration and other safetyorganizations, base theirrecommendations for child restraints onprobable child height, age and weightthresholds, or on the minimumrequirements of the law. We recommendthat you check with a NHTSA CertifiedChild Passenger Safety Technician

(CPST) to make sure that you properlyinstall the child restraint in your vehicleand that you consult your pediatrician tomake sure you have a child restraintappropriate for your child. To locate achild restraint fitting station and CPST,contact NHTSA toll free at1-888-327-4236 or go towww.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contactTransport Canada toll free at1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.cato find a Child Car Seat Clinic in yourarea. Failure to properly restrain childrenin child restraints made especially fortheir height, age and weight, may resultin an increased risk of serious injury ordeath to your child.

WARNING: On hot days, thetemperature inside the vehicle can risevery quickly. Exposure of people oranimals to these high temperatures foreven a short time can cause death orserious heat related injuries, includingbrain damage. Small children areparticularly at risk.

22


Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended RestraintType

Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild

Use a child restraint(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertibleseat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less(generally age four or younger).

Infants ortoddlers

Use a belt-positioningbooster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child restraint (generallychildren who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)

tall, are greater than age four and lessthan age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb

(45 kg) if recommended by your childrestraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle seatbelthaving the lap belt snugand low across the hips,shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder andchest, and seat backrest

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a belt-positioning boosterseat (generally children who are at least57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb

(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommendedby child restraint manufacturer).

Larger children

• You are required by law to properly usechild restraints for infants and toddlersin the United States, Canada andMexico.

• Many states and provinces require thatsmall children use approved boosterseats until they reach age eight, aheight of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb(36 kg). Check your local and state orprovincial laws for specificrequirements about the safety ofchildren in your vehicle.

• When possible, properly restrainchildren 12 years of age and under in arear seating position of your vehicle.Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positionsthan in a front seating position. SeeFront Passenger Sensing System(page 45).

• When installing a rear facing childrestraint, adjust the vehicle seats toavoid interference between the childrestraint and the vehicle seat in frontof the child restraint.

23


Child Safety

INSTALLING CHILDRESTRAINTSChild Seats

E142594

Use a child restraint (sometimes called aninfant carrier, convertible seat, or toddlerseat) for infants, toddlers, or childrenweighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generallyage four or younger).

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

WARNING: Do not place arearward facing child restraint in front ofan active airbag. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Properly securechildren 12 years old and under in a rearseating position whenever possible. Ifyou are unable to properly secure allchildren in a rear seating position,properly secure the largest child on thefront seat. If you must use a forwardfacing child restraint on the front seat,move the seat as far back as possible.Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Depending on whereyou secure a child restraint, anddepending on the child restraint design,you may block access to certain seatbeltbuckle assemblies and LATCH loweranchors, rendering those featurespotentially unusable. To avoid risk ofinjury, make sure occupants only useseating positions where they are able tobe properly restrained.

When installing a child restraint withcombination lap and shoulder belts:• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that

seating position.• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel itlatch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release buttonpointing up and away from the childrestraint, with the tongue between thechild restraint and the release button,to prevent accidental unbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat in the uprightposition before you install the childrestraint.

• Put the seatbelt in the automaticlocking mode. See Step 5. This vehicledoes not require the use of a lockingclip.

Perform the following steps wheninstalling the child restraint withcombination lap and shoulder belts:

24


Child Safety

Note: Although the child restraintillustrated is a forward facing child restraint,the steps are the same for installing a rearfacing child restraint.

E142528

1. Position the child restraint in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child restraint inthe proper seating position, pull downon the shoulder belt and then grasp theshoulder belt and lap belt togetherbehind the belt tongue.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child restraint accordingto the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Make sure that you did nottwist the belt webbing.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)for that seating position until you heara snap and feel the latch engage. Makesure the tongue is latched securely bypulling on it.

25


Child Safety

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the shoulderportion of the belt and pull downwarduntil you pull all of the belt out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt clicks as it retracts toindicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractorto make sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. You shouldnot be able to pull more belt out. If theretractor did not lock, unbuckle the beltand repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down orkneeling on the child restraint whilepulling up on the shoulder belt in orderto force slack from the belt. This isnecessary to remove the remainingslack that exists once you add the extraweight of the child to the child restraint.It also helps to achieve the propersnugness of the child restraint to yourvehicle. Sometimes, a slight leantoward the buckle will provide extrahelp to remove remaining slack fromthe belt.

9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,attach it.

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for properinstallation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

26


Child Safety

Using Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH)

WARNING: Do not attach two childsafety restraints to the same anchor. Ina crash, one anchor may not be strongenough to hold two child safety restraintattachments and may break, causingserious injury or death.

WARNING: Depending on whereyou secure a child restraint, anddepending on the child restraint design,you may block access to certain seatbeltbuckle assemblies and LATCH loweranchors, rendering those featurespotentially unusable. To avoid risk ofinjury, make sure occupants only useseating positions where they are able tobe properly restrained.

The LATCH system has three vehicleanchor points: two lower anchors wherethe seat backrest and seat cushion meet(called the seat bight) and one top tetheranchor behind that seating position.LATCH compatible child restraints havetwo rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to the two loweranchors at the LATCH equipped seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofattachment method eliminates the needto use seatbelts to attach the childrestraint. However, you can still use theseatbelt to attach the child restraint. Forforward-facing child restraints, you mustalso attach the top tether strap to theproper top tether anchor if a top tetherstrap has been provided with your childrestraint.

E142535

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors forchild restraint installation at the seatingpositions marked with the child restraintsymbol.

E196697

The LATCH anchors are at the rear sectionof the rear seat between the cushion andseat backrest below the symbols asshown. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions to properlyinstall a child restraint with LATCHattachments.Follow the instructions on attaching childrestraints with tether straps.Attach LATCH lower attachments of thechild restraint only to the anchors shown.

27


Child Safety

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from theOutermost Seating Positions (CenterSeating Use)

WARNING: The standardizedspacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in(280 mm) center to center. Do not useLATCH lower anchors for the centerseating position unless the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions permit andspecify using anchors spaced at least asfar apart as those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of thesecond row rear seat are spaced 20 in(51 cm) apart. You cannot install a childrestraint with rigid LATCH attachments atthe center seating position. You can onlyuse LATCH compatible child restraints(with attachments on belt webbing) atthis seating position provided that the childrestraint manufacturer's instructionspermit use with the anchor spacing stated.Do not attach a child restraint to any loweranchor if an adjacent child restraint isattached to that anchor.Each time you use the child restraint, checkthat the seat is properly attached to thelower anchors and tether anchor, ifapplicable. Tug the child restraint from sideto side and forward and back where it issecured to your vehicle. The seat shouldmove less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you dothis for a proper installation.If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injured ina crash greatly increases.

Combining Seatbelt and LATCH LowerAnchors for Attaching Child RestraintsWhen used in combination, you may attacheither the seatbelt or the LATCH loweranchors first, provided a proper installationis achieved. Attach the tether strapafterward, if included with the childrestraint.

Using Tether StrapsMany forward-facing childrestraints include a tether strapwhich extends from the back of

the child restraint and hooks to ananchoring point called the top tetheranchor. Tether straps are available as anaccessory for many older child restraints.

Contact the manufacturer of your childrestraint for information about ordering atether strap, or to obtain a longer tetherstrap if the tether strap on your childrestraint does not reach the appropriatetop tether anchor in your vehicle.Once you install the child restraint usingeither the seatbelt, the lower anchors ofthe LATCH system, or both, you can attachthe top tether strap.The tether strap anchors in your vehicleare in the following positions (shown fromtop view):

E142537

28


Child Safety

Perform the following steps to install achild restraint with tether anchors:Note: If you install a child restraint with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tighten thetether strap enough to lift the child restraintoff your vehicle seat cushion when the childis seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snugwithout lifting the front of the child restraint.Keeping the child restraint just touching yourvehicle seat gives the best protection in asevere crash.1. Route the child restraint tether strap

over the back of the seat. For theoutermost seating positions, route thetether strap under the head restraintand between the head restraint posts.For the center seating position, routethe tether strap over the top of thehead restraint. If needed, you can alsoremove the head restraints.

E193589

2. Locate the correct anchor behind thegap cover for the selected seatingposition.

E142539

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor asshown.

4. Tighten the child restraint tether strapaccording to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

If your child restraint system has a tetherstrap, and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, we also recommendits use.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING: Do not put the shouldersection of the seatbelt or allow the childto put the shoulder section of theseatbelt under their arm or behind theirback. Failure to follow this instructioncould reduce the effectiveness of theseatbelt and increase the risk of injury ordeath in a crash.

Use a belt-positioning booster seat forchildren who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety restraint(generally children who are less than 57 in(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 andless than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb

29


Child Safety

(45 kg) if recommended by your childrestraint manufacturer). Many state andprovincial laws require that children useapproved booster seats until they reachage eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or80 lb (36 kg).Booster seats should be used until you cananswer YES to ALL of these questionswhen seated without a booster seat:

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way backagainst their vehicle seat backrest withknees bent comfortably at the edge ofthe seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?• Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?Always use booster seats in conjunctionwith your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seatsIf your backless booster seat has aremovable shield, remove the shield. If avehicle seating position has a low seatbackrest or no head restraint, a backlessbooster seat may place your child's head(as measured at the tops of the ears)above the top of the seat. In this case,move the backless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat backrestor head restraint and lap and shoulderbelts, or consider using a high back boosterseat.

E70710

• High back booster seatsIf, with a backless booster seat, you cannotfind a seating position that adequatelysupports your child's head, a high backbooster seat would be a better choice.

30


Child Safety

Children and booster seats vary in size andshape. Choose a booster that keeps thelap belt low and snug across the hips,never up across the stomach, and lets youadjust the shoulder belt to cross the chestand rest snugly near the center of theshoulder. The following drawings compare

the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder beltuncomfortably close to the neck and ashoulder belt that could slip off theshoulder. The drawings also show how thelap belt should be low and snug across thechild's hips.

E142596

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicleseat upon which it is being used, placing arubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpetliner under the booster seat may improvethis condition. Do not introduce any itemthicker than this under the booster seat.Check with the booster seatmanufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINTPOSITIONING

WARNING: Do not place arearward facing child restraint in front ofan active airbag. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

31


Child Safety

WARNING: Properly securechildren 12 years old and under in a rearseating position whenever possible. Ifyou are unable to properly secure allchildren in a rear seating position,properly secure the largest child on thefront seat. If you must use a forwardfacing child restraint on the front seat,move the seat as far back as possible.Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Always carefully followthe instructions and warnings providedby the manufacturer of any childrestraint to determine if the restraintdevice is appropriate for your child's size,height, weight, or age. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions andwarnings provided for installation anduse in conjunction with the instructionsand warnings provided by your vehiclemanufacturer. A safety seat that isimproperly installed or utilized, isinappropriate for your child's height, age,or weight or does not properly fit thechild may increase the risk of seriousinjury or death.

WARNING: Do not allow apassenger to hold a child on their lapwhen your vehicle is moving. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death in the event of asudden stop or crash.

WARNING: Do not use pillows,books or towels to boost your child'sheight. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Properly secure childrestraints or booster seats when they arenot in use. They could become projectilesin a sudden stop or crash. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not put the shouldersection of the seatbelt or allow the childto put the shoulder section of theseatbelt under their arm or behind theirback. Failure to follow this instructioncould reduce the effectiveness of theseatbelt and increase the risk of injury ordeath in a crash.

WARNING: Do not leave childrenor pets unattended in your vehicle.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death.

32


Child Safety

Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X

CombinedWeight ofChild and

ChildRestraint

RestraintType

SeatbeltOnly

Seatbeltand LATCH

(LowerAnchorsand TopTether

Anchor)

Seatbeltand TopTetherAnchor

LATCH(Lower

AnchorsOnly)

LATCH(Lower

Anchorsand TopTether

Anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild

restraint

XOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild

restraint

XXXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacingchild

restraint

XXOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacingchild

restraint

Note: The child restraint must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat upon which it isinstalled. It may be necessary to lift orremove the head restraint. See Seats (page137).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKSWhen these locks are set, the rear doorscannot be opened from the inside.

33


Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on therear edge of each rear door and must beset separately for each door.

Left-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.

34


Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING: Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: Children must alwaysbe properly restrained.

WARNING: Do not allow apassenger to hold a child on their lapwhen your vehicle is moving. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death in the event of asudden stop or crash.

WARNING: All occupants of yourvehicle, including the driver, shouldalways properly wear their seatbelts,even when an airbag supplementalrestraint system is provided. Failure toproperly wear your seatbelt couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

WARNING: It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area, insideor outside of a vehicle. In a crash, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allowpeople to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats andseatbelts. Make sure everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat and properly using aseatbelt. Failure to follow this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantly morelikely to die than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING: Each seating positionin your vehicle has a specific seatbeltassembly made up of one buckle andone tongue designed to be used as a pair.Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulderbelt under the arm. Never use a singleseatbelt for more than one person.

WARNING: Even with advancedrestraints systems, properly restrainchildren 12 and under in a rear seatingposition. Failure to follow this couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

WARNING: Seatbelts and seatsmay be hot in a vehicle that is in thesunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats mayburn a small child. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a childanywhere near them.

All seating positions in your vehicle havelap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupantsof the vehicle should always properly weartheir seatbelts, even when an airbagsupplemental restraint system is provided.The seatbelt system consists of:• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).• Height adjuster at the front outermost

seating positions.• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front

outermost and second row outermostseating positions.

• Belt tension sensor at the frontoutermost passenger seating position.

E71880

• Seatbelt warning light and chime.

35


Seatbelts

E67017

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator.

The seatbelt pretensioners are designedto tighten the seatbelts when activated. Infrontal and near-frontal crashes, theseatbelt pretensioners may be activatedalone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,together with the front airbags. Thepretensioners may also activate when aSafety Canopy airbag deploys.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTSThe front outermost and rear safetyrestraints in the vehicle are combinationlap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)until you hear a snap and feel it latch.Make sure you securely fasten thetongue in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release buttonand remove the tongue from thebuckle.

Using a Sliding Clip (If Equipped)

E200788

Slide the clip away from the tongue sothere is no loose webbing when anoccupant or child seat is buckled up. Youcan also use the sliding clip to raise thetongue and prevent it from rattling or toease access to the tongue.

36


Seatbelts

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy

WARNING: Always ride and drivewith your seatback upright and properlyfasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portionof the seatbelt snugly and low acrossthe hips. Position the shoulder portion ofthe seatbelt across your chest. Pregnantwomen must follow this practice. Seethe following figure.

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear theirseatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt lowacross the hips below the belly and wornas tight as comfort allows. Position theshoulder belt to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

Seatbelt Locking Modes

WARNING: If your vehicle isinvolved in a crash, have the seatbeltsand associated components inspectedas soon as possible. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

All safety restraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts. Thedriver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitivelocking mode. The front outermostpassenger and rear seat seatbelts havethe vehicle sensitive locking mode and theautomatic locking mode.

Vehicle Sensitive ModeThis is the normal retractor mode, whichallows free shoulder belt lengthadjustment to your movements andlocking in response to vehicle movement.For example, if the driver brakes suddenlyor turns a corner sharply, or the vehiclereceives an impact of about 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the combinationseatbelts lock to help reduce forwardmovement of the driver and passengers.In addition, the retractor is designed to lockif you pull the webbing out too quickly. Ifthe seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lowerthe height adjuster to allow the seatbeltto retract. If the retractor does not unlock,pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed asmall length of webbing back toward thestowed position. For rear seatbelts, reclinethe rear seat backrest or push the seatbackrest cushion away from the seatbelt.Feed a small length of webbing backtoward the stowed position.

Automatic Locking ModeIn this mode, the shoulder beltautomatically pre-locks. The belt stillretracts to remove any slack in theshoulder belt. The automatic locking modeis not available on the driver seatbelt.

37


Seatbelts

When to Use the Automatic LockingModeUse this mode any time a child safety seat,except a booster, is installed in passengerfront or rear seating positions. Properlyrestrain children 12 years old and under ina rear seating position whenever possible.See Child Safety (page 22).

How to Use the Automatic LockingMode

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until you pull the entire beltout. As the belt retracts, you will heara clicking sound. This indicates theseatbelt is now in the automaticlocking mode.

How to Disengage the AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap andshoulder belt and allow it to retractcompletely to disengage the automaticlocking mode and activate the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.

SEATBELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNING: Position the seatbeltheight adjuster so that the seatbelt restsacross the middle of your shoulder.Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctlycould reduce its effectiveness andincrease the risk of injury in a crash.

E145664

1. Pull the button and slide the heightadjuster up or down.

2. Release the button and pull down onthe height adjuster to make sure it islocked in place.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMPAND INDICATOR CHIME

E71880

This lamp illuminates and anindicator chime will sound if thedriver seatbelt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition isturned on.

38


Seatbelts

Conditions of operation

ThenIf

The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates andthe indicator chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The driver seatbelt is not buckled beforethe ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

The seatbelt warning lamp and indicatorchime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled while thewarning lamp is illuminated and the indic-

ator chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning lamp and indicatorchime remain off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before theignition switch is turned to the on position...

SEATBELT REMINDERBelt-Minder™This feature supplements the seatbeltwarning function by providing additionalreminders that intermittently sound achime and illuminate the seatbelt warninglamp when you are in the driver seat or youhave a front seat passenger and a seatbeltis unbuckled.

The system uses information from thefront passenger sensing system todetermine if a front seat passenger ispresent and therefore potentially in needof a warning. To avoid the system turningon the Belt-Minder feature for objects youplace on the front passenger seat, only thefront seat passengers receive warnings asdetermined by the front passenger sensingsystem.If the Belt-Minder warnings expire(warnings for about five minutes) for onepassenger (driver or front passenger), theother passenger can still cause theBelt-Minder feature to turn on.

39


Seatbelts

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckleyour seatbelts before you switch the igni-tion on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse afteryou switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, theseatbelt warning lamp illuminates and anindicator chime sounds for 6 seconds every25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your seatbelts.

You or the front seat passenger do notbuckle your seatbelts before your vehiclereaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2minutes elapse after you switch the ignitionon...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, theseatbelt warning lamp illuminates and anindicator chime sounds for 6 seconds every25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your seatbelts.

The seatbelt for the driver or frontpassenger is unbuckled for about 1 minutewhile the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minuteselapse after you switch the ignition on...

Deactivating and Activating theBelt-Minder Feature

WARNING: While the systemallows you to switch it off, this system isdesigned to improve your chances ofbeing safely belted and surviving a crash.We recommend you leave the systemswitched on. To reduce the risk of injury,do not switch the system on or off whiledriving your vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passengerwarnings switch on and off independently.When you perform this procedure for oneseating position, do not buckle the otherposition as this will terminate the process.Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly beforeproceeding with the programmingprocedure.

Before following the procedure, make surethat:• The parking brake is set.• The transmission is in park (P) or

neutral (N).• The ignition is off.• The driver and front passenger

seatbelts are unbuckled.1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the

vehicle.2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp

turns off (about 1 minute). After Step2, wait an additional 5 seconds beforeproceeding with Step 3. Once you startStep 3, you must complete theprocedure within 30 seconds.

3. For the seating position you areswitching off, buckle then unbuckle theseatbelt three times at a moderatespeed, ending in the unbuckled state.After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lampturns on.

40


Seatbelts

4. While the seatbelt warning lamp is on,buckle and then unbuckle the seatbelt.After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lampflashes for confirmation.

• This will switch the feature off for thatseating position if it is currently on.

• This will switch the feature on for thatseating position if it is currently off.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANDSEATBELT MAINTENANCEInspect the vehicle seatbelts and childsafety seat systems periodically to makesure they work properly and are notdamaged. Inspect the vehicle and childrestraint seatbelts to make sure there areno nicks, tears or cuts. Replace ifnecessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,including retractors, buckles, front seatbeltbuckle assemblies, buckle supportassemblies (slide bar-if equipped),shoulder belt height adjusters (ifequipped), shoulder belt guide on seatbackrest (if equipped), child safety seatLATCH and tether anchors, and attachinghardware, should be inspected after acrash. Read the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions for additionalinspection and maintenance informationspecific to the child restraint.We recommend that all seatbeltassemblies in use in vehicles involved in acrash be replaced. However, if the crashwas minor and an authorized dealer findsthat the belts do not show damage andcontinue to operate properly, they do notneed to be replaced. Seatbelt assembliesnot in use during a crash should also beinspected and replaced if either damageor improper operation is noted.Properly care for seatbelts. See VehicleCare (page 299).

SEATBELT EXTENSIONS

WARNING: Persons who fit intothe vehicle's seatbelt should not use anextension. Unnecessary use could resultin serious personal injury in the event ofa crash.

WARNING: Only use extensionsprovided free of charge by our dealers.The dealer will provide an extensiondesigned specifically for this vehicle,model year and seating position. The useof an extension intended for anothervehicle, model year or seating positionmay not offer you the full protection ofyour vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.

WARNING: Never use seatbeltextensions to install child restraints.

WARNING: Do not use a seatbeltextension with an inflatable seatbelt.

WARNING: Do not use extensionsto change the way the seatbelt fitsacross the torso, over the lap or to makethe seatbelt buckle easier to reach.

If, because of body size or driving position,it is not possible to properly fasten theseatbelt over your lap and shoulder, anextension that is compatible with theseatbelts is available free of charge fromour dealers. Only use our seatbeltextensions made by the original equipmentseatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.Ask your authorized dealer if your extensionis compatible with your vehicle restraintsystem.

41


Seatbelts

The Personal Safety System provides animproved overall level of frontal crashprotection to front seat occupants and isdesigned to help further reduce the risk ofairbag-related injuries. The system is ableto analyze different occupant conditionsand crash severity before activating theappropriate safety devices to help betterprotect a range of occupants in a varietyof frontal crash situations.The Vehicle Personal Safety Systemconsists of:• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.• Front seat outboard seatbelts with

pretensioners, energy managementretractors and seatbelt usage sensors.

• Driver seat position sensor.• Front passenger sensing system.• Passenger airbag status indicator.• Front crash severity sensors.• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.• Restraint system warning lamp and

tone.• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,front seatbelt usage sensors, driverseat position sensor, front passengersensing system and indicator lights.

How Does the Personal SafetySystem Work?The Personal Safety System can adapt thedeployment strategy of the safety devicesaccording to crash severity and occupantconditions. A collection of crash andoccupant sensors provides information tothe restraints control module. During acrash, the restraints control module maydeploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one orboth stages of the dual-stage airbagsbased on crash severity and occupantconditions.

42


Personal Safety System™


WARNING: Airbags do not inflateslowly or gently, and the risk of injuryfrom a deploying airbag is the greatestclose to the trim covering the airbagmodule.



WARNING: Do not place your armson the airbag cover or through thesteering wheel. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

WARNING: Keep the areas in frontof the airbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the airbagcovers. Objects could become projectilesduring airbag deployment or in a suddenstop. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injurea child in a child restraint. Never place arear-facing child restraint in front of anactive airbag. If you must use aforward-facing child restraint in the frontseat, move the seat upon which the childrestraint is installed all the way back.

WARNING: Do not attempt toservice, repair, or modify thesupplementary restraint system orassociated components. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

WARNING: Several airbag systemcomponents get hot after inflation. Toreduce the risk of injury, do not touchthem after inflation.

WARNING: If a supplementaryrestraint system component hasdeployed, it will not function again. Havethe system and associated componentsinspected as soon as possible. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

The airbags are a supplemental restraintsystem and are designed to work with theseatbelts to help protect the driver andright front passenger from certain upperbody injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;there is a risk of injury from a deployingairbag.Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.The airbags inflate and deflate rapidlyupon activation. After airbag deployment,it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powderyresidue or smell the burnt propellant. Thismay consist of cornstarch, talcum powder(to lubricate the bag) or sodiumcompounds (for example, baking soda)that result from the combustion processthat inflates the airbag. Small amounts ofsodium hydroxide may be present whichmay irritate the skin and eyes, but none ofthe residue is toxic.

43


Supplementary Restraints System

While the system is designed to helpreduce serious injuries, contact with adeploying airbag may also cause abrasionsor swelling. Temporary hearing loss is alsoa possibility as a result of the noiseassociated with a deploying airbag.Because airbags must inflate rapidly andwith considerable force, there is the risk ofdeath or serious injuries such as fractures,facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,particularly to occupants who are notproperly restrained or are otherwise out ofposition at the time of airbag deployment.Thus, it is extremely important thatoccupants be properly restrained as faraway from the airbag module as possiblewhile maintaining vehicle control.Routine maintenance of the airbags is notrequired.

DRIVER AND PASSENGERAIRBAGS

WARNING: Do not place your armson the airbag cover or through thesteering wheel. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

WARNING: Keep the areas in frontof the airbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the airbagcovers. Objects could become projectilesduring airbag deployment or in a suddenstop. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.


E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal and nearfrontal crashes.The driver and passenger front airbagsystem consists of:• Driver and passenger airbag modules.• Front passenger sensing system.

E67017

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 50).

Proper Driver and Front PassengerSeating Adjustment

WARNING: National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)recommends a minimum distance of atleast 10 in (25 cm) between anoccupant's chest and the driver airbagmodule.

To properly position yourself away fromthe airbag:• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or twodegrees) from the upright position.

44



After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seatbelts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seatback, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chanceof injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

Children and Airbags


E142846

Children must always be properlyrestrained. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seating positions than in thefront seating position. Failure to followthese instructions may increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM


WARNING: Sitting improperly, outof position or with the seatback reclinedtoo far can take weight off the seatcushion and affect the decision of thepassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in the event of acrash. Always sit upright against yourseat back, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: Any alteration ormodification to the front passenger seatmay affect the performance of the frontpassenger sensing system. This couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

This system works with sensors that arepart of the front passenger seat andseatbelt to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

E181984

45



The front passenger sensing system usesa passenger airbag status indicator thatilluminates indicating that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is either on(enabled) or off (disabled).The indicator lamp is in the center stack ofthe instrument panel.Note: The passenger airbag statusindicator off and on indicator lampsilluminate for a short period of time whenyou first switch the ignition on to confirm itis functional.The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag when a rearfacing infant seat, a forward-facing childrestraint, or a booster seat is detected.Even with this technology, parents arestrongly encouraged to always properlyrestrain children in the rear seat. Thesensor also turns off the passenger frontairbag when the passenger seat is empty.• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag, thepassenger airbag status indicatorilluminates the off lamp and stays litto remind you that the front passengerfrontal airbag is disabled.

• If you install the child restraint and thepassenger airbag status indicatorilluminates the on lamp, then switchthe vehicle off, remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) the frontpassenger frontal airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult sizeis sitting properly in the front passengerseat.• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), thepassenger airbag status indicatorilluminates the on lamp and remainsilluminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger seat, but the airbag off indicatorlamp is lit, it is possible that the person isnot sitting properly in the seat. If thishappens:• Switch the vehicle off and ask the

person to place the seat backrest in anupright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This allows the system todetect that person and enable thepassenger frontal airbag.

• If the indicator off lamp remains liteven after this, advise the person toride in the rear seat.

Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag StatusIndicator

Occupant

DisabledOFF: LitEmpty

ON: Unlit

DisabledOFF: LitChild

46



Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag StatusIndicator

Occupant

ON: Unlit

EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult

ON: Lit

After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seatbelts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seat backrest,and centered on the seat cushion, withtheir feet comfortably extended on thefloor. Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, liesdown, turns sideways, sits forward, leansforward or sideways, or puts one or bothfeet up, the chance of injury during a crashgreatly increases.If you think that the status of the passengerairbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, checkfor the following:• Objects lodged underneath the seat.• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console.• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.• Objects stowed in the seat backrest

map pocket.• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.• Cargo interference with the seat.• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat.• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seat.

The conditions listed above may cause theweight of a properly seated occupant tobe incorrectly interpreted by the frontpassenger sensing system. The person inthe front passenger seat may appearheavier or lighter due to the conditionsdescribed in the list above.

E67017

Make sure the front passengersensing system is operatingproperly. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 50).

If the airbag readiness light is lit, do thefollowing:The driver and adult passengers shouldcheck for objects lodged underneath thefront passenger seat, or cargo interferingwith the seat.If there are lodged objects, or cargo isinterfering with the seat, take the followingsteps to remove the obstruction:• Pull the vehicle over.• Switch the vehicle off.• Driver and adult passengers should

check for any objects lodgedunderneath the front passenger seator cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).• Restart the vehicle.• Wait at least two minutes and verify

that the airbag readiness light is nolonger illuminated.

• If the airbag readiness light remainsilluminated, this may or may not be aproblem due to the front passengersensing system.

47



Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.If it is necessary to modify an advancedfront airbag system to accommodate aperson with disabilities, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center. SeeGetting the Services You Need (page260).

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theairbag cover, on the side of the front orrear seatbacks, or in areas that maycome into contact with a deployingairbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not use accessoryseat covers. The use of accessory seatcovers may prevent the deployment ofthe side airbags and increase the risk ofinjury in an accident.

WARNING: Do not lean your headon the door. The side airbag could injureyou as it deploys from the side of theseatback.



The side airbags are on the outermost sideof the front seat backrests. In certainsideways crashes or rollover events, theside airbags will be inflated. The airbagwas designed to inflate between the doorpanel and occupant to further enhance theprotection provided to occupants in sideimpact crashes.

E152533

The system consists of the following:• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that your vehicle has sideairbags.

• Side airbags inside the driver and frontpassenger seat backrests.

E67017

Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 50).

48



The design and development of the sideairbag system included recommendedtesting procedures that were developedby a group of automotive safety expertsknown as the Side Airbag TechnicalWorking Group. These recommendedtesting procedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment of sideairbags.

DRIVER AND PASSENGERKNEE AIRBAGS

WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,do not obstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the airbag.

WARNING: Close the glove boxdoor when your vehicle is moving. Failureto follow this instruction could reducethe effectiveness of the passenger kneeairbag and increase the risk of injury in acrash.

A driver knee airbag is located under orwithin the instrument panel. A passengerknee airbag is located within or under theglove box door. During a crash, therestraints control module may activate thedriver and passenger knee airbags basedon crash severity and occupant conditions.Under certain crash and occupantconditions, the driver and passenger kneeairbag may deploy but the driver frontairbag may not activate. As with front andside airbags, it is important to be properlyseated and restrained to reduce the risk ofdeath or serious injury.

E67017

Make sure the knee airbags areoperating properly. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator

(page 50).

SAFETY CANOPY™

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theheadliner at the siderail that may comeinto contact with a deploying curtainairbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not lean your headon the door. The curtain airbag couldinjure you as it deploys from theheadliner.



WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,do not obstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the airbag.


49



The Safety Canopy deploys duringsignificant side crashes or when a certainlikelihood of a rollover event is detectedby the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopyis mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,behind the headliner, above each row ofseats. In certain sideways crashes orrollover events, the Safety Canopy will beactivated, regardless of which seats areoccupied. The Safety Canopy is designedto inflate between the side window areaand occupants to further enhanceprotection provided in side impact crashesand rollover events.

E75004

The system consists of the following:• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above

the trim panels over the front and rearside windows identified by a label orwording on the headliner or roof-pillartrim.

• A flexible headliner which opens abovethe side doors to allow air curtaindeployment

E67017

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with a readinessindicator. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 50).

Properly restrain children 12 years old andunder in the rear seats. The Safety Canopywill not interfere with children restrainedusing a properly installed child or boosterseat because it is designed to inflatedownward from the headliner above thedoors along the side window opening.The design and development of the SafetyCanopy included recommended testingprocedures that were developed by agroup of automotive safety experts knownas the Side Airbag Technical WorkingGroup. These recommended testingprocedures help reduce the risk of injuriesrelated to the deployment of side airbags(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS ANDAIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNING: Modifying or addingequipment to the front end of yourvehicle (including hood, bumper system,frame, front end body structure, towhooks and hood pins) may affect theperformance of the airbag system,increasing the risk of injury. Do notmodify or add equipment to the frontend of your vehicle.

Your vehicle has a collection of crash andoccupant sensors which provideinformation to the restraints controlmodule. The restraints control moduledeploys (activates) the seatbeltpretensioners, driver airbag, passengerairbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted sideairbags and the Safety Canopy. Based onthe type of crash, the restraints controlmodule deploys the appropriate safetydevices.

50



The restraints control module alsomonitors the readiness of the above safetydevices plus the crash and occupantsensors. The readiness of the safetysystem is indicated by a warning indicatorlight in the instrument cluster or by abackup tone if the warning light is notworking. Routine maintenance of theairbag is not required.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

E67017

• The readiness light will not illuminateimmediately after you switch theignition on.

• The readiness light either flashes orstays lit.

• A series of five beeps is heard. The tonepattern repeats periodically until theproblem, the light or both are repaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system serviced at an authorizeddealer immediately. Unless serviced, thesystem may not function properly in theevent of a crash.The restraint system is designed toactivate when the vehicle sustainsconditions sufficient to cause the restraintcontrol module to deploy a safety device.

The fact that not all the safety devicesactivate for all occupants in a crash doesnot mean something is wrong with thesystem. Rather, it means the restraintscontrol module determined the accidentconditions (crash severity, type of crash,belt usage) were not appropriate toactivate these safety devices.• The front airbags are designed to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts) unless the crash causessufficient frontal deceleration.

• The seatbelt pretensioners aredesigned to activate in frontal,near-frontal and side crashes, and inrollovers.

• The knee airbag(s) may deploy basedon crash severity and occupantconditions.

• The side airbags are designed to inflatein certain side impact crashes orrollover events. Side airbags mayactivate in other types of crashes if yourvehicle experiences sufficient sidewaysmotion or deformation, or a certainlikelihood of rollover.

• The Safety Canopy is designed toinflate in certain side impact crashesor rollover events. The Safety Canopymay activate in other types of crashesif your vehicle experiences sufficientsideways motion or deformation, or acertain likelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSALContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Airbags must be disposed of byqualified personnel.

51



GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.

WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressively approvedby the party responsible for compliancecould void the user's authority to operatethe equipment. The term "IC:" before theradio certification number only signifiesthat Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).Vehicles with the remote start feature willhave a greater range.One of the following could cause adecrease in operating range:• Weather conditions.• Nearby radio towers.• Structures around the vehicle.• Other vehicles parked next to your

vehicle.The radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other radiotransmitters, for example amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,wireless remote controls, cell phones,battery chargers and alarm systems. If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle beforeleaving it unattended.

Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.Note: The remote control contains sensitiveelectrical components. Exposure to moistureor impact may cause permanent damage.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)

The system uses a radio frequency signalto communicate with your vehicle andauthorize your vehicle to unlock when oneof the following conditions are met:• You activate the front exterior door

handle switch.• You press the luggage compartment

button.• You press a button on the transmitter.If excessive radio frequency interferenceis present in the area or if the transmitterbattery is low, you may need tomechanically unlock your door. You canuse the mechanical key blade in yourintelligent access key to open the driverdoor in this situation. See RemoteControl (page 52).

REMOTE CONTROLIntelligent Access KeyNote: You may not be able to shift out ofpark (P) unless the remote control is insideyour vehicle.

52


Keys and Remote Controls

E305198

The remote control operates the powerlocks and the remote start system. Thekey must be in your vehicle to activate thepush-button start system.

Removable Key BladeThe remote control also contains aremovable mechanical key blade that youcan use to unlock the driver door.

E305199

Push the release button and pull the keyblade out.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with asecurity label that provides important keycut information. Keep the label in a safeplace for future reference.

Replacing the Battery

WARNING: Keep batteries awayfrom children to prevent ingestion.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death. Ifingested, immediately seek medicalattention.

53



WARNING: If the batterycompartment does not securely close,stop using the remote control andreplace it as soon as possible. In themeantime, keep the remote control awayfrom children. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

Note: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of remote control batteries.Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface ofthe circuit board.Note: Replacing the battery does not deletethe remote control programming to yourvehicle. The remote control should operatenormally after you replace the battery.A message appears in the informationdisplay when the remote control batteryis low. See Information Displays (page105).

Intelligent Access KeyThe remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery CR2450 orequivalent.

E305199

1. Push the release button and pull thekey blade out.

54



E303824

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hiddenbehind the key blade head to removethe battery cover.

E218402

3. Insert a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, in the position shown andcarefully remove the battery.

4. Install new battery with the + facingupward.

5. Reinstall the battery cover and the keyblade.

Using the Key BladeThe key cylinder is under a cap on the driverdoor handle.To remove the cap:

55



E151956

1. Insert the key blade into the slot on thebottom of the handle and press up.

2. While maintaining upward pressure,move the cap rearward to release it.Gently remove the key while doing so.

To install the cap:

E151957

1. Place the cap just forward of the keycylinder.

2. While applying pressure to the cap,move it forward until it is in place. Youmay hear a snap as it engages.

Make sure you have properly installed thecap by trying to move it rearward.

Linking a Preset Position to YourRemote ControlSee Memory Function (page 142).

Locating Your Vehicle

E138623

Press the button twice withinthree seconds. The horn soundsand the direction indicators

flash. We recommend you use this methodto locate your vehicle, rather than usingthe panic alarm.

Sounding a Panic AlarmNote: The panic alarm only operates whenthe ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to sound thepanic alarm. Press the buttonagain or switch the ignition on to

deactivate.

Remote Start (If Equipped)

WARNING: To avoid exhaustfumes, do not use remote start if yourvehicle is parked indoors or in areas thatare not well ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your fuellevel is low.

E138625

The remote start button is on theremote control.

This feature allows you to start yourvehicle from outside the vehicle. Theremote control has an extended operatingrange.Vehicles with automatic climate controlcan be configured to operate when thevehicle is remote started. See ClimateControl (page 131).

56



Many states and provinces haverestrictions for the use of remote start.Check your local and state or provinciallaws for specific requirements regardingremote start systems.The remote start system does not work if:• The ignition is on.• The alarm system is triggered.• You switch off the feature in the

information display. See InformationDisplays (page 105).

• The hood is open.• The transmission is not in park (P).• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.• The service engine soon light is on.

Remote Starting Your VehicleNote: You must press each button withinthree seconds of each other. If you do notfollow this sequence, your vehicle does notstart remotely, the direction indicators donot flash twice and the horn does not sound.

E138626

To remote start your vehicle:1. Press the lock button.2. Press the remote start button twice.

The exterior lamps flash twice.The horn sounds if the system fails to start.The power windows do not work duringthe remote start and the radio does notturn on automatically.

The parking lamps remain on and thevehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,depending on the setting. SeeInformation Displays (page 105).

Extending the Vehicle Run TimeTo extend the engine running time durationof your vehicle during remote start, repeatsteps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.If you programmed the duration to last 10minutes, the second 10 minutes will beginafter what is left of the first activationtime. For example, if your vehicle had beenrunning from the first remote start for 5minutes, your vehicle continues to run nowfor a total of 20 minutes. You can extendthe remote start up to a maximum of 35minutes.Wait at least five seconds before remotestarting after a vehicle shutdown.

Turning Your Vehicle Off After RemoteStarting

E138625

Press the button once. Theparking lamps turn off.You may have to be closer to

your vehicle to remotely switch off yourvehicle after remote starting. This is dueto the added noise of your running vehicle.You can disable or enable the remote startsystem through the information display.See Information Displays (page 105).

Remote Control FeedbackAn LED on the remote control providesstatus feedback of remote start or stopcommands.

57



StatusLED

Remote start orextensionsuccessful

Solid green

Remote stopsuccessful; engine

off

Solid red

Remote start orstop failed

Blinking red

Waiting for statusupdate from vehicle

Blinking green

Global Opening and ClosingYou can use the remote control to operatethe windows.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

You can use the remote control to recallmemory positions. If programmed to apre-set position, the remote control recallsmemory positions when you unlock yourvehicle. See Memory Function (page 142).

Remote Control Information Messages

ActionMessage

Displays when the remote control battery requires replacing.Key Battery Low ReplaceSoon

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLReplacement keys or remote controls canbe purchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle.

58



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. All but one of the keys canbe activated with these restricted modes.Any keys that remain unprogrammed arereferred to as administrator keys or adminkeys. They can be used to:• Create a MyKey.• Program configurable MyKey settings.• Clear all MyKey features.When you have created a MyKey, you canaccess the following information by usingthe information display to determine:• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to your vehicle.• The total distance your vehicle traveled

with a MyKey.Note: Switch the vehicle on to use thesystem.Note: All MyKeys are programmed to thesame settings. You cannot program themindividually.Note: For vehicles equipped withpush-button start, when both a MyKey andan admin remote transmitter are present,the admin remote transmitter will berecognized by the vehicle while switchingthe vehicle on to start the vehicle.

Non-configurable SettingsThe following settings cannot be changedby an admin key user:• Safety belt reminder. You cannot

disable this feature. The audio systemwill mute when the driver and frontseat passengers’ safety belts are notfastened.

• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuelor low charge warning activates earlier,giving the MyKey user more time torefuel or recharge.

• Restricted touchscreen operation insome markets. For example, MyKeymay prevent manual navigationdestination input while the vehicle is inany gear other than park (P) or whenthe vehicle reaches a certain rate ofspeed.

• Satellite radio adult contentrestrictions, if equipped on your vehicle.

Note: Audio system may not mute onvehicles equipped with a basic AM/FM radio.Note: You may be able to turn the lanedeparture warning feature off, but featurewill automatically re-activate with everynew key cycle.

Configurable SettingsWith an admin key, you can configurecertain MyKey settings when you firstcreate a MyKey and before you recycle thekey or restart the vehicle. You can alsochange the settings afterward with anadmin key.Note: Available vehicle features will appearin your information display, providingchoices to switch them on or off, or to selecta more specific setting.

59


MyKey™

• A vehicle speed limit can be set.Warnings will be shown in the displayfollowed by an audible tone when yourvehicle reaches the set speed. Youcannot override the set speed by fullydepressing the accelerator pedal or bysetting cruise control.

WARNING: Do not set MyKeymaximum speed limit to a limit that willprevent the driver from maintaining asafe speed considering posted speedlimits and prevailing road conditions. Thedriver is always responsible to drive inaccordance with local laws andprevailing conditions. Failure to do socould result in accident or injury.

• Various vehicle speed minders can beset. Once you select a speed, it will beshown in the display, followed by anaudible tone when the preselectedvehicle speed is exceeded.

• Audio system maximum volume of45%. A message will be shown in thedisplay when you attempt to exceedthe limited volume. Also, thespeed-sensitive or compensatedautomatic volume control will bedisabled.

• Always on setting. When this isselected, you will not be able to switchoff AdvanceTrac™ or traction control,911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, orthe do not disturb feature (if yourvehicle is equipped with thesefeatures).

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey:

1. Insert the key you want to program intothe ignition. If your vehicle is equippedwith a push-button start, place theremote control into the backup slot.See Starting a Gasoline Engine(page 159).

2. Switch the ignition on.3. Access the main menu in the

information display and then scrollthrough the menus to change thesettings of your MyKey. From theMyKey menu select the option CreateMyKey. See Information Displays(page 105).

4. When prompted, hold the OK buttonuntil you see a message informing youto label this key as a MyKey. Theprogrammed restrictions apply whenyou key off, open and close the driverdoor and restart your vehicle with theprogrammed key or transmitter.

MyKey is successfully created. Make sureyou label it so you can distinguish it fromthe admin keys.You can also program configurablesettings for the key(s). See Programmingand Changing Configurable Settings.

Programming and ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to access yourconfigurable MyKey settings.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key or transmitter you want to program.2. Access the main menu in the

information display and then scrollthrough the menus to change thesettings of your MyKey. SeeInformation Displays (page 105).

60


MyKey™

3. Follow the instructions in the display.The programmed restrictions applywhen you switch the vehicle off, openand close the driver door and restartyour vehicle with the programmed keyor transmitter.

Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same keycycle as you created the MyKey. Once youhave switched the vehicle off, however, youwill need an admin key to change or clearyour MyKey settings. When you make anychanges to your MyKey settings, you changethe settings for every MyKey. You cannotmake individual changes to apply to certainMyKeys.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSWhen you clear your MyKeys, you removeall restrictions and return all MyKeys totheir original admin key status at once. Toclear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, usethe information display.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key.2. Access the main menu in the

information display and then scrollthrough the menus to begin clearingyour MyKey programming. SeeInformation Displays (page 105).

3. Follow the instructions in the display.4. A confirmation message appears in the

display after you finish clearing yourMyKeys.

Note: When you clear your MyKeys, youremove all restrictions and return all MyKeysto their original admin key status. Youcannot remove the MyKey restrictionsindividually.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUSYou can find information about yourprogrammed MyKeys by using theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 105).

MyKey DistanceTracks the distance when drivers use aMyKey. The only way to delete theaccumulated distance is by using an adminkey to clear all MyKeys. If the distance doesnot accumulate as expected, then theintended user is not using the MyKey, or anadmin key user recently cleared and thenrecreated a MyKey.

Number of MyKeysIndicates the number of MyKeysprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to detect how many MyKeys youhave for your vehicle and determine whenall MyKeys have been deleted.

Number of Admin KeysIndicates how many admin keys areprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to determine how many adminkeys you have for your vehicle, and detectif an additional MyKey has beenprogrammed.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible with nonFord-approved, aftermarket remote startsystems. If you choose to install a remotestart system, see an authorized dealer fora Ford-approved remote start system.

61


MyKey™

MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential causesCondition

· The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle does not have admin privileges.

I cannot create a MyKey.

· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure youplace the transmitter into the backup slot.See Passive Anti-Theft System (page75).· The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle is the only admin key. There alwayshas to be at least one admin key.· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system isdisabled or in unlimited mode.


I cannot program the configurable settings.

· There are no MyKeys programmed to thevehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).


I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· No MyKeys are created. See Creating aMyKey (page 60).

· Purchase a new key or transmitter fromyour authorized dealer.

I lost the only admin key.

· Program a spare key or transmitter. Youmay need to see your authorized dealer.See Passive Anti-Theft System (page75).

I lost a key.

· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeysand created new MyKeys.· The key system has been reset.

62


MyKey™

LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGYou can use the power door lock controlor the remote control to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock control is on the driverand front passenger door panels.

E138628

Unlock.ALock.B

Door Lock IndicatorAn LED on each door window trimilluminates when you lock the door. Itremains on for up to 10 minutes after youswitch the ignition off.

Door Lock Switch InhibitorWhen you electronically lock your vehicle,the power door lock switch no longeroperates after 20 seconds. You mustunlock your vehicle with the remote controlor keyless keypad, or switch the ignitionon, to restore function to these switches.You can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 105).

Rear Door Unlocking and OpeningPull the interior door handle twice tounlock and open a rear door. The first pullunlocks the door and the second pullunlatches the door.

Remote ControlYou can use the remote control at anytime. The luggage compartment releasebutton only operates when your vehicle'sspeed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Unlocking the Doors

E138629

Press the button to unlock thedriver door.Press the button again within

three seconds to unlock all doors. Thedirection indicators flash.Note: If the system does not function, usethe key blade to lock and unlock yourvehicle.Press and hold both the lock and unlockbuttons on the remote control for threeseconds to change between driver door orall doors unlock mode. The directionindicators flash twice to indicate a changeto the unlocking mode. Driver door unlockmode only unlocks the driver door whenthe unlock button is pressed once. All doorunlock mode unlocks all doors when theunlock button is pressed once. Theunlocking mode applies to the remotecontrol, keyless entry keypad andintelligent access. You can also change themode in the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 105).

Reprogramming the Unlocking FunctionNote: When you press the unlock button,either all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlockbutton again unlocks all the doors.Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote control simultaneously forat least four seconds with the ignition off.The direction indicators flash twice toconfirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

63


Doors and Locks

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock alldoors. The direction indicatorsflash. Press the button again

within three seconds to confirm that allthe doors are closed. The doors lock again,the horn sounds and the directionindicators flash if all the doors and theluggage compartment are closed.Note: If the system does not function, usethe key blade to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

MislockIf any door or the luggage compartment isopen, or if the hood is open on vehicleswith an anti-theft alarm or remote start,the horn sounds twice and the directionindicators do not flash. You can switchthis feature on or off in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page105).

Opening the Luggage Compartment

E138630

Press twice within three secondsto open the luggagecompartment.

Locking and Unlocking the Doorswith the Key BladeLocking the Doors

E151956

If the central locking function does notoperate, lock the doors individually usingthe key in the position shown.

Left-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock.

Right-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock.

Unlocking the DoorsIf the central locking function fails tooperate, unlock the driver door and thenunlock all other doors individually bypulling the interior door handles.Note: If the doors have been unlocked usingthis method, the doors must be lockedindividually until the central locking functionhas been repaired.

64


Doors and Locks

Activating Intelligent AccessGeneral InformationYou can unlock and lock the vehiclewithout taking the keys out of your pocketor purse when your intelligent access keyis within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.Intelligent access uses a sensor on theback of the door handle for unlocking anda separate sensor on the face of each doorhandle for locking.The system does not function if:• Your vehicle battery has no charge.• The key battery has no charge.• The key frequencies are jammed.Note: The system may not function if thekey is close to metal objects or electronicdevices, for example keys or a cell phone.Note: If the system does not function, usethe key blade to lock and unlock yourvehicle. See Remote Control (page 52).

Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

E248553

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlocksensor on the back of the door handle fora brief period and then pull on the doorhandle to unlock, being careful to nottouch the lock sensor at the same time orpulling the door handle too quickly. Theintelligent access system requires a briefdelay to authenticate your intelligentaccess key fob.

Locking Using Intelligent Access

E248554

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer doorhandle lock sensor for approximately onesecond to lock, being careful to not touchthe unlock sensor on the back of the doorhandle at the same time. After locking, youcan immediately pull on the door handleto confirm locking occurred withoutinadvertently unlocking.

Opening the Luggage Compartment

E138632

Press the button located in the top of theliftgate pull cup handle to unlatch theliftgate, and then pull on the outsidehandle.

Smart Unlocks for IntelligentAccess KeysThis helps to prevent you from locking yourkey inside the passenger compartment orrear cargo area.

65


Doors and Locks

When you electronically lock your vehiclewith any door open, transmission in park(P) and the ignition off, the systemsearches for an intelligent access key inthe passenger compartment after youclose the last door. If the system finds akey, all of the doors immediately unlockand the horn sounds twice, indicating thata key is inside.You can override the smart unlock featureand intentionally lock the intelligent accesskey inside your vehicle. To do this, lock yourvehicle after you have closed all the doorsby:• Using the keyless entry keypad.• Pressing the lock button on another

intelligent access key.• Touching the locking area on the

handle with another intelligent accesskey in your hand.

When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle using the power door lockcontrol, all doors lock then unlock if:• The ignition is on.• The ignition is off and the transmission

is not in park (P).

Auto RelockIf you press the unlock button on theremote control and do not open a doorwithin 45 seconds, your vehicle locks andthe alarm arms. You can switch thisfeature on or off in the information display.See General Information (page 105).

Autolock (If Equipped)

Autolock locks all the doors when:• All doors are closed.• The ignition is on.• You shift into any gear putting your

vehicle in motion.• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater

than

Autolock repeats when:• You open then close any door while the

ignition is on and your vehicle speed is9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.

• Your vehicle reaches a speed greaterthan

AutounlockAutounlock unlocks all the doors when:• The ignition is on, all the doors are

closed, and your vehicle has beenmoving at a speed greater than 12 mph(20 km/h).

• Your vehicle comes to a stop and youswitch the ignition off or to theaccessory position.

• You open the driver door within 10minutes of switching the ignition off orto accessory.

Note: The doors do not autounlock if youelectronically lock your vehicle after youswitch the ignition off and before you openthe driver door.

Enabling or Disabling AutounlockYou can enable or disable the autounlockfeature in the information display or anauthorized dealer can do it for you.

Illuminated EntryThe interior lamps and some exteriorlamps illuminate when you unlock thedoors with the remote control.The lamps turn off if:• The ignition is on.• You press the remote control lock

button.• 25 seconds have elapsed.The lamps do not turn off if:• You turn them on with the lamp

control.• Any door is open.

66


Doors and Locks

Illuminated ExitThe interior lamps and some exteriorlamps illuminate when all doors are closed,you switch the ignition off and you removethe key from the ignition.The lamps turn off if all the doors remainclosed and:• 25 seconds have elapsed.• You press the START/STOP button.

Battery SaverIf you leave the courtesy lamps, domelamps or headlamps on, the battery savershuts them off 10 minutes after you switchthe ignition off.

Accessory Mode Battery Saver forIntelligent Access KeysIf you leave the ignition switched on, itshuts off once it detects a certain amountof battery drain, or after 45 minutes.

KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPADThe keypad is near the driver window. Itilluminates when touched.Note: If you enter your entry code too faston the keypad, the unlock function may notwork. Enter your entry code again moreslowly.

E138637

You can use the keypad to do thefollowing:• Lock or unlock the doors.• Recall memory seat and mirror

positions.• Program and erase user codes.• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.You can operate the keypad with thefactory-set five-digit entry code. The codeis on the owner’s wallet card in the glovebox and is available from an authorizeddealer. You can also program up to five ofyour own five-digit personal entry codes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.3. Enter your personal five-digit code.

You must do this within five secondsof completing step 2.

4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to savepersonal code 1.

The doors lock then unlock to confirm thatprogramming was successful.

67


Doors and Locks

To program additional personal entrycodes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then forstep 4:• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.If your vehicle is fitted with MyFord Touch,you can also program the system with apersonal entry code. See Settings (page413).Hints:• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.• The factory-set code works even if you

have set your own personal code.

Erasing a Personal Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad

within five seconds.3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.

You must do this within five secondsof completing Step 2.

All personal codes erase and only thefactory-set five-digit code works.

Anti-Scan FeatureThe keypad goes into an anti-scan modeif you enter the wrong code seven times.This mode turns off the keypad for oneminute and the keypad lamp flashes.The anti-scan feature turns off after:• One minute of keypad inactivity.• You press the unlock button on the

remote control.• You switch the ignition on.• You unlock your vehicle using

intelligent access.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Locking All DoorsPress and hold 7·8 and 9·0 simultaneouslywith the driver door closed. You do notneed to enter the keypad code first.

Unlocking the Driver DoorEnter the factory-set or your personalfive-digit code. You must press eachnumber within five seconds of each other.The interior lamps illuminate.Note: All doors unlock if you enable theall-door unlocking mode. See Locking andUnlocking (page 63).

Unlocking All DoorsEnter the factory-set or your personalfive-digit code, then press 3·4 within fiveseconds.

Displaying the Factory-Set CodeNote: You need to have two programmedintelligent access keys for this procedure.

E284085

1

1. Open the floor console storagecompartment lid.

68


Doors and Locks

E195808

2

2. With the buttons facing the rear of yourvehicle and the key ring up, place thefirst intelligent access key into thebackup slot inside the center console.

3. Press the START/STOP button onceand wait a few seconds.

4. Press the START/STOP button againand remove the key.

5. Insert the second programmed key intothe backup slot, then press theSTART/STOP button.

The factory-set code appears in theinformation display for a few seconds.Note: The code may not display until afterany other warning messages first display.

69


Doors and Locks

MANUAL LIFTGATE


WARNING: Make sure that you fullyclose the liftgate to prevent exhaustfumes from entering your vehicle. If youare unable to fully close the liftgate,open the air vents or the windows toallow fresh air to enter your vehicle.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death.

Note: Be careful when opening or closingthe liftgate in a garage or other enclosedarea to avoid damaging the liftgate.Note: Do not hang anything, for examplea bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. Thiscould damage the liftgate and itscomponents.Note: Do not leave the liftgate open whiledriving. This could damage the liftgate andits components.

Opening the LiftgateManually

E138632

Press the button located in the top of theliftgate pull cup handle to unlatch theliftgate, and then pull on the outsidehandle.

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

Closing the Liftgate

E155976

A handle is located inside the liftgate tohelp with closing.

70


Liftgate

POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)


WARNING: Make sure that you fullyclose the liftgate to prevent exhaustfumes from entering your vehicle. If youare unable to fully close the liftgate,open the air vents or the windows toallow fresh air to enter your vehicle.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Make sure that you fullyclose the liftgate to prevent passengersand cargo from falling out. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

WARNING: Keep keys out of reachof children. Do not allow children tooperate or play near an open or movingpower liftgate. You should supervise theoperation of the power liftgate at alltimes.

Note: Make sure that you close the liftgatebefore operating or moving your vehicle,especially in an enclosure, like a garage ora parking structure. This could damage theliftgate and its components.Note: Do not hang anything, for examplea bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. Thiscould damage the liftgate and itscomponents.

The liftgate only operates with thetransmission in park (P).If there is a problem with the open or closerequest, a tone sounds for one of thefollowing reasons:• The ignition is on and the transmission

is not in park (P).• The battery voltage is below the

minimum operating voltage.• The liftgate is not fully closed and your

vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph(5 km/h).

If the liftgate starts to close after it hasfully opened, this indicates there may beexcessive weight on the liftgate or apossible strut failure. A repetitive tonesounds and the liftgate closes undercontrol. Remove any excessive weightfrom the liftgate. If the liftgate continuesto close after opening, have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate

WARNING: Make sure all personsare clear of the power liftgate areabefore using the power liftgate control.

Note: Make sure the area behind yourvehicle is free from obstruction and thatthere is enough room for you to operate theliftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,for example a wall, garage door or anothervehicle may come into contact with themoving liftgate. This could damage theliftgate and its components.Note: Be careful when opening or closingthe liftgate in a garage or other enclosedarea to avoid damaging the liftgate.Note: Do not leave the liftgate open whenyou are driving. This could damage theliftgate and its components.

71


Liftgate

From the Instrument Panel

E138633

With the transmission in park(P), press the button on theinstrument panel.

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

With the Outside Control Button

Opening the Liftgate1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote

control or power door unlock control.If a remote control is within 3 ft (1 m)of the liftgate, the liftgate unlockswhen you press the liftgate releasebutton.

E138632

2. Press the control button located in thetop of the liftgate pull-cup handle.

Note: Allow the power system to open theliftgate. Manually pushing or pulling theliftgate may activate the system’s obstacledetection feature and stop the poweroperation or reverse its direction, replicatea strut failure, or damage mechanicalcomponents.

Closing the Liftgate

WARNING: Keep clear of theliftgate when using the rear switch.

E138636

Press and release the liftgate button.

Stopping the Liftgate MovementNote: Do not apply sudden excessive forceto the liftgate while it is in motion. Thiscould damage the power liftgate and itscomponents.You can stop the liftgate movement bydoing any of the following:• Pressing the liftgate control button.• Pressing the liftgate button on the

remote control twice.• Pressing the liftgate button on the

instrument panel.• Moving your foot under and away from

the center rear bumper in a single-kickmotion.*

*This method only works for vehicles withthe hands-free liftgate feature.

Setting the Liftgate Open Height1. Open the liftgate.2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing

the control button on the liftgate whenit reaches the desired height.

72


Liftgate

Note: Once the liftgate has stoppedmoving, you can also manually move it tothe desired height.3. Press and hold the liftgate control

button on the liftgate until you hear atone, indicating programming iscomplete.

Note: You can only use the liftgate controlbutton to program the height.Note: You cannot program the height if theliftgate position is too low.The new open liftgate height is recalledwhen the power liftgate is opened. Tochange the programmed height, repeat theabove procedure. Once you open thepower liftgate, you can manually move itto a different height.Note: The system recalls the newprogrammed height until you reprogram it,even if you disconnect the battery.When operating the power liftgate afteryou have programmed a lower height thanfully open, you can fully open the liftgateby manually pushing it upward to themaximum open position.

Obstacle DetectionWhen ClosingThe system stops when it detects anobstacle. A tone sounds and the systemreverses to open. Once you remove theobstacle, you can power close the liftgate.Note: Entering your vehicle while theliftgate is closing can cause your vehicle tobounce and activate obstacle detection. Toprevent this, let the power liftgate closecompletely before you enter your vehicle.Before driving off, check the instrumentcluster for a liftgate or door ajar message orwarning indicator. Failure to do this couldresult in unintentionally leaving the liftgateopen while driving.

When OpeningThe system stops when it detects anobstacle and a tone sounds. Once youremove the obstacle, you can continue tooperate the liftgate.

Switching the Power Liftgate Onor OffYou can switch the power liftgate on or offthrough the vehicle settings in yourinformation display.When switched off, the liftgate onlyunlatches and will not power open or close.

Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)

Make sure you have the remote controlwithin 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the

liftgate.2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,

without pausing, under and away fromthe rear bumper detection area.

E300799

3. The liftgate opens or closes.Avoid the following actions when using thehands-free opening feature:• Making physical contact with the

bumper.• Holding your foot under the bumper.• Sweeping your foot from side to side,

or kicking at an odd angle.

73


Liftgate

Detection zonesVehicles Without a Trailer Hitch

E310717

The detection area is in the center of therear bumper.Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch

E310718

The detection area is on the left-hand sideand right-hand side of the hitch, betweenthe exhaust and the hitch.Note: Allow the power system to open theliftgate. Manually pushing or pulling theliftgate may activate the system’s obstacledetection feature and stop the poweroperation or reverse its direction, replicatea strut failure, or damage mechanicalcomponents.Note: Splashing water may cause thehands-free liftgate to open. Keep theremote control away from the rear bumperdetection area when you wash your vehicle.

74


Liftgate

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEMNote: The system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.Use of these systems may result in enginestarting problems and a loss of securityprotection.Note: Metallic objects, electronic devicesor a second coded key on the same keychain may result in vehicle startingproblems, especially if they are too close tothe key when starting your vehicle. Preventthese objects from touching the coded keywhen starting your vehicle. Switch theignition off, move all objects on the keychain away from the coded key and restartyour vehicle if a problem occurs.Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded keyin your vehicle. Always take your keys andlock all doors when leaving your vehicle.

SecuriLock®The system helps prevent the engine fromstarting unless you use a coded keyprogrammed to your vehicle. Using thewrong key may prevent your vehicle fromstarting. A message may appear in theinformation display.If you are unable to start your vehicle witha coded key, it is not operating correctly.A message may appear in the informationdisplay.

Automatic ArmingThe system arms when you switch theignition off.

Automatic DisarmingThe system disarms when you switch theignition on with a coded key.

Replacement KeysNote: Your vehicle comes with two keys.

The intelligent access key functions as aprogrammed key that operates the driverdoor lock and turns on the intelligentaccess with push button start system, aswell as a remote control.If your programmed transmitters are lostor stolen and you do not have an extracoded key, you will need to have yourvehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Youneed to erase the key codes from yourvehicle and program new coded keys.Store a spare intelligent access key awayfrom your vehicle in a safe place. You canpurchase replacement keys or remotecontrols from an authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare IntelligentAccess KeyNote: You can program a maximum of fourkeys to your vehicle.You must have two previouslyprogrammed intelligent access keys insideyour vehicle and the new unprogrammedintelligent access key readily accessible.You can purchase replacement keys orremote controls from an authorized dealer.Make sure that the ignition is switched offbefore beginning this procedure. Make surethat you close all the doors beforebeginning and that they remain closedthroughout the procedure. Carry out allsteps within 30 seconds of starting thesequence. Stop and wait for at least oneminute before starting again if you carryout any steps out of sequence.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.1. Remove the key blade from the

transmitter.

75


Security

E284084

2. Open the center console lid. With thebuttons facing upward and the unlockbutton facing the front of your vehicle,place the first intelligent access keyinto the backup slot.

3. Press the push button ignition switch.4. Wait five seconds and then press the

push button ignition switch again.5. Remove the intelligent access key.6. Within 10 seconds, place a second

programmed intelligent access key inthe backup slot and press the pushbutton ignition switch.

7. Wait five seconds and then press thepush button ignition switch again.

8. Remove the intelligent access key.

9. Wait five seconds, then place theunprogrammed intelligent access keyin the backup slot and press the pushbutton ignition switch.

Programming is now complete. Check thatthe remote control functions operate andyour vehicle starts with the new intelligentaccess key.If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If itstill does not work, take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)

The system will warn you of anunauthorized entry to your vehicle. It willbe triggered if any door, the luggagecompartment or the hood is openedwithout using the key, remote control orkeyless entry keypad.The direction indicators will flash and thehorn will sound if unauthorized entry isattempted while the alarm is armed.Take all remote controls to an authorizeddealer if there is any potential alarmproblem with your vehicle.

Arming the AlarmThe alarm is ready to arm when there isnot a key in your vehicle. Electronically lockyour vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the AlarmDisarm the alarm by any of the followingactions:

76


Security

• Unlock the doors or luggagecompartment with the remote controlor keyless entry keypad.

• Switch your vehicle on or start yourvehicle.

• Use a key in the driver door to unlockyour vehicle, then switch your vehicleon within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on theremote control will stop the horn and signalindicators, but will not disarm the system.

77


Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:MANUAL ADJUSTABLESTEERING COLUMN

WARNING: Do not adjust thesteering wheel when your vehicle ismoving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 137).

E191039

1. Unlock the steering column.2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E191047

3. Lock the steering column.

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:POWER ADJUSTABLESTEERING COLUMN

WARNING: Do not adjust thesteering wheel when your vehicle ismoving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 137).

E261582

Use the control on the side of the steeringcolumn to adjust the position.To adjust:• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the

control.• Telescope: Press the front or rear of

the control.

78


Steering Wheel

End of Travel PositionThe steering column sets a stoppingposition just short of the end of the columnposition to prevent damage to the steeringcolumn. A new stopping position sets ifthe steering column encounters an objectwhen tilting or telescoping.To reset the steering column to its normalstopping position:1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing

the motion of the steering column.2. Press and hold the steering column

control until the steering column stopsmoving.

3. Press the steering column controlagain.

Note: The steering column may begin tomove again.4. When the steering column stops,

continue holding the control for a fewseconds.

5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.A new stopping position sets. The nexttime you tilt or telescope the steeringcolumn, it stops just short of the end of thecolumn position.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the steeringcolumn position with the memoryfunction. See Memory Function (page142).Pressing the adjustment control during amemory recall cancels the operation.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureThe column moves up when you switchthe ignition off. Switch the ignition on toreturn the system to its previous settings.You can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. See Steering Wheel(page 78).

Note: If you press any adjustment ormemory button when in easy exit mode, thesystem cancels the operation.Note: Depending on your vehicle, thecolumn may move up and in.

AUDIO CONTROL

E289637

You can operate the followingfunctions with the control:

E265304

Press - to decrease volume level.Press + to increase volume level.

Press to access the previousmedia selection.

Press to access the next mediaselection.

Press to access phone mode orto answer a phone call.

E265040

Press to end a phone call.

E268549

Press to silence the currentmedia.

79


Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROLThe controls are on the steering wheel.

E142599

Press and release to activatevoice recognition.

CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLESWITH: CRUISE CONTROL

E191246

See What Is Cruise Control (page 212).

CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLESWITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL/LANE CENTERING

E266198

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 213).

INFORMATION DISPLAYCONTROL

E144636

See Information Displays (page 105).

80


Steering Wheel

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF

EQUIPPED)

Switch the heated steering wheel on andoff using the touchscreen.

Touch the button to switch theheated steering wheel on andoff.

Note: You can use the heated steeringwheel only when the engine is running.Note: The system uses a sensor and isdesigned to control the temperature of thesteering wheel and to prevent it fromoverheating.Note: In warm temperatures, the steeringwheel quickly reaches its maximumtemperature and the system reduces thecurrent to the heating element. This couldcause you to think that the system hasstopped working but it has not. This isnormal.

HORN

E270945

81


Steering Wheel

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

E270969

Push the lever up or down tooperate the windshield wiper.

E197525

Single wipe.AIntermittent wipe.BNormal wipe.CHigh speed wipe.D

Note: Fully defrost the windshield beforeyou switch the windshield wipers on.Note: Make sure that you switch thewindshield wipers off before entering a carwash.Note: If streaks or smears appear on thewindshield, clean the windshield and thewiper blades. If that does not resolve theissue, install new wiper blades.Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.

Intermittent Wipe

E197526

Shortest wipe interval.AIntermittent wipe.BLongest wipe interval.C

Use the rotary control to adjust theintermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent WipersWhen your vehicle speed increases, theinterval between wipes decreases.

AUTOWIPERSNote: Fully defrost the windshield beforeyou switch the windshield wipers on.Note: Make sure that you switch thewindshield wipers off before entering a carwash.Note: If streaks or smears appear on thewindshield, clean the windshield and thewiper blades. If that does not resolve theissue, install new wiper blades.Note: If you switch autolamps andautowipers on, the headlamps turn on whenthe windshield wipers continuously operate.Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,snow or salty road mist can causeinconsistent and unexpected wiping orsmearing.

82


Wipers and Washers

E197526

High sensitivity.AAutowipers on.BLow sensitivity.C

Move the wiper lever upward to the firstposition to switch the autowipers on.Use the rotary control to adjust thesensitivity of the autowipers. When youselect low sensitivity, the wipers operatewhen the sensor detects a large amountof water on the windshield. When youselect high sensitivity, the wipers operatewhen the sensor detects a small amountof water on the windshield.Keep the outside of the windshield clean.The rain sensor is very sensitive and thewipers may operate if dirt, mist or insectshit the windshield.In these conditions, you can do thefollowing:• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers

to reduce the amount of smearing onthe windshield.

• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.• Switch autowipers off.

Autowipers SettingsAutowipers defaults to on and remains onuntil you switch it off in the informationdisplay. When you switch off autowipers,the wipers operate in intermittent mode.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

E197528

E270967

Pull the lever toward you tooperate the windshield washers.

When you release the lever, the wipersoperate for a short time. When activated,a courtesy wipe occurs a short time afterthe wipers stop to clear any remainingwasher fluid.Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on oroff in the information display SeeInformation Messages (page 115).Note: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This couldcause the washer pump to overheat.

Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)

Operating the windshield washer also turnson the front camera washer.

83


Wipers and Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSNote: Make sure you switch the windshieldwipers off before entering a car wash.

E171615

Intermittent wipe.ALow speed wipe.BOff.C

Depending on your vehicle, when youswitch on the front wipers and move thegearshift lever to reverse (R), the rearintermittent wipe may turn on.

Rear Window Washer

E167407

Push the lever away from you to operatethe rear window washer.When you release the lever, wipingcontinues for a short period of time.

Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)

Switching on the rear washer also turns onthe rear camera washer.

84


Wipers and Washers

GENERAL INFORMATIONCondensation in the Exterior FrontLamps and Rear LampsExterior front lamps and rear lamps havevents to accommodate normal changesin air pressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,

drip marks or large droplets).• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.Examples of unacceptable condensationare:• A water puddle inside the lamp.• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets

present on the interior of the lens.If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

Lamps off.AParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andtail lamps.

B

Headlamps.C

Headlamp High Beam

E162679

Push the lever away from you toswitch the high beam on.

Push the lever forward again or pull thelever toward you to switch the high beamsoff.

85


Lighting

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam

E162680

Slightly pull the lever toward you andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNING: The system does notrelieve you of your responsibility to drivewith due care and attention. You mayneed to override the system if it does notturn the headlamps on in low visibilityconditions, for example daytime fog.

Autolamps turn the headlamps on in lowlight situations or when the wipers operate.

Switch the lighting control to theautolamps position.

The headlamps remain on for a period oftime after you switch the ignition off. Usethe information display controls to adjustthe period of time that the headlampsremain on.Note: If you switch the autolamps on, youcannot switch the high beams on until thesystem turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsWhen you switch the autolamps on, theheadlamps turn on within 10 seconds ofswitching the wipers on. They turn offapproximately 60 seconds after you switchthe windshield wipers off.The headlamps do not turn on with thewipers:• During a single wipe.• When using the windshield washers.• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.Note: If you switch the autolamps and theautowipers on, the headlamps turn on whenthe windshield wipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMERThe instrument lighting dimmer buttonsare on the lighting control.

E291299

E291298

Repeatedly press one of thebuttons to adjust the brightness.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAYAfter you switch the ignition off, you canswitch the headlamps on by pulling thedirection indicator lever toward you. Youwill hear a short tone. The headlamps willswitch off automatically after threeminutes with any door open or 30 secondsafter the last door has been closed. Youcan cancel this feature by pulling thedirection indicator toward you again orswitching the ignition on.

86


Lighting

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -VEHICLES WITH:CONFIGURABLE DAYTIMERUNNING LAMPS

WARNING: The daytime runninglamps system does not activate the rearlamps and may not provide adequatelighting during low visibility drivingconditions. Make sure you switch theheadlamps on, as appropriate, during alllow visibility conditions. Failure to do somay result in a crash.

Switch the daytime running lamps on oroff using the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 105).The daytime running lamps turn on when:1. The lamps are on in the information

display.2. You switch the ignition on.3. The transmission is not in park (P) for

vehicles with automatic transmissionsor you release the parking brake forvehicles with manual transmissions.

4. The lighting control is in the autolampsposition.

5. The headlamps are off.The other lighting control switch positionsdo not turn on the daytime running lamps.If the daytime running lamps are off in theinformation display, the lamps stay off inall switch positions.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIMERUNNING LAMPS (DRL)

WARNING: The daytime runninglamps system does not activate the rearlamps and may not provide adequatelighting during low visibility drivingconditions. Make sure you switch theheadlamps on, as appropriate, during alllow visibility conditions. Failure to do somay result in a crash.

The system turns the lamps on in daylightconditions.To switch the system on, switch thelighting control to any position exceptheadlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

Switching the Front Fog Lamps Onor OffOnly switch the front fog lamps on duringreduced visibility.You can switch the front fog lamps on ifany of the following occur:• You set the lighting control to the

parking lamps position.• You set the lighting control to the

headlamps position.• You set the lighting control to the

autolamps position and the headlampsare on.

The front fog lamp button is on the lightingcontrol.

Press the button to switch thefront fog lamps on or off.

87


Lighting

Note: The brightness of the daytime runninglamps may decrease when the front foglamps are switched on.

Front Fog Lamp IndicatorIt illuminates when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

The headlamp beams move in the samedirection as the steering wheel. Thisprovides more visibility when drivingaround curves.A. Without adaptive headlamps.B. With adaptive headlamps.

E161714

B

A

The system only works with the lightingcontrol in the autolamp position. You canswitch this feature on or off in theinformation display.Note: There is a delay of two to fiveseconds before the system operates whenyou drive your vehicle.Note: The system is only active at speedsabove 3 mph (5 km/h).

System Check (If Equipped)

The system has a power-up movementcheck feature. When you start your vehicle,the lamps track left to right, then back tocenter to alert the driver that the systemis working properly.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E162681

Push the lever up or down to use thedirection indicators.Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash three times toindicate a lane change.

88


Lighting

INTERIOR LAMPSThe lamps turn on under the followingconditions:• You open any door.• You press a remote control button.• You press the all lamps on button on

the overhead console.

Front Interior Lamp

E262162

The front interior lamp switches are on theoverhead console.Note: The position of each button on theoverhead console depends on your vehicle.

All Lamps OnPress to switch all interior lampson.

All Lamps Off

E262185

Press to switch all interior lampsoff.

Individual Dome Lamps

E262193

Press to switch the left-handindividual dome lamp on and off.

Press to switch the right-handindividual dome lamp on and off.

Interior Lamp FunctionPress to switch the interior lampfunction on and off.

When the interior lamp function is off andyou open a door, the courtesy and doorlamps stay off.When the interior lamp function is on andyou open a door, the courtesy and doorlamps turn on.Note: The indicator lamp lights amberwhen the door function is off.

Individual Map LampsPress a map lens to switch individual maplamps on and off independently.

Rear Interior LampsThe rear interior lamps may be above therear seat or above the rear windows.

Press to switch the lamps on oroff.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)

Use the touchscreen to select thefollowing:

Select the settings option on thefeature bar.

E279027

Select ambient lighting.

89


Lighting

E273192

Switching Ambient Lighting OnTouch a color once.

Changing the ColorTouch any color once.

Adjusting the BrightnessDrag the selected color up or down.

Switching Ambient Lighting OffTouch the selected color once or drag theselected color down to zero brightness.

90


Lighting

WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGHBEAM CONTROLThe system turns on high beams if it is darkenough and no other traffic is present. If itdetects an approaching vehicle’sheadlamps or tail lamps, or street lightingahead, the system turns the high beamsoff. Low beams remain on.A camera sensor, centrally mountedbehind the windshield of your vehicle,continuously monitors conditions to turnthe high beams on and off.

SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGHBEAM CONTROL ON AND OFFSwitch the system on or off using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 105).

Activating the Automatic HighBeam Control

Switch the lighting control to theautolamps position to activate.See Autolamps (page 86).

Note: Automatic high beams are notavailable when autolamps are not turnedon.When active, the high beams turn on if:• The ambient light level is low enough.• There is no traffic in front of your

vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than

approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).When active, the high beams turn off if:• The ambient light level is high enough

that high beams are not required.• The system detects an approaching

vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.• The system detects severe rain, snow

or fog.

• The camera is blocked.• The vehicle speed falls below

approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).Note: The deactivation speed is lower oncurves.Note: High beam reactivation may bedelayed in certain curvy road situations.Note: The system may not operate properlyif the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshieldfree from obstruction or damage.Note: The system may not operate properlyin cold or inclement conditions. You canswitch on the high beams by overriding thesystem.Note: If the system detects a blockage, forexample bird droppings, bug splatter, snowor ice, the system goes into low beam modeuntil you clear the blockage. A message mayappear in the information display if thecamera is blocked.Note: Using much larger tires or equippingvehicle accessories such as snowplows canmodify your vehicle's ride height anddegrade automatic high beam controlperformance.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMCONTROL INDICATORS

The indicator illuminates toconfirm when the system isready to assist.

OVERRIDING AUTOMATICHIGH BEAM CONTROL

WARNING: The system does notrelieve you of your responsibility to drivewith due care and attention. You mayneed to override the system if it does notturn the high beams on or off.

91



WARNING: You may need tooverride the system when approachingother road users.

WARNING: You may need tooverride the system during inclementweather.

E162679

Push the lever away from you to switchbetween high beam and low beam.

92



POWER WINDOWS

WARNING: Do not leave childrenunattended in your vehicle and do notlet them play with the power windows.They may seriously injure themselves.

WARNING: When closing thepower windows, you should verify theyare free of obstructions and make surethat children and pets are not in theproximity of the window openings.

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise whenjust one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce thisnoise.Press the control to open the window.Lift the control to close the window.

One-Touch DownPress the control fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch UpLift the control fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

Resetting One-Touch Up1. Lift and hold the control until the

window is fully closed.2. Release the control.3. Open the window and then try to close

it automatically.4. Repeat the procedure if the window

does not close automatically.Note: The one-touch down and one-touchup feature only applies to the frontwindows.

Bounce-BackThe window will automatically stop andreverse some distance if it detects anobstacle while closing.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING: When you override thebounce-back feature the window willnot reverse if it detects an obstacle. Takecare when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to yourvehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold withintwo seconds of the window reaching thebounce-back position. The window travelsup with no bounce-back protection. Thewindow stops if you release the switchbefore the window is fully closed.

93


Windows and Mirrors

Window Lock

E144072

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls. It illuminates when youlock the rear window controls.

Accessory DelayThe window switches remain operationalfor several minutes when you switch theignition off or until you open either frontdoor.

GLOBAL OPENINGYou can use the remote control to openthe windows with the ignition off.Note: You can enable or disable this featurein the information display, or see anauthorized dealer. See GeneralInformation (page 105).Note: To operate this feature, accessorydelay must not be active.

Remote Control Front WindowsYou can open the windows for a short timeafter you unlock your vehicle with theremote control. After you unlock yourvehicle, press and hold the remote controlunlock button to open the windows.Release the button once movement starts.Press the lock or unlock button to stopmovement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNING: Do not adjust themirrors when your vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

Note: Do not use an ice scraper on themirror glass or housing.

E176219

Left-hand mirror.ARight-hand mirror.BAdjustment control.CWindow lockout.DPower-folding mirror control.E

To adjust a mirror:1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.

The control will light.2. Adjust the position of the mirror.3. Press the mirror control again.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

94


Windows and Mirrors

Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

The exterior mirrors automatically fold intoward the glass after you place thetransmission into park (P), turn off thevehicle, open and close the driver-side doorand lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrorsautomatically unfold and return to theirdriving position after you unlock the vehicleand open and close the driver-side door.You can switch this feature on and offthrough the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 105).

E170431

You can fold the mirrors on demand bypressing the power-folding mirror controlon the door. The control lights and themirrors fold in toward the glass. Press thecontrol again to unfold the mirrors. Thecontrol light turns off.Note: If you switch the auto fold feature onand use the power-folding control to foldthe mirrors on demand, you must use thecontrol again to unfold them.

Loose MirrorIf you manually fold the power-foldingmirrors, they may not work properly evenafter you re-position them. You need toreset them if:• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.• The mirrors feel loose.

• The mirrors do not stay in the folded orunfolded position.

• One of the mirrors is not in its normaldriving position.

To reset the power-fold feature, use thepower-folding mirror control to fold andunfold the mirrors. You may hear a loudnoise as you reset the power-foldingmirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat thisprocess as needed each time you manuallyfold the mirrors.

Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

When you switch the heated rear windowon, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.See Exterior Mirrors (page 94).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirrorpositions through the memory function.

Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)

The driver-side exterior mirror dims whenthe interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.

Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

The outer portion of the appropriate mirrorhousing blinks when you activate thedirection indicator.

Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)

The lamps on the bottom part of the mirrorhousing light when you use yourtransmitter to unlock the doors or whenyou open a door.

360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)

The 360 degree camera system consistsof front, side and rear cameras.

95


Windows and Mirrors

Blind Spot MonitorThe design of the system is to detectvehicles that could enter the blind spotzone.See Blind Spot Information System(page 228).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING: Do not adjust themirrors when your vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side toside.

Manual Dimming MirrorPull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce the effect of bright light frombehind.

Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. A rear centerpassenger or raised rear center headrestraint may also block light from reachingthe sensor.The mirror dims to reduce the effect ofbright light from behind. It returns tonormal when the bright light from behindis no longer present or if you shift intoreverse (R).

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the sidewindow and extend it rearward for extrashade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not leave childrenunattended in your vehicle and do notlet them play with the moonroof. Failureto follow this instruction could result inpersonal injury.

96


Windows and Mirrors

WARNING: When closing themoonroof, verify that it is free ofobstruction and make sure that childrenand pets are not in the proximity of theroof opening.

The moonroof controls are located on theoverhead console and have a one-touchopen and close feature. To stop itsmovement during one-touch operation,press the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E191272

Moonroof open. Press andrelease to open the moonroof.The moonroof stops short of thefully opened position. Press andrelease the control again to openthe moonroof fully.

A

Moonroof vent. Press andrelease to vent the moonroof.

B

Sunshade open. Press andrelease to open the sunshade.The sunshade opensautomatically with themoonroof. You can also openthe sunshade with the moonroofclosed.

C

Sunshade close. Press andrelease to close the sunshade.

D

Moonroof close. Press andrelease to close the moonrooffrom either the open or ventpositions.

E

Note: The moonroof stops 8 in (200 mm)from the closed position. To close themoonroof, press and hold the moonroofclose control until the moonroof is in thefully closed position.

97


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGESType 1

E271817

TachometerAInformation DisplayBSpeedometerCFuel GaugeDEngine Coolant Temperature GaugeE

Information DisplayOdometerLocated in the bottom of the informationdisplay. Registers the accumulateddistance your vehicle has traveled.

Outside Air TemperatureShows the outside air temperature.

CompassDisplays the vehicle’s heading direction.

98


Instrument Cluster

Trip ComputerSee General Information (page 105).

Vehicle Settings and PersonalizationSee General Information (page 105).

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

WARNING: Do not remove thecoolant reservoir cap when the engine ison or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10minutes for the cooling system to cooldown. Cover the coolant reservoir capwith a thick cloth to prevent thepossibility of scalding and slowly removethe cap. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury.

Shows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the needle remains in the center section.If the needle enters the red section, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.

Note: Do not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has been resolved.

Fuel GaugeThe fuel gauge indicates about how muchfuel is in the fuel tank.The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol indicates on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler door is located.Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or on a slope.

Low Fuel ReminderA low fuel level reminder displays andsounds when the distance to emptyreaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty forMyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)for all vehicle keys.Note: The low fuel reminder can appear atdifferent fuel gauge positions depending onfuel economy conditions. This variation isnormal.

99


Instrument Cluster

Type 2

E272460

Left Information DisplayASpeedometerBRight Information Display. See General Information (page 105).C

Left Information DisplayOdometerLocated in the bottom of the informationdisplay. Registers the accumulateddistance your vehicle has traveled.

Trip ComputerSee General Information (page 105).

Vehicle Settings and PersonalizationSee General Information (page 105).

100


Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators alert you to a vehicle conditionthat may become serious. Some lampsilluminate when you start your vehicle tomake sure they work. If any lamps remainon after starting your vehicle, refer to therespective system warning lamp for furtherinformation.Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp, but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E144524

The speed control systemindicator light changes color toindicate what mode the system

is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 213).On (white light): Illuminates when you turnthe adaptive cruise control system on.Turns off when you turn the speed controlsystem off.Engaged (green light): Illuminates whenthe adaptive cruise control systemengages. Turns off when the speed controlsystem is disengaged.

Anti-Lock Braking SystemIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without Anti-lockbraking system) unless the brake systemwarning lamp also illuminates. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

Automatic Headlamp High BeamIndicator

It illuminates when the systemturns the headlamp high beamon.

See What Is Automatic High BeamControl (page 91).

Auto Start-stopIt illuminates to inform you whenthe engine shuts down or inconjunction with a message.

BatteryIf it illuminates while driving, itindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checkedby an authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor

E151262

It illuminates when you switchthis feature off or in conjunctionwith a message. See Blind Spot

Information System (page 228).

Brake System

WARNING: Driving your vehiclewith the warning lamp on is dangerous.A significant decrease in brakingperformance may occur. It may take youlonger to stop your vehicle. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.Driving extended distances with theparking brake engaged can cause brakefailure and the risk of personal injury.

Note: Indicators vary depending on region.This lamp is a dual-function lamp andilluminates when:

101


Instrument Cluster

• You apply the parking brake with theignition on.

• Your vehicle has a brake fault or lowbrake fluid level, regardless of parkingbrake position.

E270480

If the lamp illuminates when youare moving, you may have theparking brake applied. Make surethe parking brake is off. Haveyour vehicle checked as soon aspossible if the lamp continues to

illuminate.

Cruise Control

E71340

It illuminates when you switchthis feature on.

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when you turn theleft or right direction indicator orthe hazard warning flasher on. If

the indicators stay on or flash faster, checkfor a burned out bulb. See Changing aBulb (page 296).

Door AjarDisplays when the ignition is onand any door is not completelyclosed.

Electric Park Brake

E146190

It illuminates or flashes when theelectric parking brake has amalfunction. See Electric

Parking Brake (page 189).

Engine Coolant TemperatureIlluminates when the enginecoolant temperature is high.Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible, switch off the engine and let cool.See Engine Coolant Check (page 286).

Engine OilIf it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 283).Note: Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level being correct.Have the system checked by your authorizeddealer immediately.

Fasten Seatbelt

E71880

It illuminates and a chimesounds to remind you to fastenyour seatbelt.

Front Airbag

E67017

If it does not illuminate when youswitch the ignition on, continuesto flash or remains on when the

engine is running, this indicates amalfunction. Have your vehicle checkedas soon as possible.

Front Fog Lamps Indicator (If Equipped)

Illuminates when you switch thefront fog lamps on.

High BeamIt illuminates when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. Itflashes when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Hill Start Assist IndicatorIlluminates when the system isnot available.

102


Instrument Cluster

Hood Ajar

E159324

Displays when the ignition is onand the hood is not completelyclosed.

Lane Keeping Aid

E144813

Illuminates when you activatethe lane keeping system.

Liftgate Ajar

E162453

Illuminates when the liftgate isnot completely closed.

Low Fuel LevelIt illuminates when the fuel levelis low or the fuel tank is nearlyempty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt illuminates when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the engine

running or when driving, check the tirepressure as soon as possible.It also illuminates momentarily when youswitch the ignition on to confirm the lampis functional. If it does not illuminate whenyou switch the ignition on, or begins toflash at any time, have the system checkedby an authorized dealer.

Low Washer Fluid

E132353

It illuminates when thewindshield washer fluid is low.

Parking LampsIt illuminates when you switchthe parking lamps on.

Powertrain FaultIlluminates when the system hasdetected a powertrain or anall-wheel drive fault. Contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Service Engine SoonIf it illuminates when the engineis running this indicates amalfunction. The On Board

Diagnostics system has detected amalfunction of the vehicle emission controlsystem.If it flashes, engine misfire may beoccurring. Increased exhaust gastemperatures could damage the catalyticconverter or other vehicle components.Avoid heavy acceleration and decelerationand have your vehicle servicedimmediately.It illuminates when you switch the ignitionon prior to engine start to check the bulband to indicate whether your vehicle isready for Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) testing.Normally, it illuminates until the engine iscranked and automatically turns off if nomalfunctions are present. However, if after15 seconds it flashes eight times, thisindicates that your vehicle is not ready forInspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.See Emission Law (page 173).

Stability Control

E138639

It flashes when the system isactive. If it remains illuminatedor does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem will switch off. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealerimmediately. See Using StabilityControl (page 194).

103


Instrument Cluster

Stability Control Off

E130458

It illuminates when you switchthe system off. It will go outwhen you switch the system

back on or when you switch the ignitionoff. See Using Stability Control (page194).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSKeyless Warning AlertThe horn will sound twice when you exityour vehicle with the intelligent access keyand your vehicle is in RUN, indicating yourvehicle is still on.

Headlamps On Warning ChimeSounds when you have left the headlampsor parking lamps on and open the driverdoor with the vehicle off.

Parking Brake On Warning ChimeSounds when you have left the parkingbrake on and drive your vehicle. If thewarning chime remains on after you havereleased the parking brake, have thesystem checked by your authorized dealerimmediately.

104


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING: Driving while distractedcan result in loss of vehicle control, crashand injury. We strongly recommend thatyou use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is thesafe operation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Note: Your vehicle may or may not beequipped with all the messages listed in thischapter. Your vehicle will not displaymessages of systems it is not equipped with.Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on the steering wheel.Corresponding information is displayed inthe information display.

Information Display Controls(Type 1)

E144637

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

MenuYou can access the menu using theinformation display control.

E204495

This icon gives you the ability toswitch a feature on or off. Acheck in the box indicates the

feature is enabled, and uncheckedindicates the feature is disabled.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

105


Information Displays

Trip 1 and 2

Digital Speedo

Distance to E

Trip Odometer

Trip Timer

Average Fuel

Outside Temp.

All Values

• Digital Speedo - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running

out of fuel.• Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys.• Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you

restart your vehicle.• Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.• Outside Temperature — Shows the outside air temperature.• All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel.Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, timeand fuel information.

Fuel Economy

Distance to E

Inst Fuel Econ

Avg MPG

Long Term Fuel Economy

Fuel History

Average Speed

106



Fuel Economy

All Values

Auto StartStop

• Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel beforerunning out of fuel.

• Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy alongwith your Avg MPG since the function was last reset.

• Long Term Fuel Economy - Shows your long term fuel economy.• Average MPG — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.• Fuel History - Shows the fuel economy over the past 30 minutes.• Average Speed - Shows the average speed since the last reset.• All Values — Shows all fuel economy values: Distance to E, Inst Fuel Econ, Long Term

Fuel Economy and Average Speed.• Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging provides details about what

is happening with your system. OK See Information Messages (page 115).Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the button on theleft-hand steering wheel controls.

Driver Assist

Blindspot

Cross Traffic

Select settingCruise Control

Driver Alert

Hill Start Assist

Intelligent AWD

Select settingModeLane Keeping

Intensity

Alert SensitivityPre-Collision

Dist. Indication

Evasive Steering Assist

Active Braking

Rear Park Aid

107



Driver Assist

Tire PressureTire Monitor

Hold OK to Reset

Trailer Sway

Settings

Select settingAlarmVehicle

Ask on exit

Auto Engine Off

InformationChimes

Select settingDTE calcula-tion

Easy Entry/Exit

Auto HighbeamLighting

Select settingAutolamp delay

Daytime Lights

AutounlockLocks

Mislock

Select settingRemote Unlock

Switches inhibit

Hold OK to ResetOil LifeReset

Select settingPower Lift-gate

Select settingClimate ControlRemoteStart

Seats or Seats andWheel

Duration

System

108



Settings

Seatbelts

Silent mode

Remote OpenWindows

Remote Close

Courtesy WipeWipers

Rain Sensing

Reverse Wiper

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreateMyKey

MyKey

Select setting911 Assist

EmergencyAssist

Do NotDisturb

Traction Ctrl

Max Speed

SpeedMinder

Volume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClearMyKeys

Select settingUnitsDisplay

Distance

Temper-ature

Tire Pres-sure

Language

109



Information Display Controls(Type 2)

E144638

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

Main menuFrom the main menu bar on the left sideof the information display, you can choosefrom the following categories:• Display Mode• Trip 1 & 2• Fuel Economy• Driver Assist• SettingsScroll up or down to highlight one of thecategories, then press the right arrow keyor OK to enter into that category. Press theleft arrow key as needed to exit back to themain menu.

Display ModeUse the up/down arrow buttons to choosebetween the following display options.

Option 4Option 3Option 2Option 1Display Mode

--XXXXX mi (km) to empty

XX--Round tachometer

--X-Vertical tachometer

Tire Pressure on demand screen

Digital Speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h

110



Option 4Option 3Option 2Option 1Display Mode

Intelligent AWD

Turbo Boost Gauge1

1 ST only.• XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel.• Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with

your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine.During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gearwill appear in the display.

Trip 1 & 2You can access the menu using theinformation display control.

Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

Trip 1 & 2

All Values

All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).• Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance.• Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.• Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you

restart your vehicle.Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the lefthand steering wheel controls.

Fuel EconomyUse the left and right arrow buttons tochoose the desired fuel economy display.

111



Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset

Auto StartStop

Fuel History

Average Speed

• Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, averagefuel economy and distance to empty.

• Auto StartStop - available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about whatis happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 115).

• Fuel History - Shows the fuel economy over the past 30 minutes.• Average Speed - Shows the average speed since the last reset.Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button onthe left hand steering wheel controls.

Driver AssistIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.

Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Driver Assist

Traction Control

Blindspot

Cross Traffic Alert

Select settingCruise Control

Driver Alert

Driver Sel. Susp.

Hill Start Assist

Select settingModeLane Keeping Sys

Intensity

Alert SensitivityPre-Collision

Active Braking

112



Driver Assist

Rear Park Aid

Hold OK to ResetTire Monitor

Trailer Sway

SettingsIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.

Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Settings

Select settingAlarmVehicle

Ask on Exit

Auto Engine Off

Select settingDTE Calcu-lation

Easy Entry/Exit

Adaptive HeadlampsAdaptive HeadlampsLighting

Select settingTraffic Set Up

Auto Highbeam

Select settingAutolamp Delay

Daytime Lights

AutolockLocks

Autounlock

Mislock

Select settingRemote Unlock

Switch Inhibit

AutofoldMirrors

XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil LifeReset

113



Settings

Select settingPower Lift-gate

Select settingClimate ControlRemoteStart

Seats or Seats andWheel

Duration

System

Seatbelts

Silent Mode

Remote OpenWindows

Remote Close

Courtesy WipeWipers

Rain Sensing

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreateMyKey

MyKey

Select setting911 Assist

EmergencyAssist

Do NotDisturb

TractionCtrl

Max Speed

SpeedMinder

Volume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClearMyKeys

Select settingDistanceDisplaySetup

Temper-ature

114



Settings

GaugeDisplay

Tire Pres-sure

Language

INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on your vehicle optionsand instrument cluster type, not all of themessages will display or be available. Theinformation display may abbreviate orshorten certain messages.

E144636

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. The informationdisplay will automatically remove othermessages after a short time.You need to confirm certain messagesbefore you can access the menus.

Active Park

ActionMessage

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact anauthorized dealer.

Active Park Fault

115



Adaptive Cruise Control

ActionMessage

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise controlfrom engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

213).

Adaptive CruiseMalfunction

A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

213).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud orwater in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean thesensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

213).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable Sensor

Blocked See Manual

The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise ActiveAutomatic Braking

Turned Off

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise controlfrom engaging.

Front Sensor Not Aligned

The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - DriverResume Control

Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise SpeedToo Low to Activate

The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gapdistance and the driver needs to shift the transmission into a

lower gear.

Adaptive Cruise ShiftDown

Airbag

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Remove blockage.

Occupant SensorBLOCKED Remove

Objects Near PassengerSeat

116



Alarm

ActionMessage

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-TheftAlarm (page 76).

Vehicle Alarm To StopAlarm, Start Vehicle.

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contactan authorized dealer.

Alarm malfunction Servicereq'd

All-Wheel Drive

ActionMessage

The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protectitself from overheating.

AWD TemporarilyDisabled

The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protectitself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare

tire.

AWD OFF

The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function andclear this message after driving a short distance with the road

tire re-installed or after the system cools.

AWD Restored

The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If thewarning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer.

AWD MalfunctionService Required

Automatic Engine Shutdown

ActionMessage

The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In{seconds to shut off:#0}

Seconds

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For FuelEconomy

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK onthe left steering wheel button to override the shut down.

Engine Shuts Off in{seconds to shut off:#0}

Seconds Press Ok toOverride

117




ActionMessage

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean thewindshield.

Front Camera Low VisibilityClean Screen

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contactan authorized dealer.

Front Camera MalfunctionService Required

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a shortperiod of time for the sensor to cool down.

Front Camera TemporarilyNot Available

Auto Start-Stop

ActionMessage

The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal tostart.

Auto StartStop PressBrake to Start Engine

The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harderto start.

Auto StartStop PressBrake Harder to Activate

The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.Auto StartStop Press aPedal to Start Engine

Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop SelectNeutral To Start Engine

Select park for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Shift toP, then Restart Engine

The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.Auto StartStop ManualRestart Required

Conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system tofunction properly.

Auto StartStop NotAvailable

118



Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Check Charging System

The battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features

to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electricalloads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the

system voltage has recovered, the disabled features willoperate again as normal.

Low Battery FeaturesTemporarily Turned Off

The battery management system determines that the 12Vbattery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to chargethe battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery

charger. This message clears once you restart your vehicleand the battery state of charge has recovered.

Battery State of ChargeLow

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as

possible to protect the battery. This message will clear oncethe vehicle has been started and the battery state of chargehas recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will

allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Turn Power Off To SaveBattery

119



Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information

System (page 228).

Blindspot System Fault

The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-tion System (page 228).

Blindspot Not AvailableSensor Blocked See

Manual

The system detects a vehicle.Cross Traffic VehicleComing From X

The system sensors are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert(page 230).

Cross Traffic Not Avail-able Sensor Blocked See

Manual

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer. See Cross Traffic Alert (page 230).

Cross Traffic SystemFault

Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

The door listed is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar

The door listed is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar

The door listed is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar

The door listed is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar

The door listed is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar

The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar

The system has disabled the door switches.Switches InhibitedSecurity Mode

The factory keypad code displays in the information displayafter system resets the keypad. See Keyless Entry (page

67).

Factory Keypad Code {XX X X X}

120



Driver Alert

ActionMessage

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning RestNow

Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning RestSuggested

Electronic Stability Control

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac

The traction control system status.AdvanceTrac Off

The traction control system status.AdvanceTrac On

The traction control system status.AdvanceTrac SPORTMODE

Engine

ActionMessage

Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stopyour vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.

If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. SeeEngine Coolant Check (page 286).

High Engine TemperatureStop Safely

Engine service is required. See an authorized dealer.Engine Fault Service Now

Check the engine oil level See Engine Oil Check (page283).

Engine Oil Level Low CheckLevel

121



Fuel

ActionMessage

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.Fuel Door Opening

The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can beginto refuel.

Fuel Door Open

A reminder to close the fuel door.Close Fuel Door

Hill Start Assist

ActionMessage

Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.See Hill Start Assist (page 190).

Hill Start Assist NotAvailable

Keys and Keyless Entry

ActionMessage

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See KeylessStarting (page 158).

No Key Detected

You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engineand your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key

inside your vehicle.

Restart Now or Key isNeeded

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Seean authorized dealer for service.

Starting System Fault

You have successfully programmed an intelligent access keyto the system.

Key Program Successful

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to thesystem.

Key Program Failure

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to thesystem.

Max Number of KeysLearned

122



ActionMessage

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough KeysLearned

The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low ReplaceSoon

Informs you that they you are exiting your vehicle and theengine is on.

Engine ON

Lane Centering Assist

ActionMessage

Displays when the feature is currently unavailable.Lane Centering AssistNot Available

Displays when you have to switch on adaptive cruise controlto use the feature.

For Lane CenteringAssist to work Turn On

Adaptive Cruise

Lane Keeping System

ActionMessage

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Lane Keeping Sys.Malfunction Service

Required

The system has detected a condition that has caused thesystem to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Tempor-arily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that requires you toclean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.

Front Camera Low Visib-ility Clean Screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Front Camera Malfunc-tion Service Required

The system requests you to keep your hands on the steeringwheel.

Keep Hands on SteeringWheel

123



Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off theengine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continuesto come on with your engine running, contact an authorized

dealer.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon

The oil life left is at 0%.Oil Change Required

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake systemimmediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 290).

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safeplace. Contact an authorized dealer.

Check Brake System

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant OverTemperature

The engine has reduced power to help reduce high enginetemperature.

Power Reduced toLower Engine Temp

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This maynot allow some features to operate properly. Contact an

authorized dealer.

Transport / FactoryMode

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual

MyKey

ActionMessage

You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created

MyKey is active.MyKey Active DriveSafely

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displaysthat the MyKey speed limit is on.

Speed Limited to XXMPH/km/h

MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehiclespeed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

Near Vehicle Top Speed

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed ofMyKey Setting

124



ActionMessage

You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed DriveSafely

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to UnmuteAudio

With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannotbe Deactivated

With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert OnMyKey Setting

Park Aid

ActionMessage

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 196).

Check Front Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 196).

Check Rear Park Aid

Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off

Park Brake

ActionMessage

You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehiclemore than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after youhave released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Engaged

The electric parking brake system has detected a conditionthat requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Park Brake MalfunctionService Now

The electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied

125



ActionMessage

The electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.Park Brake MaintenanceMode

The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it.Park Brake Use Switchto Release

The electric parking brake is set but you have not released itand your vehicle is moving.

To Release: Press Brakeand Switch

The electric park brake system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Park Brake LimitedFunction Service

Required

You have not released the electric parking brake causing it tooverheat.

Park Brake SystemOverheated

The electric parking brake is set and you have started yourvehicle.

Park Brake Not Released

The electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied

You have released the electric parking brake.Park Brake Released

Power Steering

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering Lock Malfunc-tion Service Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehiclein a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Loss StopSafely

The power steering system has detected a condition withinthe power steering system or passive entry or passive start

system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist FaultService Required

126



Pre-Collision Warning System

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer.

Collision WarningMalfunction

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud orwater in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 234).

Collision Warning NotAvailable Sensor

Blocked See Manual

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer.

Collision Warning NotAvailable

Remote Start

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift buttonto drive your vehicle after a remote start.

To Drive: Press Brakeand Gear Shift Button

Seats

ActionMessage

A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall NotPermitted While Driving

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved

Starting System

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting tostart your vehicle.

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start PendingPlease Wait

The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled

127



Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. SeeTire Pressure Monitoring System (page 332).

Tire Pressure Low

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If thewarning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 332).

Tire Pressure MonitorFault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is inuse. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 332). If

the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact anauthorized dealer.

Tire Pressure SensorFault

Towing

ActionMessage

Your trailer sway control has detected trailer sway so youneed to reduce your speed.

Trailer Sway ReduceSpeed

Traction Control

ActionMessage

The status of the traction control system. See Using TractionControl (page 192).

Traction Control Off

The status of the traction control system. See Using TractionControl (page 192).

Traction Control On

128



Transmission

ActionMessage

See an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-tion Service Now

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in asafe place as soon as possible.

Transmission OverTemperature Stop

Safely

The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop ina safe place as soon as possible.

Transmission Over-heating Stop Safely

See an authorized dealer.Transmission ServiceRequired

The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too HotPress Brake

The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorizeddealer.

Transmission LimitedFunction See Manual

The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up beforeyou drive.

Transmission WarmingUp Please Wait

A reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park

A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the trans-mission.

Press Brake Pedal

The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted

The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt-Mode

The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup On

The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup Off

Displays when your vehicle prepares to shift to park when youreach a certain speed.

Park Will Engage at LowSpeed

Press the Brake pedal to select other gears.Stay in Neutral ModePress Brake to Unlock

Shifter

129



ActionMessage

Press S to confirm Stay in Neutral modeSelect S to confirm Stayin Neutral Mode

Displays when your vehicle cannot shift to sport (S) in thecurrent gear.

Sport Not Available inSelected Gear

Displays when you select an invalid gear.Invalid Gear Selection

130



AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:SYNC 3

E289370

Note: Depending on your vehicle optionpackage, the controls may look differentfrom what you see here.Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedPress and release + or - to adjustthe volume of air circulated inthe vehicle.

Setting the TemperaturePress and release + or - on the left-handside of the climate control to set theleft-hand temperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.Press and release + or - on the right-handside of the climate control to set theright-hand temperature.

Switching Auto Mode On and OffPress and release the button toswitch on automatic operation,then set the temperature.

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.Note: You can also switch off dual zonemode by pressing and holding the buttonfor more than two seconds.

Switching Defrost On and OffPress and release the button todistribute air through thewindshield air vents and

de-mister.

Air directed to the instrument panel andfootwell air vents turns off. You can alsouse this setting to defog and clear thewindshield of a thin covering of ice.

Switching the Air Conditioning Onand Off

Press and release the button.

Use air conditioning with recirculated airto improve cooling performance andefficiency.Note: In certain conditions, for example,maximum defrost, the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate eventhough you switch off the air conditioning.

Switching the Climate Control Onand Off


Switching Maximum AirConditioning On and Off (If Equipped)

Press and release the button formaximum cooling.

131


Climate Control

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto LO, recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel air vents, air conditioningturns on and the blower motor adjusts tothe highest speed.

Switching Maximum Defrost Onand Off

Press and release the button formaximum defrosting.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto HI, air flows through the windshield airvents, and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed. You can also use this settingto defog and clear the windshield of a thincovering of ice. The heated rear windowalso turns on when you select maximumdefrost.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.

Switching Recirculated Air On andOff

Press and release the button toswitch between outside air andrecirculated air.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. This mayreduce the time needed to cool the interior,when used with A/C, and reduce unwantedodors from entering your vehicle.Note: Recirculated air may turn off, orprevent you from switching on, in all air flowmodes except MAX A/C to reduce the riskof fogging. Recirculation may also turn onand off in various air distribution controlcombinations during hot weather to improvecooling efficiency.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:SYNC 3/BANG AND OLUFSENAUDIO SYSTEM

A

B

A

1 2

203A

A

E287572

Note: Depending on your vehicle optionpackage, the controls may look differentfrom what you see here.Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedPress and release + or - to adjustthe volume of air circulated inthe vehicle.

Setting the Temperature

E265400

Press and release + or - on the left-handside of the climate control to set theleft-hand temperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.Press and release + or - on the right-handside of the climate control to set theright-hand temperature.

132


Climate Control

Switching Auto Mode On and OffPress and release the button toswitch on automatic operation,then set the temperature.

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.Note: You can also switch off dual zonemode by pressing and holding the buttonfor more than two seconds.


Press and release the button toswitch the air conditioning on oroff.

Use air conditioning with recirculated airto improve cooling performance andefficiency.Note: In certain conditions, for example,maximum defrost, the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate eventhough you switch off the air conditioning.



Switching Defrost On and OffPress and release the button todistribute air through thewindshield air vents and

de-mister.

Air directed to the instrument panel andfootwell air vents turns off. You can alsouse this setting to defog and clear thewindshield of a thin covering of ice.

Switching Maximum AirConditioning On and Off

Press and release the button formaximum cooling.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto LO, recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel air vents, air conditioningturns on and the blower motor adjusts tothe highest speed.


Press and release the button toswitch on maximum defrost.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto HI, air flows through the windshield airvents, and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed. You can also use this settingto defog and clear the windshield of a thincovering of ice. The heated rear windowalso turns on when you select maximumdefrost.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.


Press and release the button toswitch between outside air andrecirculated air.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. This mayreduce the time needed to cool the interior,when used with A/C, and reduce unwantedodors from entering your vehicle.

133


Climate Control

Note: Recirculated air may turn off, orprevent you from switching on, in all air flowmodes except MAX A/C to reduce the riskof fogging. Recirculation may also turn onand off in various air distribution controlcombinations during hot weather to improvecooling efficiency.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral HintsNote: Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up.Note: You may feel a small amount of airfrom the footwell air vents regardless of theair distribution setting.Note: To reduce humidity build-up insideyour vehicle, do not drive with the systemswitched off or with recirculated air alwaysswitched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflowto the rear seats.Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.Note: To improve the time to reach acomfortable temperature in hot weather,drive with the windows open until you feelcold air through the air vents.

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Adjusting the settings when yourvehicle interior is extremely hot or cold isnot necessary. Automatic mode is bestrecommended to maintain set temperature.Note: The system adjusts to heat or coolthe interior to the temperature you selectas quickly as possible.Note: For the system to function efficiently,the instrument panel and side air ventsshould be fully open.

Note: If you select AUTO during coldoutside temperatures, the system directsair flow to the windshield and side windowair vents. In addition, the blower motor mayrun at a slower speed until the engine warmsup.Note: If you select AUTO during hottemperatures and the inside of the vehicleis hot, the system uses recirculated air tomaximize interior cooling. Blower motorspeed may also reduce until the air cools.

Quickly Heating the Interior1. Press and release AUTO.2. Adjust the temperature function to the

setting you prefer.

Recommended Settings forHeating1. Press and release AUTO.2. Adjust the temperature function to the

setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) asa starting point, then adjust the settingas necessary.

Quickly Cooling the Interior1. Press and release MAX A/C.

Recommended Settings forCooling1. Press and release AUTO.2. Adjust the temperature function to the

setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) asa starting point, then adjust the settingas necessary.

Defogging the Side Windows inCold Weather1. Press and release defrost or maximum

defrost.

134


Climate Control

2. Adjust the temperature control to thesetting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) asa starting point, then adjust the settingas necessary.

HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF

EQUIPPED)

Windshield Wiper De-Icer

E184884

When you switch the heated rearwindow on, the windshield wiperde-icer turns on.

HEATED REAR WINDOW

E184884

Press the button to clear the rearwindow of thin ice and fog. Theheated rear window turns off

after a short period of time.Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razorblades or other sharp objects to clean orremove decals from the inside of the heatedrear window. The vehicle warranty may notcover damage to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS(IF EQUIPPED)

E184884

When you switch the heated rearwindow on, the heated exteriormirrors turn on.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or adjust the mirror glasswhen it is frozen in place.Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products. Thevehicle warranty may not cover damagecaused to the mirror housing or glass.

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin airfilter, which gives you and your passengersthe following benefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.You can locate the cabin air filter behindthe glove box.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Runningthe system without a filter in place couldresult in degradation or damage to thesystem.Replace the filter at regular intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 431).For additional cabin air filter information,or to replace the filter, see an authorizeddealer.

REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)

You can switch this feature on or off andadjust the settings using the informationdisplay controls. See InformationDisplays (page 105).The climate control system adjusts theinterior temperature during remote start.You cannot adjust the climate controlsetting during remote start operation.Switch the ignition on to makeadjustments.

135


Climate Control

Based on your remote start settings, thefollowing vehicle-dependent features mayor may not remain on after remote startingyour vehicle:• Climate controlled seats.• Heated steering wheel.• Heated mirrors.• Heated rear window.• Windshield wiper de-icer.Note: For dual zone climate controlledseats, the passenger seat setting defaultsto match the driver seat during remote start.

Automatic SettingsIf Auto is on, the system sets the interiortemperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats orcools the vehicle interior as required toachieve comfort.Note: In cold weather, the heated rearwindow and heated mirrors turn on.

Last SettingsIf Last Settings is on, the system uses thesettings last selected before you turnedoff the vehicle.

Heated and Cooled FeaturesIn Auto mode, certain heated features mayswitch on during cold weather, and cooledfeatures during hot weather.

136


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNING: Sitting improperly, outof position or with the seatback reclinedtoo far can take weight off the seatcushion and affect the decision of thepassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in the event of acrash. Always sit upright against yourseat back, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: Do not recline theseatback too far as this can cause theoccupant to slide under the seatbelt,resulting in serious injury in the event ofa collision.

WARNING: Do not place objectshigher than the top of the seat backrest.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death in theevent of a sudden stop or crash.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seatbelt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a crash.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seat backrest so that

your torso is more than 30° from theupright position.

• Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remaincomfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 in(25 cm) between your breastbone andthe airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of theseatbelt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING: Fully adjust the headrestraint before you sit in or operate yourvehicle. This will help minimize the riskof neck injury in the event of a crash. Donot adjust the head restraint when yourvehicle is moving.

137


Seats

WARNING: The head restraint is asafety device. Whenever possible itshould be installed and properlyadjusted when the seat is occupied.Failure to adjust the head restraintproperly could reduce its effectivenessduring certain impacts.

Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an uprightdriving position before adjusting the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of it is level with the top of your headand as far forward as possible. Make surethat you remain comfortable. If you areextremely tall, adjust the head restraint toits highest position.Front Seat and Rear Seat OutermostHead Restraints

E138642

Rear Center Head Restraint

E138645

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing headrestraint.

A

Two steel stems.BGuide sleeve adjust and unlockbutton.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

D

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull the head restraint up.Note: You cannot remove front seat headrestraints that have entertainment systemvideo screens.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Tilting Head RestraintsThe front head restraints tilt for extracomfort. To tilt the head restraint, do thefollowing:

138


Seats

E144727

1. Adjust the seat backrest to an uprightdriving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivoting itforward again will then release it to therearward, un-tilted position.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNING: Do not adjust the driverseat or seat backrest when your vehicleis moving. This may result in sudden seatmovement, causing the loss of controlof your vehicle.

WARNING: Make sure the seat fullylocks into place by rocking it backwardand forward. Not securing the seat intothe locked position can be dangerous ina crash and could cause serious personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Reclining the seatbackcan cause an occupant to slide under theseat's seatbelt, resulting in severepersonal injuries in the event of a crash.

The manual seats may consist of:

A B C DE144631

A bar to move the seat backwardand forward.

A

A control to adjust the lumbar ofthe seat backrest (If equipped).

B

A lever to adjust the height of theseat (If equipped).

C

A control to adjust the angle ofthe seat backrest.

D

Adjusting the Seat BackrestYour vehicle may have one of the controlsshown.

139


Seats

E267945

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not adjust the driverseat when your vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Do not place cargo orany objects behind the seatback beforereturning it to the original position.

Note: Driver seat shown, passenger seatsimilar.

140


Seats

Adjusting the 8-Way Seat

E241858

141


Seats

Adjusting the 10-Way Seat

E254019

Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)

E165608

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Before activating thememory seat, make sure that the areaimmediately surrounding the seat is clearof obstructions and that all occupantsare clear of moving parts.

WARNING: Do not use the memoryfunction when your vehicle is moving.

This feature recalls the position of thefollowing:

142


Seats

• Driver seat.• Power mirrors.• Optional power steering column.The memory control is on the driver door.

E142554

Saving a PreSet Position1. Switch the ignition on.2. Adjust the memory features to your

desired position.3. Press and hold the desired preset

button until you hear a single tone.You can save up to three preset memorypositions. You can save a memory presetat any time.

Recalling a PreSet PositionPress and release the preset buttonassociated with your desired drivingposition. The memory features move tothe position stored for that preset.Note: You can only recall a preset memoryposition when you switch the ignition off, orwhen the transmission is in park (P) orneutral (N) and your vehicle is not movingif the ignition is on.

You can also recall a preset memoryposition by:• Pressing the unlock button on your

intelligent access key fob if it is linkedto a preset position.

• Unlocking the intelligent driver doorhandle if a linked key fob is present.

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall yourmemory position when the ignition is offmoves the seat to the Easy Entry position.Note: Pressing any active memory featureadjustment control, or any memory buttonduring a memory recall, cancels theoperation.

Linking a PreSet Position to yourRemote Control or IntelligentAccess Key FobYou can save preset memory positions forup to three remote controls or intelligentaccess (IA) keys.1. With the ignition on, move the memory

positions to the desired positions.2. Press and hold the desired preset

button for about five seconds. A tonesounds after about two seconds.Continue holding until you hear asecond tone.

3. Within three seconds, press the lockbutton on the remote control you arelinking.

To unlink a remote control, follow thesame procedure – except in step 3, pressthe unlock button on the remote control.Note: If more than one linked remotecontrol or intelligent access key is in range,the memory function moves to the settingsof the first key to initiate a memory recall.

143


Seats

Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If

Equipped)

If you enable the easy entry and exitfeature, it moves the driver seat positionrearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switchthe ignition off.The driver seat returns to the previousposition when you switch the ignition on.You can enable or disable this featurethrough the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 105).

REAR SEATSAdjusting the Rear Seats

WARNING: To prevent possibledamage to the seat or seatbelts, makesure that the seatbelts are not fastenedbefore folding the seatback.

WARNING: When folding orunfolding the seats, take care not to getyour fingers caught between the seatbackrest and seat frame. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriouspersonal injury.

WARNING: When unfolding theseat backrests, make sure that theseatbelts are not trapped behind theseat.

WARNING: Make sure that theseats and the seat backrests are secureand fully locked in their catches.

E186789

Folding the Seat BackrestWith the seat empty, pull the lever up tofold the seat backrest forward.

Unfolding the Seat BackrestRotate the seat backrest up until it latchesin the upright position. The seat backrestclicks when you lock it into position.

Reclining the Seat BackrestWith the seat occupied, pull the lever upto recline the seat backrest.

Easy Fold™ Folding Seat (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not fold a seat if itis occupied. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

Note: The power feature operates whenthe vehicle is in park (P) and the liftgate isopen for less than 10 minutes.The controls are on the left-hand rearquarter trim panel and are accessible fromthe liftgate area.

144


Seats

E190965

Folding the Seat BackrestPress and hold the top control to lower theleft seat backrest. Press and hold thebottom control to lower the right seatbackrest.

Unfolding the Seat BackrestRotate the seat backrest up until it latchesin the upright position. The seat backrestclicks when you lock it into position.

HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Front Seats

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must use caution when usingthe heated seat. The heated seat maycause burns even at low temperatures,especially if used for long periods of time.Do not place anything on the seat thatmay block the heat, such as a blanket orcushion. This can cause the heated seat

to overheat. Do not puncture the seatwith pins, needles or other pointedobjects. This damages the heatingelement and can cause the heated seatto overheat. An overheated seat maycause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the heated seat if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

Note: The heated seats will only functionwhen the engine is running.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.Note: After 90 minutes of operation, theheated seats switch off. Press the heatedseat symbol to switch the heated seats on.

Rear Seats

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must use caution when usingthe heated seat. The heated seat maycause burns even at low temperatures,especially if used for long periods of time.Do not place anything on the seat that

145


Seats

may block the heat, such as a blanket orcushion. This can cause the heated seatto overheat. Do not puncture the seatwith pins, needles or other pointedobjects. This damages the heatingelement and can cause the heated seatto overheat. An overheated seat maycause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any

other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allowthe seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless theengine is running. Doing so can causethe battery to lose charge.

The rear seat heat controls are on the rearof the center console.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS(IF EQUIPPED)

Heated Seats

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must exercise care whenusing the heated seat. The heated seatmay cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anythingon the seat that insulates against heat,such as a blanket or cushion. This maycause the heated seat to overheat. Donot puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This maydamage the heating element which maycause the heated seat to overheat. Anoverheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

Note: The heated seats only function whenthe engine is running.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.Note: After 90 minutes of operation, theheated seats switch off. Press the heatedseat symbol to switch the heated seats on.

146


Seats

Cooled SeatsNote: The cooled seats only function whenthe engine is running.

E146309

Press the cooled seat symbol to cyclethrough the various cool settings and off.More indicator lights indicate coolersettings.

Climate controlled seat air filterreplacementYour vehicle is equipped with lifetime airfilters that are integrated with the seats.Regular maintenance or replacement isnot needed.

147


Seats

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOROPENERHomeLink Wireless ControlSystem

WARNING: Do not use the systemwith any garage door opener that doesnot have the safety stop and reversefeature as required by U.S. FederalSafety Standards (this includes anygarage door opener manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage dooropener which cannot detect an object,signaling the door to stop and reverse,does not meet current federal safetystandards. Using a garage door openerwithout these features increases the riskof serious injury or death.

Note: Make sure that the garage door andsecurity device are free from obstructionwhen you are programming. Do not programthe system with the vehicle in the garage.Note: Make sure you keep the originalremote control transmitter for use in othervehicles as well as for future systemprogramming.Note: We recommend that upon the saleor lease termination of your vehicle, youerase the programmed function buttons forsecurity reasons. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes.Note: You can program a maximum ofthree devices. To change or replace any ofthe three devices after it has been initiallyprogrammed, you must first erase thecurrent settings. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replacesthe common hand-held garage dooropener with a three-button transmitterthat is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.The system includes two primary features,a garage door opener and a platform forremote activation of devices within thehome. As well as being programmed forgarage doors, the system transmitter canbe programmed to operate entry gateoperators, security systems, entry doorlocks and home or office lighting.Additional system information can befound online at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex orby calling the toll-free help line on1-800-355-3515.

In-Vehicle ProgrammingThis process is to program your hand-heldtransmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLinkbutton.Note: The programming steps belowassume you will be programming HomeLinkthat was not previously programmed.Note: Put a new battery in the hand-heldtransmitter. This will ensure quicker trainingand accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

148


Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E142658

1. With your vehicle parked outside of thegarage, turn your ignition to the onposition, but do not start your vehicle.

2. Hold your hand-held garage doortransmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) awayfrom the HomeLink button you wantto program.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously,press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton and the hand-held transmitterbutton. DO NOT release either one untilthe HomeLink indicator light flashesslowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidflashing indicates successful training.

Note: You may need to use a differentmethod if you live in Canada or havedifficulties programming your gate operatoror garage door opener. See Gate Operator/ Canadian Programming.4. Press and hold the HomeLink button

you programmed for two seconds, thenrelease. You may need to do this twiceto activate the door. If your garage doordoes not operate, watch the HomeLinkindicator light.

If the indicator light stays on, theprogramming is complete. No furtheraction is needed.If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2seconds and then turns to a constant light,the HomeLink button is not programmedyet. See Programming Your Garage DoorOpener Motor.

To program additional buttons, repeatSteps 1 – 4.For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming Your Garage DoorOpener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to reach theunit and you may need to remove the coveror lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

1. Press the learn button on the garagedoor opener motor and then you have30 seconds to complete the next twosteps.

2. Return to your vehicle.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button youwant to program for 2 seconds, thenrelease. Repeat this step. Dependingon your brand of garage door opener,you may need to repeat this sequencea third time.

149



Gate Operator / CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.Note: If programming a garage door openeror gate operator, it is advised to unplug thedevice during the “cycling” process toprevent possible overheating.1. Press and hold the HomeLink button

while you press and release, every twoseconds, your hand-held transmitteruntil the HomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light.

2. Release both the HomeLink andhand-held transmitter buttons.

3. Continue programing HomeLink. SeeIn-Vehicle Programming.

Erasing the Function Button CodesNote: You cannot erase individual buttons.

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two functionbuttons simultaneously forapproximately 20 seconds until theindicator lights above the buttons flashrapidly.

2. When the indicator lights flash, releasethe buttons. The codes for all buttonsare erased.

Reprogramming a Single ButtonTo program a device to a previously trainedbutton, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing thebutton, follow Step 1 in theProgramming section.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2Garage Door OpenerNote: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmittermust already be programmed to operatewith the garage door opener.Note: To program HomeLink to thetransmitter you must first put thetransmitter into programming mode.

150



BAE142661

Red indicator lightA.Green indicator lightB.

1. Press and hold one of the buttons onthe hand-held transmitter for 10seconds. The indicator light will changefrom green to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change to programming mode. Ifdone properly the indicator light willappear red.

3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 in(2–8 cm) of the button on the visor youwant to program.

4. Press and hold both the programmedGenie button on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button you wantto program. The indicator light on thevisor will flash rapidly when theprogramming is successful.

Note: The Genie transmitter will transmitfor up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does notprogram within 30 seconds the Genietransmitter will need to be pressed again. Ifthe Genie transmitter indicator light displaysgreen and red, release the button until theindicator light turns off before pressing thebutton again.Once HomeLink has been programmedsuccessfully, the Genie transmitter mustbe changed out of program mode. To dothis:

1. Press and hold the previouslyprogrammed Genie button on thehand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.The indicator light will change from redto red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change. If done correctly theindicator light will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the GenieIntellicode Garage Door Opener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to access thegarage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button onthe garage door opener motor untilboth blue indicator lights turn on.

2. Release the program button. Only thesmaller round indicator light should beon.

3. Press and release the program button.The larger purple indicator light willflash.

Note: The next two steps must becompleted in 30 seconds.4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode

2 hand-held transmitter’s previouslyprogrammed button. Both indicatorlights on the garage door opener motorunit should now flash purple.

151



5. Press and hold the previouslyprogrammed button on the visor for 2seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 timesuntil the garage door moves.

Programming is now complete.

Clearing a HomeLink DeviceTo erase programming from the threeHomeLink buttons press and hold the twoouter HomeLink buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash. The indicator light willbegin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at whichtime both buttons should be released.Programming has now been erased, andthe indicator light should blink slowly toindicate the device is in train mode whenany of the three HomeLink buttons arepressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry CanadaComplianceThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.


This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment. End Users mustfollow the specific operating instructionsfor satisfying RF exposure compliance. Thistransmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)from the user and must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.The term “IC:” before thecertification/registration number onlysignifies that Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

152



12 Volt DC Power Point

WARNING: Do not plug optionalelectrical accessories into the cigarlighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigarlighter can cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty, and can resultin fire or serious injury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 15 amps.Note: If the power supply does not workafter you switch the ignition off, switch theignition on.Note: Do not hang any accessory from theaccessory plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts ora fuse may blow.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. Thisdamages the power point and may blowthe fuse.Run the vehicle for full capacity use of thepower point.To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when you park your vehiclefor extended periods.

USB Port and Power PointLocationsUSB Ports and Power Points may be in thefollowing locations:• On the lower instrument panel.• Inside the center console.• On the front of the center console.• On the rear of the center console.• In the cargo area.• On the passenger side floor panel.• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.Note: Some of the USB ports may not havedata transfer capabilities.Note: Incorrect use of the USB ports cancause damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not keep electricaldevices plugged in the power pointwhenever the device is not in use. Do notuse any extension cord with the 110 voltAC power point, since it will defeat thesafety protection design. Doing so maycause the power point to overload dueto powering multiple devices that canreach beyond the 150 watt load limit andcould result in fire or serious injury.

Note: The power point turns off when youswitch off the ignition, when the vehicle isnot in accessory mode or when the batteryvoltage drops below 11 volts.You can use the power point for electricdevices that require up to 150 watts. It ison the rear of the center console.

153


Auxiliary Power Points

E247586

When the indicator light on the power pointis:• On: The power point is working, the

ignition is ON or the vehicle is inaccessory mode.

• Off: The power point is OFF, the ignitionis OFF or the vehicle is not in accessorymode.

• Flashing: The power point is in faultmode.

Due to the different technologies used onits construction, some devices may exceedthe capacity shown on its label when theyare initially plugged-in.The power outlet temporarily turns offpower when in fault mode if the deviceexceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug yourdevice and switch the ignition off. Switchthe ignition back on, but do not plug yourdevice back in. Let the system cool off andswitch the ignition off to reset the faultmode. Switch the ignition back on andmake sure the indicator light remains on.Do not use the power point for certainelectric devices, including:• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,

electric saws and other electric powertools or compressor-drivenrefrigerators.

• Measuring devices, which processprecise data, such as medicalequipment or measuring equipment.

• Other appliances requiring anextremely stable power supply such asmicrocomputer-controlled electricblankets or touch-sensor lamps.

WIRELESS ACCESSORYCHARGING (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Wireless chargingdevices can affect the operation ofimplanted medical devices, includingcardiac pacemakers. If you have anyimplanted medical devices, werecommend that you consult with yourphysician.


Note: Devices without built-in Qi wirelesscharging receivers require an additional Qireceiver or sleeve.Note: For compatible devices with built-inQi wireless charging capability, the chargingperformance may be affected if your deviceis in a case. It may be necessary to removethe case to wirelessly charge your device.The system supports one Qi wirelesscharging compatible device on thecharging area.Keep the charging area clean and removeforeign objects prior to charging a device.

154



Do not place items with a magnetic strip,for example passports, parking tickets orcredit cards, near the charging area whencharging a device. Damage may occur tothe magnetic strip.Do not place metal objects, for exampleremote controls, coins and candywrappers, on or near the charging areawhen charging a device. Metal objects mayheat up and degrade the chargingperformance.Note: The device controls the rate ofcharge, or charging power. During charging,the device and the charger may heat up, thisis normal. If the battery gets hotter thanusual, the charger may stop charging.

E297549

The charging area is on thecenter console or lowerinstrument panel. See Center

Console (page 157).

You can charge a device if the vehicle ison, when in accessory mode, or anytimeSYNC is on.To begin charging, place the device on thecenter of the charging surface with thecharging side down. The charging stopsafter your device reaches a full charge.Note: If the system detects a foreign objector if the device is misaligned on the chargingarea, a message appears in the display.Note: Software and firmware updates mayaffect device compatibility, including theuse of unofficial software or firmware. Youshould verify charging functionality with yourspecific devices when in your vehicle.

DescriptionBehaviorMessage

This message appears whenwireless charging begins.

Message on screen displayor pop-up window.

Wireless Charger Active

The system stops chargingyour device if the system

detects the phone ismisaligned, or a foreign

metal object is on the char-ging surface.

Pop-up window.

Charging Terminated

Phone misaligned or objectbetween phone and chargerdetected. Correct the condi-

tion to resume charging.

FCC ID: L2C0066T Tests on this equipment show that itcomplies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.• This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy andmay cause harmful interference toradio communications. There is noguarantee that the interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or televisionreception, please consult the dealer.

• This product is not end-userserviceable.

155



This device complies with Industry Canadalicence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to:• This device may not cause interference.• This device must accept any

interference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of thedevice.

Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.The term "IC" before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.

156



CENTER CONSOLEStow items in the cup holder carefully asitems may become loose during hardbraking, acceleration or crashes, includinghot drinks which may spill.Available console features may include:

E270555

Auxiliary power point.AStorage compartment withmedia hub, optional wirelesscharging pad and optional USBport.

B

Cup holder.CStorage tray.DAuxiliary power point with powerinverter or cigar lighter.

E

Storage compartment withauxiliary power point or cigarlighter.

F

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E266392

Press near the rear edge of the door toopen it.

REAR SEAT ARMREST

E144635

Fold the armrest down to use the armrestand cup holder.

157


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING: Extended idling at highengine speeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire or otherdamage.

WARNING: Do not park, idle ordrive your vehicle on dry grass or otherdry ground cover. The emission systemheats up the engine compartment andexhaust system, creating the risk of fire.

WARNING: Do not start the enginein a closed garage or in other enclosedareas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.Always open the garage door before youstart the engine.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks mayresult in entry of harmful and potentiallylethal fumes into the passengercompartment. If you smell exhaustfumes inside your vehicle, have yourvehicle inspected immediately. Do notdrive if you smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 mi(8 km) after you reconnect it. This isbecause the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. Youcan disregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating theimpulse electrical field or radio noise.When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

KEYLESS STARTINGNote: The system may not function if theintelligent access key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices, for examplekeys or a cell phone.Note: A valid intelligent access key mustbe located inside your vehicle to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Ignition Modes

E144447

The keyless starting system has threemodes:Off: Turns the ignition off.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button oncewhen the ignition is in the on mode, orwhen your vehicle is running but is notmoving.

On: All electrical circuits are operationaland the warning lamps and indicatorsilluminate.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine maynot start when your vehicle starts.• Press the brake pedal, and then press

the button for any length of time. Anindicator light on the button illuminateswhen the ignition is on and when yourvehicle starts.

158


Starting and Stopping the Engine

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINEWhen you start the engine, the idle speedincreases. This helps to warm up theengine. If the engine idle speed does notslow down automatically, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.Note: You can crank the engine for a totalof 60 seconds without the engine startingbefore the starting system temporarilydisables. The 60 seconds does not have tobe all at once. For example, if you crank theengine three times for 20 seconds eachtime, without the engine starting, youreached the 60-second time limit. Amessage appears in the information displayalerting you that you exceeded the crankingtime. You cannot attempt to start theengine for at least 15 minutes. After 15minutes, you are limited to a 15-secondengine cranking time. You need to wait 60minutes before you can crank the engine for60 seconds again.Before starting the engine check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their seatbelts.• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.• Make sure the transmission is in park

(P) or neutral.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedinside your vehicle to switch the power onand start your vehicle.1. Press the brake pedal.2. Briefly press the push button ignition

switch.

The system does not function if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start the engine, do thefollowing:

E276240

1. Open the floor console storagecompartment lid.

E195808

2

2. With the buttons facing the rear of yourvehicle and the key ring up, place theintelligent access key into the backupslot.

159



3. With the key in this position, press thebrake pedal then the power button toswitch the ignition on and start yourvehicle.

Fast RestartThe fast restart feature allows you torestart your vehicle within 10 seconds ofswitching it off, even if it does not detecta valid passive key.Within 10 seconds of switching your vehicleoff, press the brake pedal and press thepush button ignition switch.After 10 seconds, you can no longer startyour vehicle if it does not detect a validpassive key.Once your vehicle starts, it remains runninguntil you press the push button ignitionswitch, even if your vehicle does not detecta valid passive key. If you open and closea door while your vehicle is running, thesystem searches for a valid passive key.

Failure to StartIf you cannot start the engine after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow thisprocedure:1. Press the brake pedal.2. Shift into park (P) or neutral.3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully

pressed and press the push buttonignition switch until the engine starts.

Automatic Engine ShutdownThis feature automatically shuts down theengine if it has been idling for an extendedperiod. The ignition also turns off to savebattery power. Before the engine shutsdown, a message appears in theinformation display showing a timer

counting down from 30 seconds. If you donot intervene within 30 seconds, the engineshuts down. Another message appears inthe information display to inform you thatthe engine has shut down in order to savefuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown OverrideNote: You cannot permanently switch offthe automatic shutdown. When youtemporality switch it off, it turns on at thenext ignition cycle.You can stop the shutdown, or reset thetimer, at any point before the 30-secondcountdown has expired by doing any of thefollowing:• Reset the timer by pressing the brake

or accelerator pedal.• Temporarily switch off the shutdown

feature during the current ignition cycleusing the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 105).

• Press OK or RESET to temporarilyswitch the feature off during thecurrent ignition cycle.

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Stationary1. Shift into park (P).2. Press the push button ignition switch.3. Apply the parking brake.Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits andall warning lamps and indicators will beturned off.Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,the ignition and engine automatically shutsdown.

160



Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNING: Switching off theengine when your vehicle is still movingresults in a significant decrease inbraking assistance. Higher effort isrequired to apply the brakes and to stopyour vehicle. A significant decrease insteering assistance could also occur. Thesteering does not lock, but higher effortcould be required to steer your vehicle.When you switch the ignition off, someelectrical circuits, for example airbags,also turn off. If you unintentionally switchthe ignition off, shift into neutral (N) andrestart the engine.

1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)and use the brakes to bring your vehicleto a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, shiftinto park (P).

3. Press and hold the push button ignitionswitch until the engine stops, or pressit three times within two seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes


Important Ventilating InformationIf you stop your vehicle and then leave theengine idling for long periods, werecommend that you do one of thefollowing:• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).• Set your climate control to outside air.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles With a Turbocharger

WARNING: Do not switch theengine off when it is running at highspeed. If you do, the turbocharger willcontinue running after the engine oilpressure has dropped to zero. This willlead to premature turbocharger bearingwear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.Note: The vehicles equipped with Dieselengines perform the turbocharger vanecleaning cycle when the engine is turnedoff. The cleaning cycle strategy consists in3 complete sweeps in the variable geometrymechanism of the turbocharger in order toremove the soot generated by the fuelcombustion. Those movements generates acharacteristic whistle noise coming fromthe underhood compartment and will notbring any functional problem to the engine.

161



ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Failure to follow engineblock heater instructions could result inproperty damage or serious personalinjury.

WARNING: Do not use your heaterwith ungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk ofelectrical shock.

WARNING: Do not fully close thehood, or allow it to drop under its ownweight when using the engine blockheater. This could damage the powercable and may cause an electrical shortresulting in fire, injury and propertydamage.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F(-18°C).The heater acts as a starting aid bywarming the engine coolant. This allowsthe climate control system to respondquickly. The equipment includes a heaterelement, installed in the engine block anda wire harness. You can connect thesystem to a grounded 120-volt ACelectrical source.We recommend that you do the followingfor a safe and correct operation:• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified byUnderwriter’s Laboratory (UL) orCanadian Standards Association(CSA). This extension cord must besuitable for use outdoors, in cold

temperatures, and be clearly markedSuitable for Use with OutdoorAppliances. Do not use an indoorextension cord outdoors. This couldresult in an electric shock or become afire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cordplug connections are free and clear ofwater. This could cause an electricshock or fire.

• If the block heater cord is under thehood, Do Not remove the wiring fromits original location. Do Not close thehood on the extension wiring.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in aclean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in theelectrical hookup once the system hasbeen operating for approximately 30minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before starting anddriving your vehicle. Make sure theprotective cover seals the prongs of theblock heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system ischecked for proper operation beforewinter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterMake sure the receptacle terminals areclean and dry prior to use. Clean them witha dry cloth if necessary.

162



The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hoursof energy per hour of use. The system doesnot have a thermostat. It achievesmaximum temperature afterapproximately three hours of operation.Using the heater longer than three hoursdoes not improve system performance andunnecessarily uses electricity.

163



AUTO-START-STOPThe system helps reduce fuel consumptionby automatically stopping and restartingthe engine when your vehicle has stopped.The engine restarts automatically whenyou release the brake pedal.In some situations, your vehicle may restartautomatically, for example:• To maintain interior comfort.• To recharge the battery.Note: Power assist steering is turned offwhen the engine is off.

WARNING: Apply the parkingbrake, shift into park (P), switch theignition off and remove the key beforeyou leave your vehicle. Failure to followthis instruction could result in personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Apply the parkingbrake, shift into park (P), switch theignition off and remove the key beforeyou open the hood or have any serviceor repair work completed. If you do notswitch the ignition off, the engine couldrestart at any time. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: The system mayrequire the engine to automaticallyrestart when the auto-start-stopindicator illuminates green or flashesamber. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury.

The Auto-Start-Stop system status isavailable at a glance within the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page105).

Enabling Auto-Start-StopThe system automatically enables everytime you start your vehicle if:• You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop

button (button is not illuminated).• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed

of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you haveinitially started your vehicle.

• Your vehicle is stopped.• Your foot is on the brake pedal.• The transmission is in drive (D).• The driver door is closed.• There is adequate brake vacuum.• The interior compartment has been

cooled or warmed to an acceptablelevel.

• The front windshield defroster is off.• The steering wheel is not turned rapidly

or is not at a sharp angle.• The vehicle is not on a steep road

grade.• The battery is within optimal operating

conditions (battery state of charge andtemperature in range).

• The engine coolant is at operatingtemperature.

• Elevation is below approximately11,810 ft (3,600 m).

• Ambient temperature is moderate.The green Auto-Start-Stopindicator light on the instrumentcluster illuminates to indicate

when the automatic engine stop occurs.

E146361

If you have an instrument clusterequipped with a greyAuto-Start-Stop indicator light,

it illuminates when automatic engine stopis not available due to not meeting one ofthe above noted conditions.

164



Automatic Engine RestartAny of the following conditions will resultin an automatic restart of the engine:• Your foot is removed from the brake

pedal.• You press the accelerator pedal.• You press the accelerator and the

brake pedal at the same time.• The driver safety belt becomes

unfastened or the driver door is ajar.• Your vehicle is moving.• The interior compartment does not

meet customer comfort when airconditioning or heat is on.

• Fogging of the windows could occurand the air conditioning is on.

• The battery is not within optimaloperating conditions.

• The maximum engine off time isexceeded.

• The engine has stopped automaticallyand you press the Auto-Start-Stopbutton.

Any of the following conditions may resultin an automatic restart of the engine:• The blower fan speed is increased or

the climate control temperature ischanged.

• An electrical accessory is turned on orplugged in.

Disabling Auto-Start-Stop

E233762

Press the Auto-Start-Stop button on thecenter console to switch the system off.The button will illuminate. The system willonly be deactivated for the current ignitioncycle. Press the button again to restoreAuto-Start-Stop function.If your vehicle is in an Auto-Start-Stopstate and you shift the transmission toreverse without depressing the brakepedal, a message telling you to press thebrake appears. You must press the brakepedal within 60 seconds, or the systemrequires a shift to park and a manualrestart.Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Enginemessage appears and the amberAuto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,automatic restart is not available. Thevehicle must be restarted manually. SeeInformation Displays (page 105).

165



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: Do not overfill the fueltank. The pressure in an overfilled tankmay cause leakage and lead to fuel sprayand fire.

WARNING: The fuel system maybe under pressure. If you hear a hissingsound near the fuel filler inlet, do notrefuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,fuel may spray out, which could causeserious personal injury.

WARNING: Fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused or mishandled.

WARNING: Fuel may containbenzene, which is a cancer-causingagent.

WARNING: When refueling alwaysshut the engine off and never allowsparks or open flames near the fuel tankfiller valve. Never smoke or use a cellphone while refueling. Fuel vapor isextremely hazardous under certainconditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

Follow these guidelines when refueling:• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always switch the engine off beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxicand if swallowed can cause death orpermanent injury. If fuel is swallowedimmediately call a physician, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not beapparent for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuelvapor can lead to eye and respiratorytract irritation. In severe cases,excessive or prolonged breathing offuel vapor can cause serious illness andpermanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If yousplash fuel in your eyes, immediatelyremove contact lenses (if worn), flushwith water for 15 minutes and seekmedical attention. Failure to seekproper medical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If you splash fuel onyour skin, clothing or both, promptlyremove contaminated clothing andthoroughly wash your skin with soapand water. Repeated or prolonged skincontact causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are takingAntabuse or other forms of Disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing fuel vapors could cause anadverse reaction, serious personalinjury or sickness. Immediately call aphysician if you experience any adversereactions.

FUEL QUALITYChoosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate onregular unleaded gasoline with a minimumpump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

166


Fuel and Refueling

Some fuel stations, particularly those inhigh altitude areas, offer fuels posted asregular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating below 87. The use of these fuelscould result in engine damage that will notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.For best overall vehicle and engineperformance, premium fuel with an octanerating of 91 or higher is recommended. Theperformance gained by using premium fuelis most noticeable in hot weather as wellas other conditions, for example whentowing a trailer. See Towing (page 246).Do not be concerned if the enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if theengine knocks heavily while using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, contactan authorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.We recommend Top Tier detergentgasolines, where available to help minimizeengine deposits and maintain optimalvehicle and engine performance. Foradditional information, refer towww.toptiergas.com.Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehiclewas not designed can impair the emissioncontrol system, cause loss of vehicleperformance, and cause damage to theengine which may not be covered by thevehicle Warranty.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol

or E85 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel isprohibited by law.

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (commonly knownas MMT), which is a manganese-basedfuel additive, will impair engineperformance and affect the emissioncontrol system.

FUEL FILLER FUNNELLOCATIONThe fuel filler funnel is under the luggagecompartment floor covering.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELRunning out of fuel can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty.If your vehicle runs out of fuel:• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel

to restart the engine.• You may need to switch the ignition

from off to on several times afterrefueling to allow the fuel system topump the fuel from the tank to theengine. When restarting, cranking timetakes a few seconds longer thannormal.

Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,more fuel may be required.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

WARNING: Flow of fuel through afuel pump nozzle can produce staticelectricity. This can cause a fire if you arefilling an ungrounded fuel container.

167


Fuel and Refueling

Use the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up, which canproduce a spark, when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Only use an approved fuel container to

transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place thecontainer on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it isinside your vehicle (including the cargoarea).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contactwith the fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuelpump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer

WARNING: Do not insert the nozzleof a fuel container or an aftermarketfunnel into the fuel filler neck. This maydamage the fuel system filler neck or itsseal and cause fuel to run onto theground.

WARNING: Do not try to pry openor push open the capless fuel systemwith foreign objects. This could damagethe fuel system and its seal and causeinjury to you or others.

WARNING: Do not dispose of fuelin the household refuse or the publicsewage system. Use an authorized wastedisposal facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, use the fuel filler funnelincluded with your vehicle. See Fuel FillerFunnel Location (page 167).Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels asthey may not work with the capless fuelsystem and can damage it.When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, do the following:

1. Fully open the fuel filler door.2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the

fuel filler inlet.

E157452

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuelcontainer.

4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.5. Fully close the fuel filler door.6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it

back in your vehicle or correctly disposeof it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased froman authorized dealer if you choose todispose of the funnel.

168


Fuel and Refueling

REFUELINGRefueling System Overview

E267248

B

C

A

Fuel filler door.AFuel tank filler valve.BFuel tank filler pipe.C

Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank fillercap.

E206911

A B

C D

Left-hand side. To open the fuelfiller door, press the center rearedge of the fuel filler door andthen release.

A

Right-hand side. To open thefuel filler door, press the centerrear edge of the fuel filler doorand then release.

B

Left-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel filler door to open it.

C

Right-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel filler door to open it.

D

Refueling Your Vehicle

WARNING: When refueling alwaysshut the engine off and never allowsparks or open flames near the fuel tankfiller valve. Never smoke or use a cellphone while refueling. Fuel vapor isextremely hazardous under certainconditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

169


Fuel and Refueling

WARNING: The fuel system maybe under pressure. If you hear a hissingsound near the fuel filler inlet, do notrefuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,fuel may spray out, which could causeserious personal injury.

WARNING: Do not pry open thefuel tank filler valve. This could damagethe fuel system. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in fire, personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Do not remove the fuelpump nozzle from its fully insertedposition when refueling.

WARNING: Stop refueling whenthe fuel pump nozzle automaticallyshuts off for the first time. Failure tofollow this will fill the expansion spacein the fuel tank and could lead to fueloverflowing.

WARNING: Do not overfill the fueltank. The pressure in an overfilled tankmay cause leakage and lead to fuel sprayand fire.

WARNING: Wait at least fiveseconds before removing the fuel pumpnozzle to allow any residual fuel to draininto the fuel tank.

1. Fully open the fuel filler door.2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for

your vehicle.

E139202

A

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to thefirst notch on the nozzle A. Keep thefuel pump nozzle resting on the fueltank filler pipe.

E139203

A

B

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in positionB when refueling. Holding the fuelpump nozzle in position A can affectthe flow of fuel and shut off the fuelpump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

170


Fuel and Refueling

E206912

A B

5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle withinthe area shown.

E119081

6. When you finish refueling slightly raisethe fuel pump nozzle and slowlyremove it.

7. Fully close the fuel filler door.Do not attempt to start the engine if youhave filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.Incorrect fuel use could cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty. Have yourvehicle immediately checked.

Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)

If the fuel tank filler valve does not fullyclose, a message could appear in theinformation display.

Message

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

If the message appears, do the following:1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe

to do so and switch the engine off.2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

3. Apply the parking brake.4. Fully open the fuel filler door.5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any

debris that may be restricting itsmovement.

6. Remove any debris from the fuel tankfiller valve.

7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or thefuel filler funnel provided with yourvehicle into the fuel filler pipe. SeeFuel Filler Funnel Location (page167). This action should dislodge anydebris that may be preventing the fueltank filler valve from fully closing.

8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuelfiller funnel from the fuel filler pipe.

9. Fully close the fuel filler door.Note: The message may not immediatelyreset. If the message continues to appearand a warning lamp illuminates, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONAdvertised CapacityThe advertised capacity is the maximumamount of fuel that you can add to the fueltank after running out of fuel. Included inthe advertised capacity is an emptyreserve. The empty reserve is anunspecified amount of fuel that remainsin the fuel tank when the fuel gaugeindicates empty.Your dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.Note: The amount of fuel in the emptyreserve varies and should not be relied uponto increase driving range.

Filling the Fuel TankFor consistent results when filling the fueltank:

171


Fuel and Refueling

• Turn the ignition off before fueling; aninaccurate reading results if the engineis left running.

• Use the same fill rate(low-medium-high) each time the tankis filled.

• The maximum tank capacity, duringfueling, is reached when the pump isautomatically cut off for the secondtime.

Results are most accurate when the fillingmethod is consistent.

Fuel EconomyYour vehicle calculates fuel economyfigures through the trip computer averagefuel function. See General Information(page 105).The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving isthe break-in period of the engine. A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after2,000 mi (3,000 km).

Impacting Fuel Economy• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.• Fully loading your vehicle.• Carrying unnecessary weight.• Adding certain accessories to your

vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbarsor light bars, running boards and skiracks.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol.• Fuel economy may decrease with lower

temperatures.• Fuel economy may decrease when

driving short distances.• You may get better fuel economy when

driving on flat terrain than when drivingon hilly terrain.

172


Fuel and Refueling

EMISSION LAW

WARNING: Do not remove or alterthe original equipment floor covering orinsulation between it and the metal floorof the vehicle. The floor covering andinsulation protect occupants of thevehicle from the engine and exhaustsystem heat and noise. On vehicles withno original equipment floor coveringinsulation, do not carry passengers in amanner that permits prolonged skincontact with the metal floor. Failure tofollow these instructions may result infire or personal injury.

U.S. federal laws and certain state lawsprohibit removing or rendering inoperativeemission control system components.Similar federal or provincial laws mayapply in Canada. We do not approve of anyvehicle modification without firstdetermining applicable laws.

Tampering with emissionscontrol systems includingrelated sensors or the Diesel

Exhaust Fluid system can result in reducedengine power and the illumination of theservice engine soon light.

Tampering With a Noise ControlSystemFederal laws prohibit the following acts:• Removal or rendering inoperative by

any person other than for purposes ofmaintenance.

• Repair or replacement of any device orelement of the design incorporated intoa new vehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale or delivery tothe ultimate purchaser or while it is inuse.

• The use of the vehicle after any personremoves or renders inoperative anydevice or element of the design.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencymay presume to constitute tampering asfollows:• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron

absorbers, fender apron barriers,underbody noise shields or acousticallyabsorptive material.

• Tampering or rendering inoperative theengine speed governor, to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,experiences a decrease in engineperformance, experiences excess fuelconsumption or produces excessiveexhaust smoke, check for the following:• A plugged or disconnected air inlet

system hose.• A plugged engine air filter element.• Water in the fuel filter and water

separator.• A clogged fuel filter.• Contaminated fuel.• Air in the fuel system, due to loose

connections.• An open or pinched sensor hose.• Incorrect engine oil level.

173


Engine Emission Control

• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for

climactic conditions.Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuelfilter that is integrated with the fuel tank.Regular maintenance or replacement is notneeded.Note: If these checks do not help youcorrect the concern, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

Noise Emissions Warranty,Prohibited Tampering Acts andMaintenanceOn January 1, 1978, Federal regulationbecame effective governing the noiseemission on trucks over 10,000 lb(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The preceding statementsconcerning prohibited tampering acts andmaintenance, and the noise warrantyfound in the Warranty Guide, areapplicable to complete chassis cabs over10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNING: Do not park, idle ordrive your vehicle on dry grass or otherdry ground cover. The emission systemheats up the engine compartment andexhaust system, creating the risk of fire.

WARNING: The normal operatingtemperature of the exhaust system isvery high. Never work around or attemptto repair any part of the exhaust systemuntil it has cooled. Use special care whenworking around the catalytic converter.The catalytic converter heats up to a veryhigh temperature after only a shortperiod of engine operation and stays hotafter the engine is switched off.


Your vehicle has various emission controlcomponents and a catalytic converter thatenables it to comply with applicableexhaust emission standards.To make sure that the catalytic converterand other emission control componentscontinue to work properly:• Do not crank the engine for more than

10 seconds at a time.• Do not run the engine with a spark plug

lead disconnected.• Do not push-start or tow-start your

vehicle. Use booster cables. See JumpStarting the Vehicle (page 257).

• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Do not switch the ignition off when your

vehicle is moving.• Avoid running out of fuel.• Have the items listed in scheduled

maintenance information performedaccording to the specified schedule.

Note: Resulting component damage maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.The scheduled maintenance items listedin scheduled maintenance information areessential to the life and performance ofyour vehicle and to its emissions system.If you use anything other than Ford,Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts formaintenance replacements or for serviceof components affecting emission control,such non-Ford parts should be equivalentto genuine Ford Motor Company parts inperformance and durability.

174



Illumination of the service engine soonindicator, charging system warning light orthe temperature warning light, fluid leaks,strange odors, smoke or loss of enginepower could indicate that the emissioncontrol system is not working properly.An improperly operating or damagedexhaust system may allow exhaust toenter the vehicle. Have a damaged orimproperly operating exhaust systeminspected and repaired immediately.Do not make any unauthorized changes toyour vehicle or engine. By law, vehicleowners and anyone who manufactures,repairs, services, sells, leases, tradesvehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehiclesare not permitted to intentionally removean emission control device or prevent itfrom working. Information about yourvehicle’s emission system is on the VehicleEmission Control Information Decallocated on or near the engine. This decalalso lists engine displacement.Please consult your warranty informationfor complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle has a computer known as theon-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) thatmonitors the engine’s emission controlsystem. The system protects theenvironment by making sure that yourvehicle continues to meet governmentemission standards. The OBD-II systemalso assists a service technician in properlyservicing your vehicle.

When the service engine soonindicator illuminates, the OBD-IIsystem has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions maycause the service engine soon indicator toilluminate. Examples are:

1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—theengine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in thefuel—the engine may misfire or runpoorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closedproperly. See Refueling (page 169).

4. Driving through deep water—theelectrical system may be wet.

You can correct these temporarymalfunctions by filling the fuel tank withgood quality fuel, properly closing the fuelfill inlet or letting the electrical system dryout. After three driving cycles without theseor any other temporary malfunctionspresent, the service engine soon indicatorshould stay off the next time you start theengine. A driving cycle consists of a coldengine startup followed by mixed city andhighway driving. No additional vehicleservice is required.If the service engine soon indicator remainson, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although somemalfunctions detected by the OBD-II maynot have symptoms that are apparent,continued driving with the service enginesoon indicator on can result in increasedemissions, lower fuel economy, reducedengine and transmission smoothness andlead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) TestingSome state and provincial and localgovernments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programsto inspect the emission control equipmenton your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from gettinga vehicle registration.

If the service engine soonindicator is on or the bulb doesnot work, your vehicle may need

service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

175



Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test ifthe service engine soon indicator is on ornot working properly (bulb is burned out),or if the OBD-II system has determinedthat some of the emission control systemshave not been properly checked. In thiscase, the vehicle is not ready for I/Mtesting.If the vehicle’s engine or transmission hasjust been serviced, or the battery hasrecently run down or been replaced, theOBD-II system may indicate that thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing. Todetermine if the vehicle is ready for I/Mtesting, turn the ignition key to the onposition for 15 seconds without crankingthe engine. If the service engine soonindicator blinks eight times, it means thatthe vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; ifthe service engine soon indicator stays onsolid, it means that your vehicle is readyfor I/M testing.The OBD-II system checks the emissioncontrol system during normal driving. Acomplete check may take several days.If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,you can perform the following driving cycleconsisting of mixed city and highwaydriving:1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an

expressway or highway followed by 20minutes of stop-and-go driving with atleast four 30-second idle periods.

2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at leasteight hours with the ignition off. Then,start the vehicle and complete theabove driving cycle. The vehicle mustwarm up to its normal operatingtemperature. Once started, do not turnoff the vehicle until the above drivingcycle is complete.

If the vehicle is still not ready for I/Mtesting, you need to repeat the abovedriving cycle.

176



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING: Always fully apply theparking brake and make sure you shiftinto park (P). Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Do not apply the brakepedal and accelerator pedalsimultaneously. Applying both pedalssimultaneously for more than a fewseconds will limit engine performance,which may result in difficulty maintainingspeed in traffic and could lead to seriousinjury.

WARNING: When your vehicle isstationary, keep the brake pedal fullypressed when shifting gears. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury, death or propertydamage.

Note: You may not be able to shift out ofpark (P) unless the intelligent access key isinside your vehicle.

Understanding the Positions ofYour Rotary Shift Transmission

E222981

Park.PReverse.RNeutral.NDrive.DSport mode.S

Your vehicle has an electronic transmissionshifter. The transmission selector is on thecenter console.The instrument cluster displays the currentgear.

Park (P)

WARNING: Move the transmissionselector lever to park (P) only when yourvehicle is stationary.

With the transmission in park (P), yourvehicle locks the transmission andprevents the wheels from turning. Alwayscome to a complete stop before puttingyour vehicle into and out of park (P). Anaudible tone may occur when you selectpark (P).

177


Transmission

When you switch the ignition off, yourvehicle shifts into park (P). If you switchthe ignition off when the vehicle is moving,it first shifts into neutral (N) until it reachesa slow enough speed and then shifts intopark (P).The electric parking brake may apply whenyou shift to park (P) without the brakepedal fully pressed. The electric parkingbrake applies when you shift to park (P)on large slopes. The electric parking brakereleases with the drive away releasefunction.Note: A warning tone sounds if you openthe driver door and you have not shifted thetransmission selector to park (P).

Automatic Return to ParkNote: This feature does not operate whenyour vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode oremergency tow.Your vehicle has a feature that shifts intopark (P) when any of the followingconditions occur:• You turn the vehicle off.• You open the driver door with your

seatbelt unlatched.• Your seatbelt is unlatched when the

driver door is open.If you turn your vehicle off when moving,your vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) untilit slows down enough to shift into park (P)automatically.Note: If you have waited an extendedperiod of time, 2-15 minutes before startingyour vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt cancause this feature to activate, even with thedriver door closed.Note: This feature may not work properlyif the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. Ifyour door ajar indicator does not illuminatewhen you open the driver door or theindicator illuminates with the driver doorclosed, contact your authorized dealer.

Reverse (R)

WARNING: Move the transmissionselector lever to reverse (R) only whenyour vehicle is stationary and the engineis at idle speed.

With the transmission selector in reverse(R), your vehicle moves backward. Alwayscome to a complete stop before shiftinginto and out of reverse (R).

Neutral (N)

WARNING: In neutral (N) yourvehicle has the ability to roll freely. If youintend to leave your vehicle, make sureyou apply the parking brake.

With the transmission selector in neutral(N), you can start your vehicle and it is freeto roll. Hold the brake pedal down when inthis position.

Stay in Neutral ModeNote: Stay in neutral mode is a temporaryvehicle state with the ignition off. Once inthis mode, sufficient battery voltage mustbe maintained or your vehicle returns topark.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in vehicle damage not covered bythe vehicle Warranty.Note: When entering an automatic carwash, always shift to neutral (N). If you areexiting the vehicle before the car wash, Stayin Neutral Mode is available.Extended usage of Stay in Neutral modemay result in a battery voltage reductionto level where the vehicle may no longerstart.Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.

178


Transmission

To enter Stay in Neutral mode, do thefollowing:1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.2. Shift into neutral (N).Note: A message appears in theinformation display.3. Press the sport (S) button.Note: A confirmation message appears inthe information display when your vehiclehas entered Stay in Neutral mode and theneutral (N) button on the transmissionselector slowly blinks.To exit Stay in Neutral mode, press thebrake pedal and shift into another gear.

Drive (D)Drive (D) is the normal driving position forthe optimum fuel economy andsmoothness. Shift the transmission gearselector to drive (D) to allow your vehicleto move forward and shift automaticallythrough the forward gears.The transmission shifts to the appropriategear for optimum performance based onambient temperature, road slope, vehicleload and your input.

Sport Mode (S)In sport (S) mode, the transmission selectsthe optimum gear for the bestperformance. This gear selection istypically lower than that of drive (D), andthe transmission shifts are quicker, and athigher engine speeds.

SelectShift Automatic™Transmission (If Equipped)

The SelectShift automatic transmissiongives you the ability to change gears up ordown as desired.Downshifts are allowed unless the enginespeed after the shift exceeds themaximum allowable limit.

In order to prevent engine stalls,SelectShift automatically downshifts atlow engine speeds.Note: Engine damage may occur if youmaintain excessive engine revving withoutshifting.SelectShift does not automatically upshift,even if the engine is approaching the RPMlimit, unless the accelerator pedal is at fulltravel.Take notice of the shift indicator lamp,which alerts you when to shift to help youachieve the optimum level of efficiencyand fuel economy.Pull the + paddle on the steering wheelto activate SelectShift.• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

E144821

SelectShift in drive (D):• Provides temporary manual control of

the gear selection when you require amore demanding response, forexample, when towing or overtaking.This mode holds a selected gear for atemporary period of time dependenton driver input, for example, steeringwheel or accelerator pedal input.

SelectShift in sport (S):• Provides a permanent manual gear

selection, where you can select thegear.

179


Transmission

To exit SelectShift mode:• Press and hold the + paddle on the

steering wheel to deactivateSelectShift mode in drive (D) or sport(S).

OR• Diesel vehicles only: Press and hold the

+ toggle or + steering wheel paddle fora few seconds.

The instrument cluster displays yourcurrent gear. If you request a gear that isnot available due to vehicle conditions, toolow or too high engine speed, the currentgear flashes three times.Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, thetransmission may automatically downshiftfor maximum performance.

Manual Park Release

WARNING: When doing thisprocedure, you need to take thetransmission out of park (P) whichmeans your vehicle can roll freely. Toavoid unwanted vehicle movement,always fully apply the parking brake priorto doing this procedure. Use wheelschocks if appropriate.

WARNING: If the parking brake isfully released, but the brake warninglamp remains illuminated, the brakesmay not be working properly. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

WARNING: Do not drive yourvehicle until you verify that thestoplamps are working.

Use the manual park release to move yourtransmission from the park (P) position inthe event of an electrical malfunction oremergency.

Activating the Manual Park ReleaseCable1. Apply the parking brake.Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,no electrical power available, an externalpower may be required to apply the parkingbrake.

E307294

2. Locate the manual park release cableaccess cover under the dash, below thesteering wheel.

3. Using a tool, carefully remove thescrew from the access cover and open.

Note: Do not pull the tether until you are inthe driver's seat.

180


Transmission

E307295

4. Switch ignition on, but do not start yourvehicle.

5. Once in the driver seat, fully apply thebrake pedal and hold. Do not release.Pull the orange tether outward towardsthe driver seat, move the tether to thelower right-hand corner to seat themetal bead in the pocket, and lock itinto the override position. If donecorrectly, a message on the instrumentcluster displays Park Not Available,Transmission Not In Park or ShiftSystem Fault.

Note: Your vehicle is now out of the park(P) position and is free to roll.6. With your foot still fully applied on the

brake pedal, disengage the parkingbrake.

7. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) foremergency towing purposes.

8. Switch off the ignition

9. Once safe to do so, and there is no riskthat your vehicle will roll, disconnectthe negative (black) battery cable fromthe battery.

Returning Your Vehicle to NormalMode1. Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the

negative (black) battery cable to thebattery.

2. Apply the parking brake.Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,no electrical power available, an externalpower may be required to apply the parkingbrake.Note: Do not pull the tether until you are inthe driver seat.3. Once in the driver seat, fully apply the

brake pedal and hold, do not release.Pull the orange tether outward towardsthe driver seat.

4. Move the tether towards the left andrelease to return it to the rest position.

5. Stow the manual park release cabletether, install the access cover andreplace the screw.

6. With your foot fully applied on thebrake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirmthat your vehicle is in the park (P)position and that the instrumentcluster indicates park (P).

7. If the instrument cluster is notdisplaying the park (P) position or thereis a message stating Park NotAvailable, Transmission Not In Park orShift System Fault, apply the parkingbrake before exiting your vehicle.Contact an authorized dealer forservice.

181


Transmission

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearningThis feature may increase durability andprovide consistent shift feel over the lifeof your vehicle. A new vehicle ortransmission may have firm shifts, softshifts or both. This operation is considerednormal and does not affect function ordurability of the transmission. Over time,the adaptive learning process can optimizethe transmission operation.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mudor SnowNote: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or theengine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern.Press lightly on the accelerator in eachgear.

182


Transmission

USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVEAll-wheel drive uses all four wheels topower the vehicle. This increases traction,enabling you to drive over terrain and roadconditions that a conventional two-wheeldrive vehicle cannot. The AWD systemturns on when needed and does not requireinput from you.Note: The AWD feature gives your vehiclesome limited off-road capabilities in whichdriving surfaces are relatively level,obstruction-free and otherwise similar tonormal on-road driving conditions.Operating your vehicle under other thanthose conditions could subject the vehicleto excessive stress which might result indamage which is not covered under yourwarranty.Note: A warning message will be displayedin the information display when an AWDsystem fault is present See InformationMessages (page 115). An AWD system faultwill cause the AWD system to default tofront-wheel drive only mode. When thiswarning message is displayed, have yourvehicle serviced at an authorized dealerNote: A warning message will be displayedin the information display if the AWD systemhas overheated See InformationMessages (page 115). This condition mayoccur if the vehicle was operated in extremeconditions with excessive wheel slip, suchas deep sand. To resume normal AWDfunction as soon as possible, stop thevehicle in a safe location and stop theengine for at least 10 minutes. After theengine has been restarted and the AWDsystem has adequately cooled, the warningmessage will turn off and normal AWDfunction will return.

Do not use a spare tire of a different sizeother than the tire provided. If themini-spare tire is installed, the AWDsystem may disable automatically andenter front-wheel drive only mode toprotect driveline components. Thiscondition will be indicated by a warning inthe information display See InformationMessages (page 115). If there is a warningmessage in the information display fromusing the spare tire, this indicator shouldturn off after reinstalling the repaired orreplaced normal road tire and cycling theignition off and on. It is recommended toreinstall the repaired or replaced road tireas soon as possible. Major dissimilar tiresizes between the front and rear axlescould cause the AWD system to stopfunctioning and default to front-wheeldrive or damage the AWD system.

Driving in Special Conditions withAll-Wheel Drive (AWD)AWD vehicles are equipped for driving onsand, snow, mud and rough roads and haveoperating characteristics that aresomewhat different from conventionalvehicles, both on and off the highway.Under severe operating conditions, the A/Cmay cycle on and off to protectoverheating of the engine.

Basic operating principles in specialconditions• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which

can affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving onpavement made slippery by loose sand,water, gravel, snow or ice.

183


All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of thePavement• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the

pavement, slow down, but avoid severebrake application, ease the vehicleback onto the pavement only afterreducing your speed. Do not turn thesteering wheel too sharply whilereturning to the road surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron orshoulder of the road and slow downgradually before returning to thepavement. You may lose control if youdo not slow down or if you turn thesteering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike smallobjects, such as highway reflectors,with minor damage to your vehiclerather than attempt a sudden return tothe pavement which could cause thevehicle to slide sideways out of controlor rollover. Remember, your safety andthe safety of others should be yourprimary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

WARNING: Always set the parkingbrake fully and make sure you shift thegearshift lever to first gear. Switch theignition off and remove the key wheneveryou leave your vehicle.

WARNING: If the parking brake isfully released, but the brake warninglamp remains illuminated, the brakesmay not be working properly. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheelsat over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires mayfail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more thana few minutes or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur or theengine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow itmay be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts, in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.If your vehicle is equipped withAdvanceTrac® with Roll StabilityControl™, it may be beneficial todisengage the AdvanceTrac® with RollStability Control™ system whileattempting to rock the vehicle.

Emergency Maneuvers• In an unavoidable emergency situation

where a sudden sharp turn must bemade, remember to avoid"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn thesteering wheel only as rapidly and asfar as required to avoid theemergency). Excessive steering willresult in less vehicle control, not more.Additionally, smooth variations of theaccelerator and/or brake pedalpressure should be utilized if changesin vehicle speed are called for. Avoidabrupt steering, acceleration or brakingwhich could result in an increased riskof loss of vehicle control, vehiclerollover and/or personal injury. Use allavailable road surface to return thevehicle to a safe direction of travel.

• In the event of an emergency stop,avoid skidding the tires and do notattempt any sharp steering wheelmovements.

• If the vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e., from concreteto gravel) there will be a change in theway the vehicle responds to amaneuver (steering, acceleration orbraking). Again, avoid these abruptinputs.

184



SandWhen driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shiftto a lower gear and drive steadily throughthe terrain. Apply the accelerator slowlyand avoid spinning the wheels.Driving your AWD in deep sand could causethe AWD system to overheat. After thesystem has cooled down, normal AWDfunction will return.Under severe operating conditions, the A/Cmay cycle on and off to protectoverheating of the engine.Avoid excessive speed because vehiclemomentum can work against you andcause the vehicle to become stuck to thepoint that assistance may be required fromanother vehicle. Remember, you may beable to back out the way you came if youproceed with caution.

Mud and WaterIf you must drive through high water, driveslowly. Traction or brake capability maybe limited.When driving through water, determine thedepth; avoid water higher than the bottomof the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottomof the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) andproceed slowly. If the ignition system getswet, the vehicle may stall.

E142667

Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by moving your vehicle slowlywhile applying light pressure on the brakepedal.Be cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even AWD vehicles can lose tractionin slick mud. As when you are driving oversand, apply the accelerator slowly andavoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicledoes slide, steer in the direction of the slideuntil you regain control of the vehicle.After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts causes an imbalance thatcould damage drive components.Note: Driving through deep water maydamage the transmission.If the front or rear axle is submerged inwater, have the power transfer unit (PTU)or rear axle serviced by an authorizeddealer.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational programdesigned to increase public awareness ofland-use regulations and responsibilitiesin our nation's wilderness areas. Ford MotorCompany joins the U.S. Forest Service andthe Bureau of Land Management inencouraging you to help preserve ournational forest and other public and privatelands by “treading lightly.”

185



Driving on Hilly or Sloping TerrainNote: Avoid driving crosswise or turning onsteep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losingtraction, slipping sideways and possiblyrolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,determine beforehand the route you willuse. Do not drive over the crest of a hillwithout seeing what conditions are on theother side. Do not drive in reverse over a hillwithout the aid of an observer.Although natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or downa hill or steep incline, you should alwaystry to drive straight up or straight down.When climbing a steep slope or hill, startin a lower gear rather than downshifting toa lower gear from a higher gear once theascent has started. This reduces strain onthe engine and the possibility of stalling.If you do stall out, do not try to turnaroundbecause you might roll over. It is better toback down to a safe location.Apply just enough power to the wheels toclimb the hill. Too much power will causethe tires to slip, spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of vehicle control.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating.Do not descend in neutral; instead,disengage overdrive or manually shift to alower gear. When descending a steep hill,avoid sudden hard braking as you couldlose control. The front wheels have to beturning in order to steer the vehicle.Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, thereforeapply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”the brakes.

Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNING: If you are driving inslippery conditions that require tirechains or cables, then it is critical thatyou drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,allow for longer stopping distances andavoid aggressive steering to reduce thechances of a loss of vehicle controlwhich can lead to serious injury or death.If the rear end of your vehicle slides whilecornering, steer in the direction of theslide until you regain control of yourvehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can causedriveline damage.AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WDvehicles in snow and ice but can skid likeany other vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheelin the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow andice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.

186



Avoid sudden braking as well. Although anAWD vehicle may accelerate better thana two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,it will not stop any faster, because as inother vehicles, braking occurs at all fourwheels. Do not become overconfident asto road conditions.Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles forstopping. Drive slower than usual andconsider using one of the lower gears. Inemergency stopping situations, apply thebrake steadily. Since your vehicle isequipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not“pump” the brakes. See Hints on DrivingWith Anti-Lock Brakes (page 188).

Maintenance and ModificationsThe suspension and steering systems onyour vehicle have been designed andtested to provide predictable performancewhether loaded or empty and durable loadcarrying capability. For this reason, FordMotor Company strongly recommends thatyou do not make modifications such asadding or removing parts (such as loweringkits or stabilizer bars) or by usingreplacement parts not equivalent to theoriginal factory equipment.Any modifications to a vehicle that raisethe center of gravity can make it more likelythe vehicle will rollover as a result of a lossof control. Ford Motor Companyrecommends that caution be used withany vehicle equipped with a high load ordevice (such as ladder or luggage racks).Failure to maintain your vehicle properlymay void the warranty, increase your repaircost, reduce vehicle performance andoperational capabilities and adverselyaffect driver and passenger safety.Frequent inspection of vehicle chassiscomponents is recommended if the vehicleis subjected to off-highway usage.

187



GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: Occasional brake noise is normal. Ifa metal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, thebrake linings may be worn-out and anauthorized dealer should check them. If thevehicle has continuous vibration or shudderin the steering wheel while braking, anauthorized dealer should check your vehicle.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal drivingconditions. Some dust is inevitable as thebrakes wear and does not contribute tobrake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels(page 304).Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal afew times when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over AcceleratorIn the event the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, apply steadyand firm pressure to the brake pedal toslow the vehicle and reduce engine power.If you experience this condition, apply thebrakes and bring your vehicle to a safestop. Switch the engine off, move thetransmission to park (P) and apply theparking brake. Inspect the acceleratorpedal and the area around it for any itemsor debris that may be obstructing itsmovement. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealer.

Emergency Brake AssistEmergency brake assist detects when youbrake heavily by measuring the rate atwhich you press the brake pedal. Itprovides maximum braking efficiency aslong as you press the pedal. Emergencybrake assist can reduce stopping distancesin critical situations.

Note: Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, your brake lampscould flash during heavy braking. Followingthis, your hazard lights may also flash whenyour vehicle comes to a stop.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol during emergency stops by keepingthe brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarilyilluminates when you switch theignition on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on orflashes, the anti-lock braking system maybe disabled. Have the system checked byan authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brakesystem is disabled, normal braking is stilleffective.

See Warning Lamps and Indicators(page 101).Note: Indicators vary depending on region.

E270480

This lamp also illuminatesmomentarily when you switchthe ignition on to confirm thelamp is functional. If it does notilluminate when you switch theignition on, or begins to flash at

any time, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer. If the brake warninglamp illuminates with the parking brakereleased, have the system checkedimmediately.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESThe anti-lock braking system does noteliminate the risks when:• You drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you.• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.

188


Brakes

• You take corners too fast.• The road surface is poor.Note: If the system activates, the brakepedal may pulse and may travel further.Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. Youmay also hear a noise from the system. Thisis normal.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

WARNING: Always fully apply theparking brake and make sure you shiftinto park (P). Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: If you drive extendeddistances with the parking brake applied,you could cause damage to the brakesystem.

WARNING: The electric parkingbrake does not operate if the vehiclebattery is running out of charge.

Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.You operate it with a switch instead of alever. The switch is on the center consoleor to the left-hand side of the steeringwheel, on the lower part of the instrumentpanel.Note: The electric parking brake makesnoises during operation. This is normal.

Applying the Electric ParkingBrake

E267156 Pull the switch upward.

E270480

The red warning lamp flashesduring operation and illuminateswhen the parking brake is

applied.

Note: It remains illuminated for a shortperiod of time after you switch the ignitionoff.If it continues to flash or does notilluminate, the system has malfunctioned.Have your vehicle checked as soon aspossible.Note: You can apply the electric parkingbrake when the ignition is off.Note: The electric parking brake couldautomatically apply when you shift into park(P). See Roadside Emergencies (page255).

Applying the Electric Parking Brake inan EmergencyNote: Do not apply the electric parkingbrake when your vehicle is moving, exceptin an emergency. If you repeatedly use theelectric parking brake to slow or stop yourvehicle, you could cause damage to thebrake system.You can use the electric parking brake toslow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.

E267156 Pull the switch upward and holdit.

E270480

The red warning lampilluminates, a tone sounds andthe stoplamps turn on.

The electric parking brake continues toslow your vehicle down unless you releasethe switch.

Manually Releasing the ElectricParking BrakeSwitch the ignition on.

189


Brakes

Press and hold the brake pedal.

E267156 Push the switch downward.

E270480

The red warning lamp turns off.

If it remains illuminated or flashes, thesystem has malfunctioned. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing aTrailerPress and hold the brake pedal.

E267156 Pull the switch upward and holdit.

Shift into gear.Press the accelerator pedal until enginehas developed sufficient torque to preventyour vehicle from rolling down the hill.

E267156 Release the switch and pullaway in a normal manner.

Automatically Releasing theElectric Parking BrakeClose the driver door.Shift into gear.Press the accelerator pedal and pull awayin a normal manner.

E270480

The red warning lamp turns off.

If it remains illuminated or flashes, theelectric parking brake has not released.Manually release the parking brake.

Releasing the Electric ParkingBrake if the Vehicle Battery isRunning Out of ChargeConnect a booster battery to the vehiclebattery to release the electric parking brakeif the vehicle battery is running out ofcharge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle(page 257).

HILL START ASSIST

WARNING: The system does notreplace the parking brake. When youleave your vehicle, always apply theparking brake.

WARNING: You must remain inyour vehicle when the system turns on.At all times, you are responsible forcontrolling your vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening, if required.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The system will turnoff if a malfunction is apparent or if yourev the engine excessively. Failure to takecare may result in the loss of control ofyour vehicle, serious personal injury ordeath.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, your vehicleremains stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows time to move your footfrom the brake to the accelerator pedal.The system releases the brakesautomatically once the engine has

190


Brakes

developed sufficient torque to prevent yourvehicle from rolling down the slope. Thisis an advantage when pulling away on aslope, for example from a car park ramp,traffic lights or when reversing uphill intoa parking space.The system activates on any slope thatcauses your vehicle to roll.Note: There is no warning light to indicatethe system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal pressed and shift intofirst gear when facing uphill or reverse(R) when facing downhill.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicleis on a slope, the system activatesautomatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle remains onthe slope without rolling away forabout two to three seconds. This holdtime automatically extends if you arein the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thesystem releases the brakesautomatically.

Note: When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal and press the pedal again whenthe system is active, you will experiencesignificantly reduced brake pedal travel. Thisis normal.

Switching the System On and OffVehicles with Manual TransmissionYou can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. The systemremembers the last setting when you startyour vehicle.

Vehicles with Automatic TransmissionYou cannot turn the system on or off.When you switch the ignition on, thesystem automatically turns on.

191


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

WARNING: The stability andtraction control light illuminates steadilyif the system detects a failure. Make sureyou did not manually disable the tractioncontrol system using the informationdisplay controls or the switch. If thestability control and traction control lightis still illuminating steadily, have thesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Operating your vehicle withthe traction control disabled could leadto an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injuryand death.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,switching traction control off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.Note: When you switch traction control off,stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System OffWhen you switch the system off or on, amessage appears in the informationdisplay showing system status.You can switch the system off with thetraction control switch.

Using a SwitchUse the traction control switch on theinstrument panel to switch the system offor on.

System Indicator Lights andMessages

E138639

The stability and traction controllight:

• Temporarily illuminates on enginestart-up.

• Flashes when a driving conditionactivates either of the systems.

• Illuminates if a problem occurs in eitherof the systems.

E130458

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily illuminateson engine start-up and stays on

when you switch the traction controlsystem off.

192


Traction Control


WARNING: Vehicle modificationsinvolving braking system, aftermarketroof racks, suspension, steering system,tire construction and wheel and tire sizemay change the handling characteristicsof your vehicle and may adversely affectthe performance of the electronicstability control system. In addition,installing any stereo loudspeakers mayinterfere with and adversely affect theelectronic stability control system. Installany aftermarket stereo loudspeaker asfar as possible from the front centerconsole, the tunnel, and the front seatsin order to minimize the risk of interferingwith the electronic stability controlsensors. Reducing the effectiveness ofthe electronic stability control systemcould lead to an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death.

WARNING: Remember that evenadvanced technology cannot defy thelaws of physics. It's always possible tolose control of a vehicle due toinappropriate driver input for theconditions. Aggressive driving on anyroad condition can cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle increasing the riskof personal injury or property damage.Activation of the electronic stabilitycontrol system is an indication that atleast some of the tires have exceededtheir ability to grip the road; this couldreduce the operator's ability to controlthe vehicle potentially resulting in a lossof vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death. If yourelectronic stability control systemactivates, SLOW DOWN.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.

If a fault occurs in either the stabilitycontrol or the traction control system, youmay experience the following conditions:• The stability and traction control light

illuminates steadily.• The stability control and traction

control systems do not enhance yourvehicle's ability to maintain traction ofthe wheels.

If a driving condition activates either thestability control or the traction controlsystem, you may experience the followingconditions:• The stability and traction control light

flashes.• Your vehicle slows down.• Reduced engine power.• A vibration in the brake pedal.• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.• If the driving condition is severe and

your foot is not on the brake, the brakepedal may move as the system applieshigher brake force.

The stability control system has severalfeatures built into it to help you maintaincontrol of your vehicle:

Electronic Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto prevent skids or lateral slides byapplying brakes to one or more of thewheels individually and, if necessary,reducing engine power.

Roll Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto prevent rollovers by detecting yourvehicle’s roll motion and the rate at whichit changes by applying the brakes to oneor more wheels individually.

193


Stability Control

Traction ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto maintain traction of the wheels bydetecting and controlling wheel spin. SeeUsing Traction Control (page 192).

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Vehicle without stability controlskidding off its intended route.

A

Vehicle with stability controlmaintaining control on a slipperysurface.

B

USING STABILITY CONTROLElectronic Stability ControlThe system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on. You canswitch off the traction control portion ofthe system independently. See UsingTraction Control (page 192).Note: The ESC OFF switch and Sport Modeare only available on the ST model.

194


Stability Control

ESC Features

TractionControlSystem

ElectronicStabilityControl

StabilityControl Off

Light

ModeButton Func-tions

EnabledEnabledOn during bulbcheck

-Default at start-up

DisabledEnabledOnTraction controloff

Button pressedmomentarily

EnabledEnabledOnSport mode (ifequipped)

Button pressedtwice rapidly

EnabledEnabledOffESC fullyenabled

Button pressedagain after

deactivation

Note: Do not use the Sport stability controlsetting on public roadways.Some models may also have a sport modewhich allows the driver to reduce normalelectronic stability control systemintervention and provide a more spiriteddriving experience. To enter sport mode,toggle the stability control button twicerapidly. The message appears in theinformation display that the system is nowin sport mode.

195


Stability Control


WARNING: To help avoid personalinjury, always use caution when inreverse (R) and when using the sensingsystem.

WARNING: The system may notdetect objects with surfaces that absorbreflection. Always drive with due careand attention. Failure to take care mayresult in a crash.

WARNING: Traffic control systems,inclement weather, air brakes, externalmotors and fans may affect the correctoperation of the sensing system.Thismay cause reduced performance or falsealerts.

WARNING: The system may notdetect small or moving objects,particularly those close to the ground.

Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, thesensing system cannot be switched offwhen a MyKey™ is present. See Principleof Operation (page 59).Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper orfascia free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt. If the sensors arecovered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors withsharp objects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damage tothe bumper or fascia, leaving it misalignedor bent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alerts.

Note: Certain add-on devices installedaround the bumper or fascia may createfalse alerts. For example, large trailerhitches, bike or surfboard racks, license platebrackets, bumper covers or any other devicethat may block the normal detection zoneof the system. Remove the add-on deviceto prevent false alerts.Note: When you connect a trailer to yourvehicle, the rear parking aid may detect thetrailer and therefore provide an alert. Disablethe rear parking aid when you connect atrailer to prevent the alert.The sensing system warns the driver ofobstacles within a certain range of yourvehicle. The system turns on automaticallywhenever you switch the ignition on.You can switch the system off through theinformation display menu or from thepop-up message that appears once youshift the transmission into reverse (R). SeeGeneral Information (page 105). If yourvehicle has a parking aid button, you canswitch the system off by pressing thebutton.If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page105).

REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)



196


Parking Aids (If Equipped)


WARNING: The parking aid systemcan only assist you to detect objectswhen your vehicle is moving at parkingspeeds. To help avoid personal injury youmust take care when using the parkingaid system.

Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover up the sensors.Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damageleaving the sensors misaligned, this maycause inaccurate measurements or falsealerts.Note: Some accessories, for example largetrailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks cancause reduced performance or false alerts.The sensors are on the rear bumper.The sensors are active when thetransmission is in reverse (R) and thevehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).When the parking aid system sounds atone, the audio system may reduce the setvolume.A warning tone sounds when your vehicleapproaches an object. As your vehiclemoves closer to an object, the rate of thetone increases. The warning tonecontinuously sounds when an object is 12 in(30 cm) or less from the center of the rearbumper.Note: There is a decreased coverage areaat the outer corners.

E130178

The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in(180 cm) from the rear bumper.If the system detects a fault, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay.The system detects large objects whenyou shift into reverse (R) and any of thefollowing occur:• Your vehicle is moving backward at low

speed.• Your vehicle is stationary but an object

is approaching the rear of your vehicleat low speed.

• Your vehicle is moving backward at lowspeed and an object is moving towardyour vehicle, for example anothervehicle at low speed.

If your vehicle remains stationary for twoseconds the audible warning turns off. Ifyour vehicle moves backward the tonesounds again.Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)or less from the rear bumper, the audiblewarning does not turn off.

197



Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)

E190459

The system provides object distanceindication through the information display.• As the distance to the object

decreases, the indicator blocksilluminate and move toward the vehicleicon.

• If the system does not detect an object,the distance indicator blocks are gray.

When you shift into reverse (R), the systemprovides audible warnings and visualindication when your vehicle is moving andthe detected object is moving toward yourvehicle. When you stop your vehicle, theaudible warnings stop after two seconds.Visual indication remains on when thetransmission is in reverse (R).

FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)





Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover up the sensors.Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damageleaving the sensors misaligned, this maycause inaccurate measurements or falsealerts.Note: Some accessories, for example largetrailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks cancause reduced performance or false alerts.The sensors are on the front bumper.The sensors are active when thetransmission is in any position other thanpark (P). When the parking aid systemsounds a tone, the audio system mayreduce the set volume.

198



A warning tone sounds when your vehicleapproaches an object. As your vehiclemoves closer to an object, the rate of thetone increases. The warning tonecontinuously sounds when an object is 12 in(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.Note: There is a decreased coverage areaat the outer corners.The system turns off when the vehiclespeed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h).

E187330

The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in(70 cm) from the center of the bumper.If the transmission is in reverse (R), thesystem detects objects when your vehicleis moving at low speed or an object ismoving toward your vehicle, for exampleanother vehicle at low speed. When youstop your vehicle, the audible warning turnsoff after two seconds.If the transmission is in any forward gear,the system provides audible warningswhen your vehicle is moving and an objectis within the detection area. When you stopyour vehicle, the audible warning turns offafter two seconds and the visual warningturns off after four seconds.If the system detects a fault, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay.


E190459



• If there is no object detected, thedistance indicator blocks are gray.

When you shift into any forward gear, thesystem provides audible warnings andvisual indication when your vehicle ismoving at a speed of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or below and the system detectsan object within the detection zone. Whenyou stop your vehicle, the audible warningsstop after two seconds and visualindication stops after four seconds.Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)or less from your vehicle, visual indicationremains on.

199



When you shift into neutral (N), the systemonly provides visual indication if yourvehicle is moving at a speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below,for example, your vehicle is moving on aslope, and the system detects an objectmoving toward your vehicle. When youstop your vehicle, visual indication stopsafter four seconds.

SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)





Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover up the sensors.Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damageleaving the sensors misaligned, this maycause inaccurate measurements or falsealerts.

Note: If you switch traction control off, theside sensing system also turns off.Note: Some accessories, for example largetrailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks cancause reduced performance or false alerts.Note: The system does not detect an objectthat is moving toward the side of yourvehicle, for example another vehicle movingat low speed, if it does not pass a front orrear sensor.The system uses the front and rearoutermost parking aid sensors to detectobjects that are near to the sides of yourvehicle. The system displays them on avirtual map in the information display asyour vehicle moves past them.The sensors are on the front and rearbumpers.The system may not function if:• You switch the ignition on, off and back

on within a few seconds.• Your vehicle remains stationary for over

two minutes.• The anti-lock brake system activates.• The traction control system activates.To reinitialize the system, you may have todrive your vehicle approximately 10 ft(3 m).

E190458

200



The sensor coverage area is up to 24 in(60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.When the system detects an object withinthe coverage area and the driving path ofyour vehicle, an audible warning sounds.As the object moves closer to your vehicle,the rate of the tone increases.


E190459



• If there is no object detected, thedistance indicator blocks are gray.

When you shift into reverse (R), the systemprovides audible warnings and visualindication when detected objects arewithin 24 in (60 cm) and are inside thedriving path of your vehicle. When you stopyour vehicle, the audible warnings turn offafter two seconds.

When you shift into any forward gear, thesystem provides audible warnings andvisual indication when your vehicle ismoving at a speed of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or below and the system detectsan object within the detection zone. Whenyou stop your vehicle, the audible warningsturn off after two seconds and visualindication turns off after four seconds.When you shift into neutral (N), the systemonly provides visual indication if yourvehicle is moving at a speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below.For example, your vehicle is moving on aslope, and the system detects an objectmoving toward your vehicle. When youstop your vehicle, visual indication turnsoff after four seconds.If the system is not available, the sidedistance indicator blocks do not display.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: You must remain inyour vehicle when the system turns on.At all times, you are responsible forcontrolling your vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening, if required.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The sensors may notdetect objects in heavy rain or otherconditions that cause interference.

WARNING: Active park assist doesnot apply the brakes under anycircumstances.

201



WARNING: You are responsible forcontrolling your vehicle at all times. Thesystem is designed to be an aid and doesnot relieve you of your responsibility todrive with due care and attention. Failureto follow this instruction could result inthe loss of control of your vehicle,personal injury or death.

Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover up the sensors.Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.The sensors may falsely detect objects dueto ultrasonic interference caused bymotorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes orhorns, for example.Note: If you change any tires, the systemmust recalibrate and may not correctlyoperate for a short time.Active park assist is a multi-step processand may require you to shift thetransmission multiple times. Follow theonscreen instructions until the parkingmaneuver is complete.If you are uncomfortable with the proximityto any vehicle or object, you may chooseto override the system by grabbing thesteering wheel, or by taking full control ofyour vehicle after pressing the active parkassist button.Keep your hands, hair, clothing and anyloose items clear of the steering wheelwhen using active park assist.The sensors are on the front and rearbumpers.

The system may not correctly operate inany of the following conditions:• You use a spare tire or a tire that is

significantly worn more than the othertires.

• One or more tires are incorrectlyinflated.

• You try to park on a tight curve.• Something passes between the front

bumper and the parking space. Forexample, a pedestrian or cyclist.

• The edge of the neighboring parkedvehicle is high off the ground. Forexample, a bus, tow truck or flatbedtruck.

• The weather conditions are poor. Forexample, during heavy rain, snow, fog,high humidity and high temperatures.

Do not use the system if:• You have attached an add-on

accessory close to the sensors on thefront or rear of your vehicle. Forexample, a bike rack or trailer.

• You have attached an overhangingobject to the roof. For example, asurfboard.

• The front bumper, rear bumper or theside sensors are damaged.

• The correct tire size is not in use on yourvehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.

Using Active Park AssistSelecting an Active Park Assist Mode

E146186

Press the button once toactivate parallel parking. Pressthe button a second time to

activate perpendicular parking. If you pressthe button again the system switches off.

202



If your vehicle is parked and after youswitch the ignition on, you can use theinformation display to toggle through themodes. Press the button to switch thesystem on and open the system menu inthe information display.Note: If your vehicle is parked, the defaultmode is parallel park out assist. However,if you did not use active park assist toparallel park your vehicle, use theinformation display to select park out assist.Note: You can repeatedly press the activepark assist button to toggle through themodes only after moving your vehicleapproximately 33 ft (10 m).To toggle through the modes, use thebuttons on the information display toselect the following:• Parallel parking.• Perpendicular parking.• Parallel park out assist.• Switch the system off.Note: There is no time limit for togglingthrough the modes.

Parallel ParkingThe system detects available parallelparking spaces and steers your vehicle intothe space. You control the accelerator,gearshift and brakes. The system visuallyand audibly guides you into a parallelparking space.

E146186

Press the button once to searchfor a parking space.

Note: You can also switch the system onafter you have already driven partially orcompletely past a parking space. Press theactive park assist button and the systeminforms you if you have recently passed asuitable parking space.

When the vehicle speed is less than22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans bothsides of your vehicle for an availableparking space. A message and a graphicappear in the information display toindicate the system is searching for aparking space. Use the direction indicatorlever to search for a parking space on thedriver or passenger side of your vehicle.Note: The system scans both sides of yourvehicle and offers parking spaces one sideat a time if you do not use the directionindicator.Note: The system defaults to the passengerside if you do not use the direction indicator.

E130107

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)and parallel to the other parked vehicleswhen searching for a parking space.Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) awayfrom other parked vehicles, the system maynot be able to detect an available parkingspace.When the system detects a suitable space,a message displays and a tone sounds.Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreeninstructions. If your vehicle is moving veryslowly, you may have to move forward ashort distance before the system is readyto park.Note: You must observe that the space thesystem selects remains clear of obstructionsat all times during the maneuver.Note: The system always offers the lastparking space it detects. For example, if yourvehicle detects multiple spaces when youare driving, it offers the last one.

203



Note: If the vehicle speed is greater thanapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h), thesystem shows a message to instruct you toreduce the vehicle speed.

Automatically Steering into a ParallelParking SpaceWhen you shift into reverse (R), with yourhands off the steering wheel and nothingobstructing its movement, your vehiclesteers itself into the space. The systemdisplays instructions to move your vehiclebackward and forward in the space.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

E130108

When you believe your vehicle is correctlyparked, or a solid tone sounds and aninformation message appears, bring yourvehicle to a complete stop.When the Active Park Assist maneuver iscomplete, a tone sounds and aninformation message appears.Note: You are responsible for checking howyour vehicle is parked and making anynecessary corrections before leaving yourvehicle.

Deactivating Active Park AssistYou can manually deactivate the systemby:• Pressing the Active Park Assist button

during an active maneuver.• Grabbing the steering wheel during an

active maneuver.• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30

seconds when searching for a parkingspace.

• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) duringan active maneuver.

• Switching the traction control systemoff.

Certain vehicle conditions may alsodeactivate the system, for example:• The traction control system activates

or fails.• The anti-lock brake system activates

or fails.If the system malfunctions, a messageappears and a tone sounds. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

Perpendicular ParkingThe system detects availableperpendicular parking spaces and steersyour vehicle into the space. You control theaccelerator, gearshift and brakes. Thesystem visually and audibly guides you intoa perpendicular parking space.

E146186

Press the button twice to searchfor a parking space.

When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph(30 km/h), the system scans both sides ofyour vehicle for an available parking space.A message and a graphic appear in theinformation display to indicate the systemis searching for a parking space. Use thedirection indicator lever to search for aparking space on the driver or passengerside of your vehicle.

204



Note: The system scans both sides of yourvehicle and offers parking spaces one sideat a time if you do not use the directionindicator.Note: The system defaults to the passengerside if you do not use the direction indicator.

E186193

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)and perpendicular to the other parkedvehicles when searching for a parkingspace.Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) awayfrom other parked vehicles, the system maynot be able to detect an available parkingspace.When the system detects a suitable space,a message displays and a tone sounds.Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreeninstructions. If your vehicle is moving veryslowly, you may have to move forward ashort distance before the system is readyto park.Note: You must observe that the space thesystem selects remains clear of obstructionsat all times during the maneuver.Note: The system always offers the lastdetected parking space. For example, if yourvehicle detects multiple spaces when youare driving, it offers the last one.Note: If the vehicle speed is greater thanapproximately 19 mph (30 km/h), thesystem shows a message to instruct you toreduce the vehicle speed.

Automatically Steering into aPerpendicular Parking SpaceWhen you shift into reverse (R), with yourhands off the steering wheel and nothingobstructing its movement, your vehiclesteers itself into the space. The systemdisplays instructions to move your vehiclebackward and forward in the space.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

E186191

When you believe your vehicle is correctlyparked, or a solid tone sounds and aninformation message appears, bring yourvehicle to a complete stop.When the active park assist maneuver iscomplete, a tone sounds and a messageappears.Note: You are responsible for checking howyour vehicle is parked and making anynecessary corrections before leaving yourvehicle.

205



Deactivating Active Park AssistYou can manually deactivate the systemby:• Pressing the Active Park Assist button

during an active maneuver.• Grabbing the steering wheel during an

active maneuver.• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30

seconds when searching for a parkingspace.

• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) duringan active maneuver.

• Switching the traction control systemoff.

Certain vehicle conditions may alsodeactivate the system, for example:• The traction control system activates

or fails.• The anti-lock brake system activates

or fails.If the system malfunctions, a messageappears and a tone sounds. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

Parallel Park Out AssistThe system steers your vehicle out of aparallel parking space. You control theaccelerator, gearshift and brakes. Thesystem visually and audibly guides you outof a parallel parking space.Note: This system is not intended to assistwhen exiting a perpendicular parking space.

E146186

Press the button once when yourvehicle is stationary in a parallelparking space.

Note: If you did not use active park assistto parallel park your vehicle, pressing thebutton once selects parallel park. You mustuse the information display to select parkout assist.

The system displays a message instructingyou to switch a direction indicator on. Usethe direction indicator to select which sideof your vehicle you want to exit the parkingspace. The system displays instructions tomove your vehicle backward and forwardin the space.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

E188012

After the system directs your vehicle to aposition where you can exit the parkingspace in a forward movement, a messageappears instructing you to take full controlof your vehicle. Generally, hand-over iswhen your vehicle is still inside the parkingspace.Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not beavailable when the clearance to the frontor the rear of your vehicle is too small.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: You are responsible for controllingyour vehicle and making sure the path isclear prior to pulling into traffic.

206



Troubleshooting

Possible CauseSymptom

You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search fora parking space.

The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle mustbe moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.

The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, iceor dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how thesystem functions.

The system does not offer aparking space.

There is not enough room in the parking space for yourvehicle to safely park.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver onthe opposite side of the parking space.

The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than2 ft (0.5 m) away.

The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)for perpendicular parking.

You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. Afteryou reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicleon a straight road for a short period of time.

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of thecurrent transmission position. For example, rollingforward when in reverse (R).

The system does not correctlyposition your vehicle in aparking space.

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents thesystem from correctly aligning your vehicle.

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not becorrectly parked.

Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.

The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or ofdifferent sizes.

A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.

207



Possible CauseSymptom

A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.

The parking space length or position of parked objectschanges after your vehicle passes the space.

The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,or after leaving a car wash.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNING: The rear view camerasystem is a reverse aid supplementdevice that still requires the driver to useit in conjunction with the interior andexterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNING: Objects that are closeto either corner of the bumper or underthe bumper, might not be seen on thescreen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

WARNING: Reverse your vehicleslowly. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Use caution when therear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargodoor is ajar, the camera will be out ofposition and the video image may beincorrect. All guidelines disappear whenthe rear cargo door is ajar. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury.

WARNING: Use caution whenturning camera features on or off whenthe transmission is not in park (P). Makesure your vehicle is not moving.

The rear view camera system provides avideo image of the area behind yourvehicle.During operation, lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle’s pathand proximity to objects behind yourvehicle.

E142435

The camera is on the rear cargo door.

Using the Rear View CameraSystemThe rear view camera system displayswhat is behind your vehicle when you placethe transmission in reverse (R).

208



The system uses three types of guidelinesto help you see what is behind your vehicle:• Active guidelines: Show the intended

path of your vehicle when reversing.• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversingin a straight line. This can be helpfulwhen backing into a parking space oraligning your vehicle with anotherobject behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center ofyour vehicle with an object (forexample, a trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)and the rear cargo door is open, no rear viewcamera features will display.Note: When towing, the camera only seeswhat you are towing. This might not provideadequate coverage as it usually provides innormal operation and some objects mightnot be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelinesmay disappear when you connect the trailertow connector.The camera may not operate correctlyunder the following conditions:• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both

reverse lamps are not operating.• Mud, water or debris obstructs the

camera's view. Clean the lens with asoft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner.

• The rear of your vehicle is hit ordamaged, causing the camera tobecome misaligned.

Camera System SettingsYou can access the rear view camerasystem settings through the display screen.See General Information (page 105).

Camera GuidelinesNote: Active guidelines are only availablewhen the transmission is in reverse (R).

A B C D

F

E

E142436

Active guidelinesACenterlineBFixed guideline: Green zoneCFixed guideline: Yellow zoneDFixed guideline: Red zoneERear bumperF

Active guidelines are only shown with fixedguidelines. To use active guidelines, turnthe steering wheel to point the guidelinestoward an intended path. If you changethe steering wheel position while reversing,your vehicle might deviate from the originalintended path.

209



The fixed and active guidelines fade in andout depending on the steering wheelposition. The active guidelines do notdisplay when the steering wheel positionis straight.Always use caution while reversing.Objects in the red zone are closest to yourvehicle and objects in the green zone arefarther away. Objects are getting closer toyour vehicle as they move from the greenzone to the yellow or red zones. Use theside view mirrors and rear view mirror toget better coverage on both sides and rearof the vehicle.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)

E190459

The system will provide an image of yourvehicle and the sensor zones. The zoneswill highlight green, yellow and red whenthe parking aid sensors detect an object inthe coverage area.

Manual Zoom

WARNING: When manual zoom ison, the full area behind your vehicle maynot show. Be aware of your surroundingswhen using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available whenthe transmission is in reverse (R).Note: When you enable manual zoom, onlythe centerline is shown.Selectable settings for this feature areZoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press thesymbol in the camera screen to change theview. The default setting is Zoom OFF.This allows you to get a closer view of anobject behind your vehicle. The zoomedimage keeps the bumper in the image toprovide a reference. The zoom is onlyactive while the transmission is in reverse(R).

Rear Camera DelaySelectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF. The default setting for the rearcamera delay is OFF.When shifting the transmission out ofreverse (R) and into any gear other thanpark (P), the camera image remains in thedisplay until:• Your vehicle speed sufficiently

increases.• You shift your vehicle into park (P)

(automatic transmission).• You apply the parking brake (manual

transmission).

210



180 DEGREE CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: The rear view camerasystem is a reverse aid supplementdevice that still requires the driver to useit in conjunction with the interior andexterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNING: Objects that are closeto either corner of the bumper or underthe bumper, might not be seen on thescreen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

WARNING: Use caution whenturning camera features on or off whenthe transmission is not in park (P). Makesure your vehicle is not moving.

E188845

The front view camera is located in thegrille.The front view camera provides a videoimage of the area in front of your vehicle.Note: The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to your vehicle's orientationor road condition.Note: The front view camera will switch offif your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph(10 km/h). You will have to switch thesystem back on by using the camera systembutton once below the speed threshold.

Note: Additional camera information canbe found in the rear view camera section.See Rear View Camera (page 208).

Using the Front 180 DegreeCamera System (If Equipped)

The parking camera system consists offront and rear cameras. The system:• Allows you to see what is directly in

front or behind your vehicle.• Provides cross traffic view in front of

your vehicle.• Provides visibility during parking

maneuvers.

E188847

The camera system button islocated on the audio unit andallows you to toggle through

different camera views.Note: The camera system may not operatecorrectly if mud, water or debris obstructsthe camera's view. You can clean the lenswith a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner or by using your front or rear washer.See Wipers and Washers (page 82).

Camera ViewsPress the camera button to togglebetween different views.• Normal Front View: Provides an

image of what is directly in front yourvehicle when your vehicle is in park (P),neutral (N) or drive (D).

• Expanded Front View: Provides anexpanded 180 degree image of whatis directly in front your vehicle whenyour vehicle is in park(P), neutral (N)or drive (D).

211



WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROLCruise control lets you maintain a setspeed without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. You can use cruisecontrol when your vehicle speed is greaterthan 20 mph (30 km/h).

SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROLON AND OFF

WARNING: Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads, in heavy trafficor when the road surface is slippery. Thiscould result in loss of vehicle control,serious injury or death.

The cruise controls are on the steeringwheel. See Cruise Control (page 80).

Switching Cruise Control On

E265296

Press the button.

Switching Cruise Control Off

E265297

Press the button when thesystem is in standby mode.

The system also turns off when you switchthe ignition off.Note: The set speed erases when youswitch the system off.

SETTING THE CRUISECONTROL SPEED

WARNING: When you are goingdownhill, your vehicle speed couldincrease above the set speed. Thesystem does not apply the brakes.

Drive to the speed you prefer.Press either button to set thecurrent speed.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Note: The indicator changes color in theinformation display.

Changing the Set SpeedPress and release the button toincrease the set speed in smallincrements.

Press and hold the button to accelerate.Release the button when you reach yourpreferred speed.

Press and release the button todecrease the set speed in smallincrements.

Press and hold the button to decelerate.Release the button when you reach yourpreferred speed.Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed does notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, your vehicle returns to the speed thatyou previously set.

CANCELING THE SET SPEED

E265298

Press the button, or tap thebrake pedal to cancel the setspeed.

Note: The system remembers the setspeed.Note: The system cancels if the vehiclespeed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) underthe set speed when driving uphill.

212


Cruise Control

RESUMING THE SET SPEEDPress the button.

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATORS

E71340

Illuminates when you switch thesystem on.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)


WARNING: Pay close attention tochanging road conditions such asentering or leaving a highway, on roadswith intersections or roundabouts, roadswithout visible lanes of travel, roads thatare winding, slippery, unpaved, or steepslopes.

WARNING: Do not use the systemin poor visibility, for example fog, heavyrain, spray or snow.

WARNING: Do not use the systemwhen towing a trailer that hasaftermarket electronic trailer brakecontrols. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not use tire sizesother than those recommended becausethis can affect the normal operation ofthe system. Failure to do so may resultin a loss of vehicle control, which couldresult in serious injury.

WARNING: The system may notdetect stationary or slow movingvehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING: The system does notdetect pedestrians or objects in the road.

WARNING: The system does notdetect oncoming vehicles in the samelane.

WARNING: The system is not acrash warning or avoidance system.

The system adjusts your vehicle speed tomaintain the set gap between you and thevehicle in front of you in the same lane.You can select four gap settings.The system uses a radar sensor thatprojects a beam directly in front of yourvehicle.

E262918

The cruise controls are on the steeringwheel. See Cruise Control (page 80).

213


Cruise Control

Switching Adaptive Cruise ControlOn

E294678For vehicles without SpeedLimiter, press and release thebutton.

E144529

For vehicles with Speed Limiter,press and release the button.

The indicator, current gap setting and setspeed appear in the information display.

E164805

Setting the Adaptive Cruise SpeedDrive to the speed you prefer.


Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.The indicator, current gap setting and setspeed appear in the information display.

E164805

A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is avehicle detected in front of you.

Note: When adaptive cruise control isactive, the speedometer may vary slightlyfrom the set speed displayed in theinformation display.

Setting the Adaptive Cruise SpeedWhen Your Vehicle is StationaryFollow a vehicle to a complete stop.

E265299

Press and release while keepingthe brake pedal fully pressed.

The set speed adjusts to 20 mph(30 km/h).The indicator, current gap setting and setspeed appear in the information display.

Following a Vehicle

WARNING: When following avehicle that is braking, your vehicle doesnot always decelerate quickly enough toavoid a crash without driver intervention.Apply the brakes when necessary. Failureto follow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The system only warnsof vehicles detected by the radar sensor.In some cases there may be no warningor a delayed warning. Apply the brakeswhen necessary. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

When a vehicle ahead of you enters thesame lane or a slower vehicle is ahead inthe same lane, the vehicle speed adjuststo maintain a preset gap distance. Avehicle graphic illuminates in theinstrument cluster.Note: The brakes may emit noise whenapplied by the system.

214


Cruise Control

Note: When you are following a vehicle andyou switch on a direction indicator, adaptivecruise control may provide a smalltemporary acceleration to help you pass.Your vehicle maintains a consistent gapfrom the vehicle ahead until:• The vehicle in front of you accelerates

to a speed above the set speed.• The vehicle in front of you moves out

of the lane you are in.• You set a new gap distance.The system applies the brakes to slow yourvehicle to maintain a safe gap distancefrom the vehicle in front. The system onlyapplies limited braking. You can overridethe system by applying the brakes.If the system determines that its maximumbraking level is not sufficient, an audiblewarning sounds, a message appears in theinformation display and an indicatorflashes when the system continues tobrake. Take immediate action.

Following a Vehicle to a CompleteStopIf your vehicle follows a vehicle to acomplete stop and remains stationary forless than three seconds, your vehicleaccelerates from a stationary position tofollow the vehicle ahead.

E265299

If your vehicle follows a vehicleto a complete stop and remainsstationary for more than three

seconds, press and release the button tofollow the vehicle ahead. Or press theaccelerator pedal.

Setting the Gap DistanceYou can decrease or increase the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle infront by pressing the gap control.

Press and release the button tocycle through the four gapsettings.

E164805

The selected gap appears in theinformation display as shown by the barsin the image.Note: The gap setting is time dependentand therefore the distance adjusts with yourvehicle speed.Note: It is your responsibility to select a gapappropriate to the driving conditions.

Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

DynamicBehavior

Distance GapGraphicDisplay,

Bars Indic-ated

BetweenVehicles

Sport.Closest.1

Normal.Close.2

Normal.Medium.3

Comfort.Far.4

Each time you switch the system on, itselects the last chosen gap setting.

215


Cruise Control

Overriding the Set Speed

WARNING: If you override thesystem by pressing the acceleratorpedal, it does not automatically applythe brakes to maintain a gap from anyvehicle ahead.

When you press the accelerator pedal, youoverride the set speed and gap distance.

E144529

Use the accelerator pedalnormally to intentionally exceedthe set speed limit.

When you override the system, the greenindicator light illuminates and the vehiclegraphic does not appear in the informationdisplay.The system resumes operation when yourelease the accelerator pedal. The vehiclespeed decreases to the set speed, or alower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Changing the Set Speed

E265299

Press and release to increase theset speed in small increments.

Press and release to decreasethe set speed in smallincrements.

Press and hold either button to change theset speed in large increments. Release thebutton when you reach the speed youprefer.The system may apply the brakes to slowthe vehicle to the new set speed. The setspeed displays continuously in theinformation display when the system isactive.

Canceling the Set Speed

E265298

Press and release the button ortap the brake pedal.

Note: The system remembers the setspeed.

Resuming the Set Speed

E265299


Your vehicle speed returns to thepreviously set speed and gap setting. Theset speed displays continuously in theinformation display when the system isactive.Note: Only use resume if you are aware ofthe set speed and intend to return to it.

Automatic CancellationAutomatic cancellation can also occurwhen:• The tires lose traction.• You apply the parking brake.

Park Brake ApplicationAutomatic parking brake application andcancellation occurs if:• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open

the driver door after you stop yourvehicle.

• You hold your vehicle at a stopcontinuously for more than threeminutes.

Hilly Condition UsageYou should select a lower gear when thesystem is active in situations such asprolonged downhill driving on steepgrades, for example in mountainous areas.The system needs additional enginebraking in these situations to reduce theload on the vehicle’s regular brake systemto prevent it from overheating.

216


Cruise Control

Note: An audible alarm sounds and thesystem shuts down if it applies brakes foran extended period of time. This allows thebrakes to cool. The system functionsnormally again after the brakes cool.

Switching Adaptive Cruise ControlOff

E294678For vehicles without SpeedLimiter, press and release thebutton when the system is in

standby mode or switch the ignition off.

E144529

For vehicles with Speed Limiter,press and release the buttonwhen the system is in standby

mode or switch the ignition off.Note: You erase the set speed when youswitch the system off.

Detection Issues

WARNING: On rare occasions,detection issues can occur due to theroad infrastructures, for example bridges,tunnels and safety barriers. In thesecases, the system may brake late orunexpectedly. At all times, you areresponsible for controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and intervening,if required.

WARNING: If the systemmalfunctions, have your vehicle checkedas soon as possible.

The radar sensor has a limited field of view.It may not detect vehicles at all or detecta vehicle later than expected in somesituations. The lead vehicle graphic doesnot illuminate if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front of you.

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

When driving on a different linethan the vehicle in front.

A

With vehicles that edge into yourlane. The system can only detectthese vehicles once they movefully into your lane.

B

There may be issues with thedetection of vehicles in frontwhen driving into and coming outof a bend or curve in the road.

C

In these cases, the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alert andtake action when necessary.If something hits the front end of yourvehicle or damage occurs, theradar-sensing zone may change. This couldcause missed or false vehicle detection.

217


Cruise Control

Optimal system performance requires aclear view of the road by thewindshield-mounted camera.Optimal performance may not occur if:• The camera is blocked.• There is poor visibility or lighting

conditions.• There are bad weather conditions.

System Not AvailableConditions that can cause the system todeactivate or prevent the system fromactivating when requested include:• A blocked sensor.• High brake temperature.• A failure in the system or a related

system.

Blocked Sensor

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly if the sensor is blocked.Keep the windshield free fromobstruction.

E243054

The camera is mounted behind the interiormirror.

E244279

The sensor is in the lower grille.Note: You cannot see the sensor. It isbehind a fascia panel.A message displays if something obstructsthe camera or the sensor. When somethingblocks the sensor, the system cannotdetect a vehicle ahead and does notfunction.Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free ofdirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle frontprotectors, aftermarket lights, additionalpaint or plastic coatings could also degradesensor performance.

218


Cruise Control

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radaror remove the object causing the obstruc-tion.

The surface of the radar is dirty orobstructed.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the radar to detect that it is freefrom obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but themessage remains in the display.

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with theradar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Water, snow or ice on the surface of theroad may interfere with the radar signals.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruisecontrol.

You are in a desert or remote area with noother vehicles and no roadside objects.

Contact an authorized dealer to have theradar checked for proper coverage andoperation.

Radar is out of alignment due to a front-end impact.

Clean the outside of the windshield in frontof the camera.

The windshield in front of the camera isdirty or obstructed.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the camera to detect that it isfree from obstruction.

The windshield in front of the camera isclean, but the message remains in thedisplay.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it ispossible to get a blockage warning with noactual block. This happens, for example,when driving in sparse rural or desertenvironments. A false blocked conditioneither self clears, or clears after you restartyour vehicle.

Switching to Normal CruiseControl

WARNING: Normal cruise controlwill not brake when your vehicle isapproaching slower vehicles. Always beaware of which mode you have selectedand apply the brakes when necessary.

You can change from adaptive cruisecontrol to normal cruise control throughthe information display.

219


Cruise Control

E71340

The cruise control indicator lightreplaces the adaptive cruisecontrol indicator light if you

select normal cruise control. The gapsetting does not display, and the systemdoes not respond to lead vehicles.Automatic braking remains active tomaintain set speed.

Using Lane Centering


WARNING: Pay close attention tochanging road conditions such asentering or leaving a highway, on roadswith intersections or roundabouts, roadswithout visible lanes of travel, roads thatare winding, slippery, unpaved, or steepslopes.

WARNING: Do not use the systemin poor visibility, for example fog, heavyrain, spray or snow.

WARNING: Large contrasts inoutside lighting can limit sensorperformance.

WARNING: The sensor mayincorrectly track lane markings as otherstructures or objects. This can result ina false or missed warning.

WARNING: Do not use the systemwhen towing a trailer. Failure to followthis instruction could result in the loss ofcontrol of your vehicle, personal injury ordeath.

The system is designed to help keep yourvehicle in the center of the lane by applyingcontinuous assistance steering torqueinput toward the lane center on highways.Note: The assistance steering torque islimited and may not be sufficient for alldriving situations.Note: In exceptional conditions, the systemmay deviate from the center line.The system only activates when the all ofthe following occur:• You have adaptive cruise control with

stop-and-go on.• The system detects both lane

markings.• Your hands are on the steering wheel

at all times.Note: The system may not function if thefront camera or sensor is blocked or notavailable.

Switching Lane Centering On and Off

E262175


The indicator appears in the informationdisplay. When the system is on, the colorof the indicator changes to indicate thesystem status.Gray indicates the system is on butinactive.Green indicates the system is active andapplying assistance steering torque inputto keep your vehicle in the center of thelane.The system activates when it detects validlane markings. If it does not detect validlane markings, the system stays inactiveuntil valid markings are available.

220


Cruise Control

The system may not correctly operate inany of the following conditions:• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.• The lane is too narrow or wide.• The system does not detect at least

one lane marking or when lanes mergeor split.

• You switch the direction indicator on.• Limited steering torque input is applied.• Areas under construction or new

infrastructure.• When modifications to the steering

system have been made.• When using a spare tire.When the system is active and detects nosteering activity for a certain period of time,the system alerts you to put your hands onthe steering wheel. If you do not react tothe warnings the system cancels and slowsyour vehicle down to idle speeds whilemaintaining steering control.The system also alerts you if your vehiclecrosses lane markings without detectedsteering activity.Note: The system may detect a light gripor touch on the steering wheel as hands-offdriving.You can override the system at any timeby steering your vehicle.

Automatic CancellationWhen an external condition cancels thesystem, for example, no lane markingsavailable, a tone sounds and a messageappears in the information display.

E265299

If your vehicle starts to slowdown, you must contribute tothe steering control and press

and release the button to regain fullsystem performance.

Automatic cancellation can also occur if:• The lane becomes too wide or too

narrow.• The system cannot detect valid lane

markings.• Lane markings are crossed.Note: The system disables until the nextkey cycle if your vehicle slows down due todriver inactivity twice within a key cycle.

Blocked Sensor


E243054

The camera is mounted behind the interiormirror.

E244279

The sensor is in the lower grille.

221


Cruise Control

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It isbehind a fascia panel.Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free ofdirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle frontprotectors, aftermarket lights, additionalpaint or plastic coatings could also degradesensor performance.

222


Cruise Control

DRIVER ALERTPrinciple of Operation


WARNING: The system may notfunction if the sensor is blocked.

WARNING: Take regular restbreaks if you feel tired. Do not wait forthe system to warn you.

WARNING: Certain driving stylesmay result in the system warning youeven if you are not feeling tired.

WARNING: In cold and severeweather conditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow and spray can alllimit sensor performance.

WARNING: The system will notoperate if the sensor cannot track theroad lane markings.


WARNING: If damage occurs in theimmediate area surrounding the sensor,have your vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

WARNING: The system may notcorrectly operate if your vehicle is fittedwith a suspension kit not approved byus.

Note: The system assists you when drivingon fast main roads and freeways.Note: The system calculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds above approximately40 mph (65 km/h).The system monitors your driving behavior.The system is designed to alert you if itcalculates that you are becoming drowsyor if your driving deteriorates.

Using Driver AlertSwitching the System On and OffSwitch the system on using the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page105).Note: The system remains on or offdepending on how it was last set.The system calculates your alertness levelbased upon your driving behavior in relationto the lane markings and other factors.

System WarningsNote: The system does not warn you if thevehicle speed falls below approximately40 mph (65 km/h).The warning system has two stages:1. A temporary warning is issued to advise

you to take a rest. This message onlyappears for a short time.

2. If you do not rest and the systemcontinues to detect that your drivingdeteriorates, it issues a further warning.This remains in the information displayuntil you cancel it. See InformationMessages (page 115).

223


Driving Aids

Press OK on the steering wheel control toremove the warning.

Resetting the SystemYou can reset the system by:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping your vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM


WARNING: Always drive with duecare and attention when using andoperating the controls and features onyour vehicle.

WARNING: In cold and severeweather conditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow and spray can alllimit sensor performance.

WARNING: The system will notoperate if the sensor cannot track theroad lane markings.

WARNING: The sensor mayincorrectly track lane markings as otherstructures or objects. This can result ina false or missed warning.


WARNING: If damage occurs in theimmediate area surrounding the sensor,have your vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

WARNING: The system may notcorrectly operate if your vehicle is fittedwith a suspension kit not approved byus.

Note: The system works above 40 mph(65 km/h).Note: The system works as long as thecamera can detect one lane marking.Note: When you select aid or alert and aidmode and the system detects no steeringactivity for a short period, the system alertsyou to put your hands on the steering wheel.The system may detect a light grip ortouch on the steering wheel as hands offdriving.Note: The system may not function if thecamera is blocked, or if the windshield isdamaged or dirty.

E249505

224


Driving Aids

When you switch the system on and itdetects an unintentional drift out of yourlane is likely to occur, the system notifiesor assists you to stay in your lane throughthe steering system and informationdisplay. In Alert mode, the system providesa warning by vibrating the steering wheel.In Aid mode, the system provides steeringassistance by gently counter steering yourvehicle back into the lane.When the system is functioning in thecombined Alert and Aid mode, the systemfirst provides steering assistance by gentlycounter steering your vehicle back into thelane, followed by a warning that vibratesthe steering wheel if the vehicle is still outof the lane markings.

Switching the System On and OffNote: The system on or off setting is storeduntil it is manually changed, unless a MyKeyis detected. If the system detects a MyKey,it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.

E132099

Press the button on the direction indicatorstalk to switch the system on or off.

System SettingsThe system has optional setting menusavailable. The system stores the lastknown selection for each of these settings.You do not need to readjust your settingseach time you switch the system on.Mode: This setting allows you to selectwhich of the system features you canenable.

E165515

Alert only – Provides a steering wheelvibration when the system detects anunintended lane departure.

E165516

Aid only – Provides steering assistancetoward the lane center when the systemdetects an unintended lane departure.

225


Driving Aids

E165517

AlertAAidB

Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistancetoward the lane center.If your vehicle continues drifting out of thelane after the lane keeping aid corrects thevehicle, the system provides a steeringwheel vibration.Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrategeneral zone coverage. They do not provideexact zone parameters.Intensity: This setting affects the intensityof the steering wheel vibration used for thealert and alert + aid modes. This settingdoes not affect the aid mode.• Low.• Normal.• High.

System Display

E151660

If you switch the system on in alert mode,an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lanemarkings appears in the informationdisplay.If you switch the system on in aid or alertand aid mode, a separate white icon alsoappears, or in some vehicles, arrowsappear with the lane markings.When you switch off the system, the lanemarking graphics do not display.While the system is on, the color of thelane markings change to indicate thesystem status.Gray: Indicates that the system istemporarily unable to provide a warningor intervention on the indicated side. Thismay be because:• Your vehicle is under the activation

speed.• The direction indicator is active.• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.

226


Driving Aids

• The road has no or poor lane markingsin the camera field-of-view.

• The camera is obscured or unable todetect the lane markings due toenvironmental, traffic or vehicleconditions. For example, significant sunangles, shadows, snow, heavy rain orfog, following a large vehicle that isblocking or shadowing the lane or poorheadlamp illumination.

See Troubleshooting for additionalinformation.Green: Indicates that the system isavailable or ready to provide a warning orintervention on the indicated side.

Yellow: Indicates that the system isproviding or has just provided a lanekeeping aid intervention.Red: Indicates that the system is providingor has just provided a lane keeping alertwarning.The system can be temporarily suppressedat any time by the following:• Quick braking.• Fast acceleration.• Using the turn signal indicator.• Evasive steering maneuver.• Driving too close to the lane markings.

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markingson the road?

Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.

A quick intentional lane change has occurred.

Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.

Driving at high speeds in curves.

The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.

Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.

Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.

Sudden offset in lane markings.

ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.

There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.

You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.

There is standing water on the road.

Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.

227


Driving Aids

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markingson the road?

Lane width is too narrow or too wide.

The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.

Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.

Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in theAid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.

Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.

The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM

WARNING: Do not use the blindspot information system as areplacement for using the interior andexterior mirrors or looking over yourshoulder before changing lanes. Theblind spot information system is not areplacement for careful driving.

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly during severe weatherconditions, for example snow, ice, heavyrain and spray. Always drive with duecare and attention. Failure to take caremay result in a crash.

E255695

228


Driving Aids

The system is designed to detect vehiclesthat may have entered the blind spot zone.The detection area is on both sides of yourvehicle, extending rearward from theexterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. Thedetection area extends to approximately59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper whenthe vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph(48 km/h) to alert you of fasterapproaching vehicles.Note: The system does not prevent contactwith other vehicles. It is not designed todetect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animalsor other infrastructures.

Using the Blind Spot InformationSystemVehicles with Automatic TransmissionThe system turns on when all of thefollowing occur:• You start your vehicle.• You shift into drive (D).• The vehicle speed is greater than

6 mph (10 km/h).Note: The system does not operate in park(P) or reverse (R).

Vehicles with Manual TransmissionThe system turns on when all of thefollowing occur:• You start your vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than

6 mph (10 km/h).Note: The system does not operate inreverse (R).

System Lights and Messages

E142442

When the system detects a vehicle, analert indicator illuminates in the exteriormirror on the side the approaching vehicleis coming from. If you turn the directionindicator on for that side of your vehicle,the alert indicator flashes.Note: The system may not alert you if avehicle quickly passes through the detectionzone.

Blocked Sensors

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumperon both sides of your vehicle.Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumperstickers, repair compound or other objects.Note: Blocked sensors could affect systemperformance.

229


Driving Aids

If the sensors become blocked, a messagemay appear in the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 115). Thealert indicators remain illuminated but thesystem does not alert you.

System ErrorsIf the system detects a fault, a warninglamp illuminates and a message displays.See Information Messages (page 115).

Switching the System On and OffYou can switch the system off using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 105). When you switchthe system off, a warning lamp illuminatesand a message displays. When you switchthe system on or off, the alert indicatorsflash twice.Note: The system remembers the lastsetting when you start your vehicle.Note: The system may not correctly operatewhen towing a trailer. For vehicles with atrailer tow module and tow bar approvedby us, the system turns off when you attacha trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarkettrailer tow module or tow bar, werecommend that you switch the system offwhen you attach a trailer.To permanently switch the system off,contact an authorized dealer.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

WARNING: Do not use the crosstraffic alert system as a replacement forusing the interior and exterior mirrors orlooking over your shoulder beforereversing out of a parking space. Thecross traffic alert system is not areplacement for careful driving.

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly during severe weatherconditions, for example snow, ice, heavyrain and spray. Always drive with duecare and attention. Failure to take caremay result in a crash.

The system alerts you of vehiclesapproaching from the sides behind yourvehicle when you shift into reverse (R).

Using Cross Traffic AlertThe system detects vehicles that approachat a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreaseswhen the sensors are partially, mostly orfully obstructed. Slowly reversing helpsincrease the coverage area andeffectiveness.The system turns on when you start theengine and you shift into reverse (R). Thesystem turns off when you shift out ofreverse (R).

230


Driving Aids

E142440

The sensor on the left-hand side is onlypartially obstructed and zone coverage onthe right-hand side is maximized.

E142441

231


Driving Aids

Zone coverage also decreases whenparking at narrow angles. The sensor onthe left-hand side is mostly obstructed andzone coverage on that side is severelyreduced.

Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumperon both sides of your vehicle.Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumperstickers, repair compound or other objects.Note: Blocked sensors could affect systemperformance.If the sensors are blocked, a message mayappear in the information display whenyou shift into reverse (R).

Cross Traffic Alert SystemLimitationsThe system may not correctly operatewhen any of the following occur:• The sensors are blocked.• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects

are obstructing the sensors.• Vehicles approach at speeds less than

4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph(60 km/h).

• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph(12 km/h).

• You reverse out of an angled parkingspace.

Cross Traffic Alert Behavior WhenTrailer is AttachedNote: The system may not correctly operatewhen towing a trailer. For vehicles with anapproved trailer tow module and tow bar,the system turns off when you attach atrailer. For vehicles with an aftermarkettrailer tow module or tow bar, werecommend that you switch the system offwhen you attach a trailer.Cross traffic alert remains on when youattach a trailer in vehicles that come withblind spot information system with trailertow under the following conditions:• You connect a trailer.• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack

with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)

in the information display.See Blind Spot Information System(page 228).

Switching the System On and OffTo switch the system on or off, adjust thesetting. Depending on your vehicle options,the setting could be in the following:• Information display. See General

Information (page 105).• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 413).Note: The system turns on every time youswitch the ignition on. To permanentlyswitch the system off, contact an authorizeddealer.

Cross Traffic Alert Indicator

E268294When the system detects anapproaching vehicle, a tonesounds, a warning lamp

illuminates in the relevant exterior mirrorand arrows appear in the informationdisplay to show which side theapproaching vehicle is coming from.

232


Driving Aids

Note: If arrows do not display, a messageappears in the information display.If the system malfunctions, a warning lampilluminates in the instrument cluster anda message appears in the informationdisplay. Have your vehicle checked as soonas possible.

Note: In exceptional conditions, the systemcould alert you, even when there is nothingin the detection zone, for example a vehiclepassing further away from your vehicle.

Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages

ActionMessage

Displays instead of indication arrows when the systemdetects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.

Cross Traffic Alert

Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Cleanthe sensors. If the message continues to appear, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

Cross Traffic Not Avail-able Sensor Blocked SeeManual

The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checkedas soon as possible.

Cross Traffic SystemFault

Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deac-tivated Trailer Attached

STEERINGElectric Power Steering

WARNING: The electric powersteering system has diagnostic checksthat continuously monitor the system. Ifa fault is detected, a message displaysin the information display. Stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.Switch the ignition off. After at least 10seconds, switch the ignition on andwatch the information display for asteering system warning message. If asteering system warning messagereturns, have the system checked assoon as possible.

WARNING: If the system detectsan error, you may not feel a difference inthe steering, however a serious conditionmay exist. Have your vehicle checked assoon as possible. Failure to do so mayresult in loss of steering control.

Your vehicle has an electric power steeringsystem, there is no fluid reservoir, nomaintenance is required.If your vehicle loses electrical power whileyou are driving, electric power steeringassistance is lost. The steering system stilloperates and you can steer your vehiclemanually. Manually steering your vehiclerequires more effort.

233


Driving Aids

Extreme continuous steering may increasethe effort required for you to steer yourvehicle, this increased effort preventsoverheating and permanent damage tothe steering system. You do not lose theability to steer your vehicle manually.Typical steering and driving maneuversallow the system to cool and return tonormal operation.

Steering TipsIf the steering wanders or pulls, check for:• Correct tire pressures.• Uneven tire wear.• Loose or worn suspension

components.• Loose or worn steering components.• Improper vehicle alignment.Note: A high crown in the road or highcrosswinds may also make the steeringseem to wander or pull.

Adaptive Learning (If Equipped)

The electronic power steering systemadaptive learning helps correct roadirregularities and improves overall handlingand steering feel. It communicates withthe brake system to help operateadvanced stability control and accidentavoidance systems. Additionally, wheneverthe battery is disconnected or a newbattery installed, you must drive yourvehicle a short distance before the systemrelearns the strategy and reactivates allsystems.

PRE-COLLISION ASSIST


WARNING: The system does notdetect vehicles that are driving in adifferent direction, cyclists or animals.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The system does notoperate during hard acceleration orsteering. Failure to take care may leadto a crash or personal injury.

WARNING: The system may fail oroperate with reduced function duringcold and severe weather conditions.Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog canadversely affect the system. Keep thefront camera and radar free of snow andice. Failure to take care may result in theloss of control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: In situations where thevehicle camera has limited detectioncapability, this may reduce systemperformance. These situations includebut are not limited to direct or lowsunlight, vehicles at night without taillights, unconventional vehicle types,pedestrians with complex backgrounds,

234


Driving Aids

running pedestrians, partly obscuredpedestrians, or pedestrians that thesystem cannot distinguish from a group.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The system cannothelp prevent all crashes. Do not rely onthis system to replace driver judgmentand the need to maintain a safe distanceand speed.

Using the Pre-Collision AssistSystemThe system is active at speeds aboveapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h) andpedestrian detection is active at speedsup to 50 mph (80 km/h).

E156130

If your vehicle is rapidly approachinganother stationary vehicle, a vehicletraveling in the same direction as yours, ora pedestrian within your driving path, thesystem is designed to provide three levelsof functionality:1. Alert2. Brake Support3. Active Braking

E255268

Alert: When active, a flashing visualwarning appears and an audible warningtone sounds.Brake Support: The system is designedto help reduce the impact speed bypreparing the brakes for rapid braking.Brake support does not automaticallyapply the brakes. If you press the brakepedal, the system could apply additionalbraking up to maximum braking force, evenif you lightly press the brake pedal.Active Braking: Active braking mayactivate if the system determines that acollision is imminent. The system may helpthe driver reduce impact damage or avoidthe crash completely.Note: Brake Support and Active Braking areactive at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).If the vehicle is equipped with a radarsensor, included with Adaptive CruiseControl, then Brake Support and ActiveBraking are active up to the maximum speedof the vehicle.Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assistalerts as being too frequent or disturbing,then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,though the manufacturer recommendsusing the highest sensitivity setting wherepossible. Setting lower sensitivity wouldlead to fewer and later system warnings.

Distance Indication and Alert (If

Equipped)

Distance Indication and Alert is a functionthat provides the driver with a graphicalindication of the time gap to otherpreceding vehicles traveling in the samedirection. The Distance Indication and Alertscreen in the display screen shows one ofthe graphics that follow.

235


Driving Aids

E190004

If the time gap to a preceding vehicle issmall, a red visual indication displays tothe driver.Note: Distance Indication and Alertdeactivates and the graphics do not displaywhen Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed

>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal62 mph(100 km/h)

0.6sec —0.9sec

56–82 ft(17–25 m)YellowNormal62 mph

(100 km/h)

<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal62 mph(100 km/h)

Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is rapidly approaching astationary vehicle or a vehicle traveling inthe same direction as your vehicle, thesystem is designed to help you steeraround the vehicle.The system only activates when all of thefollowing occur:• The Pre-Collision Assist system detects

a vehicle ahead and starts to applyActive Braking.

• You turn the steering wheel in anattempt to steer around the vehicle.

After you turn the steering wheel, thesystem applies additional steering torqueto help you steer around the vehicle. Afteryou pass the vehicle, the system appliessteering torque in the opposite direction toencourage you to steer back into the lane.The system deactivates after you fully passthe vehicle.

Note: The system does not automaticallysteer around a vehicle. If you do not turn thesteering wheel, the system does notactivate.Note: The system does not activate if thedistance to the vehicle ahead is too smalland a crash cannot be avoided.

Adjusting the Pre-Collision AssistSettingsThe following settings can be adjusted byusing the information display controls. SeeGeneral Information (page 105).• You can change Alert and Distance

Alert sensitivity to one of three possiblesettings.

• You can switch Distance Indication andAlert on or off.

• If required, you can switch ActiveBraking on or off.

• If required, you can switch EvasiveSteering Assist on or off.

236


Driving Aids

Note: Active Braking and Evasive SteeringAssist automatically turn on every time youswitch the ignition on.Note: If you switch Active Braking off,Evasive Steering Assist turns off.

Blocked Sensors

E273245

Camera.1Radar sensor (if equipped).2

If a message regarding a blocked sensoror camera appears in the informationdisplay, the radar signals or camera imagesare obstructed. If your vehicle is equippedwith a radar sensor, it is located behind thefascia cover in the center of the lower grille.With a blocked sensor or camera, thePre-Collision Assist system may notfunction or performance may reduce. Thefollowing table lists possible causes andactions for when this message displays.

Camera Troubleshooting

ActionCause

Clean the outside of the windshield in frontof the camera.

The windshield in front of the camera isdirty or obstructed in some way.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the camera to detect that there

is no obstruction.

The windshield in front of the camera isclean but the message remains in the

display screen.

237


Driving Aids

Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radaror remove the object causing the obstruc-

tion.The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty

or obstructed in some way.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the radar to detect that there

is no obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is cleanbut the message remains in the display

screen.

The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist automat-

ically reactivates a short time after theweather conditions improve.

Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interferingwith the radar signals.

The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist automat-

ically reactivates a short time after theweather conditions improve.

Swirling water or snow or ice on the surfaceof the road may interfere with the radar

signals.

Contact an authorized dealer to have theradar checked for proper coverage and

operation.Radar is out of alignment due to a front end

impact.

Note: Proper system operation requires aclear view of the road by the camera. Haveany windshield damage in the area of thecamera's field of view repaired.Note: If something hits the front end of yourvehicle or damage occurs and your vehicleis equipped with a radar sensor, the radarsensing zone may change. This could causemissed or false detections. Contact anauthorized dealer to have the radar checkedfor proper coverage and operation.

DRIVE CONTROLAdaptive SteeringYou can configure which of the modes areactive when your vehicle is in (D) drive orin (S) sport. The configuration remainsactive until modified from the main menuon the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 105).

Modes:• Normal – Default factory setting.• Sport – Slightly higher effort required

for steering with more road force feltthrough the steering wheel.

Note: The Drive Control has diagnosticchecks that continuously monitor thesystem to ensure proper operation. Certaintypes of system errors will gray out themode selections within the informationdisplay, preventing you from changing stateswhen the gear position is changed. Othertypes of errors will produce a temporarymessage that states a malfunction. If eithercondition persists for multiple key cycles,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

238


Driving Aids

REAR UNDER FLOORSTORAGECargo Management System

E142445

The system is located in the floor of thecargo area. Lift the handle to open.

CARGO NETS

WARNING: This net is not designedto restrain objects during a collision orheavy braking.

The cargo net secures lightweight objectsin the cargo area. Attach the net to theanchors provided. Repeat the attachmenton both sides of the vehicle.

E199571

LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Make sure that theposts are properly latched in mountingfeatures. The cover may cause injury ina sudden stop or accident if it is notsecurely installed.

WARNING: Do not place anyobjects on the cargo area shade. Theymay obstruct your vision or strikeoccupants of your vehicle in a suddenstop or crash.

Use the cargo shade to cover items in thecargo area of your vehicle.

239


Load Carrying

E142447

Insert the ends of the cargo shade into themounting features located behind the rearseat on the rear trim panels to install thecargo shade.To operate the cargo shade:1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade

rearward.2. Secure both ends of the support rod

into the retention slots located on therear quarter trim panels.

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: When loading the roofracks, we recommend you evenlydistribute the load, as well as maintaina low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,with higher centers of gravity, mayhandle differently than unloadedvehicles. Take extra precautions, suchas slower speeds and increased stoppingdistance, when driving a heavily loadedvehicle.

The maximum recommended load, evenlydistributed on the roof rack, is 100 lb(45 kg).

Note: Never place loads directly on the roofpanel. The roof panel is not designed todirectly carry a load.For correct roof rack system function, youmust place loads directly on crossbarsaffixed to the roof rack side rails. Whenusing the roof rack system, we recommendyou use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbarsdesigned specifically for your vehicle.Make sure that you securely fasten theload. Check the tightness of the loadbefore driving and at each fuel stop.

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with andwithout a TrailerThis section guides you in theproper loading of your vehicle,trailer, or both. Keep your loadedvehicle weight within its designrating capability, with or withouta trailer. Properly loading yourvehicle provides maximum returnof vehicle design performance.Before you load your vehicle,become familiar with thefollowing terms for determiningyour vehicle’s weight rating, withor without a trailer, from thevehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label or SafetyCompliance Certification label.

240


Load Carrying

Tire and Loading Label InformationExample:

E198719

PayloadPayload is the combined weightof cargo and passengers that yourvehicle is carrying. The maximumpayload for your vehicle appearson the Tire and Loading label. Thelabel is either on the B-pillar or theedge of the driver door. Vehiclesexported outside the US andCanada may not have a tire andloading label. Look for “Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximumpayload. The payload listed on theTire and Loading Information label

is the maximum payload for yourvehicle as built by the assemblyplant. If you install any additionalequipment on your vehicle, youmust determine the new payload.Subtract the weight of theequipment from the payload listedon the Tire and Loading label.When towing, trailer tongueweight or king pin weight is alsopart of payload.

WARNING: Theappropriate loading capacity ofyour vehicle can be limited eitherby volume capacity (how muchspace is available) or by payloadcapacity (how much weight thevehicle should carry). Once youhave reached the maximumpayload of your vehicle, do notadd more cargo, even if there isspace available. Overloading orimproperly loading your vehiclecan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and vehicle rollover.

GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating)GAWR is the maximum allowableweight that a single axle (front orrear) can carry. These numbersare on the Safety ComplianceCertification label. The label islocated on the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver seating position.

241


Load Carrying

The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its Gross AxleWeight Rating.GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating)GVWR is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle.This includes all options,equipment, passengers and cargo.It appears on the SafetyCompliance Certification label.The label is located on the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driverseating position.The gross vehicle weight mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating.Safety Compliance Certification LabelExample:

E198828

WARNING: Exceeding theSafety Compliance Certificationlabel vehicle weight limits canadversely affect theperformance and handling ofyour vehicle, cause vehicledamage and can result in theloss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

Maximum Loaded TrailerWeightMaximum loaded trailer weight isthe highest possible weight of afully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. Consult an authorized dealer(or the RV and Trailer TowingGuide available at an authorizeddealer) for more detailedinformation.GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)GCWR is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and theloaded trailer, including all cargoand passengers, that the vehiclecan handle without riskingdamage. (Important: The towingvehicle’s braking system is ratedfor operation at Gross VehicleWeight Rating, not at GrossCombined Weight Rating.)Separate functional brakes should

242


Load Carrying

be used for safe control of towedvehicles and for trailers where theGross Combined Weight of thetowing vehicle plus the trailerexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating of the towing vehicle.The gross combined weight mustnever exceed the Gross CombinedWeight Rating.Note: For trailer towinginformation refer to the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available atan authorized dealer.

WARNING: Do not exceedthe GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the certificationlabel.

WARNING: Do not usereplacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than theoriginal tires because they maylower your vehicle's GVWR andGAWR limitations. Replacementtires with a higher limit than theoriginal tires do not increase theGVWR and GAWR limitations.

WARNING: Exceeding anyvehicle weight rating canadversely affect theperformance and handling ofyour vehicle, cause vehicledamage and can result in theloss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

Steps for determining thecorrect load limit:1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lb." on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1,400 lb. and there willbe five 150 lb. passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lb.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo andluggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

243


Load Carrying

Helpful examples for calculatingthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacitySuppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You decideto go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, four of yourfriends and all the golf bags? Youand four friends average 220pounds (99 kilograms) each andthe golf bags weigh approximately30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.The calculation would be: 1400 -(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you haveenough load capacity in yourvehicle to transport four friendsand your golf bags. In metric units,the calculation would be: 635kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You andone of your friends decide to pickup cement from the local homeimprovement store to finish thatpatio you have been planning forthe past two years. Measuring theinside of the vehicle with the rearseat folded down, you have roomfor twelve 100-pound(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Doyou have enough load capacity totransport the cement to yourhome? If you and your friend eachweigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),the calculation would be: 1400 -(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440

- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you donot have enough cargo capacityto carry that much weight. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.You will need to reduce the loadweight by at least 240 pounds(104 kilograms). If you removethree 100-pound (45-kilogram)cement bags, then the loadcalculation would be:1400 - (2 x220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -900 = 60 pounds. Now you havethe load capacity to transport thecement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.The above calculations alsoassume that the loads arepositioned in your vehicle in amanner that does not overloadthe front or the rear gross axleweight rating specified for yourvehicle on the Safety ComplianceCertification label.Special Loading Instructionsfor Owners of Pick-up Trucksand Utility-type Vehicles

WARNING: When loadingthe roof racks, we recommendyou evenly distribute the load,as well as maintain a low centerof gravity. Loaded vehicles, withhigher centers of gravity, may

244


Load Carrying

handle differently than unloadedvehicles. Take extra precautions,such as slower speeds andincreased stopping distance,when driving a heavily loadedvehicle.

245


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING: Do not exceedthe GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the certificationlabel.

WARNING: Towing trailersbeyond the maximumrecommended gross trailerweight exceeds the limit of yourvehicle and could result in enginedamage, transmission damage,structural damage, loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rolloverand personal injury.

Note: Your vehicle may haveelectrical items, such as fuses orrelays, related to towing. SeeFuses (page 267).Your vehicle's load capacitydesignation is by weight, not byvolume, so you cannot necessarilyuse all available space whenloading a vehicle or trailer.Towing a trailer places an extraload on your vehicle's engine,transmission, axle, brakes, tiresand suspension. Inspect thesecomponents periodically during,and after, any towing operation.

Load PlacementTo help minimize how trailermovement affects your vehiclewhen driving:• Load the heaviest items closest

to the trailer floor.• Load the heaviest items

centered between the left andright side trailer tires.

• Load the heaviest items abovethe trailer axles or just slightlyforward toward the trailertongue. Do not allow the finaltrailer tongue weight to goabove or below 10-15% of theloaded trailer weight.

• Select a ball mount with thecorrect rise or drop. When boththe loaded vehicle and trailerare connected, the trailer frameshould be level, or slightlyangled down toward yourvehicle, when viewed from theside.

When driving with a trailer orpayload, a slight takeoff vibrationor shudder may be present due tothe increased payload weight.Additional information regardingproper trailer loading and settingyour vehicle up for towing islocated in the Load Carryingchapter. See Load Limit (page240).You can also find information inthe RV & Trailer Towing Guideavailable at your authorizeddealer, or online.

246


Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Onlinehttp://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL

WARNING: Turning off trailer swaycontrol increases the risk of loss ofvehicle control, serious injury or death.Ford does not recommend disabling thisfeature except in situations where speedreduction may be detrimental (such ashill climbing), the driver has significanttrailer towing experience, and can controltrailer sway and maintain safe operation.

Note: This feature does not prevent trailersway, but reduces it once it begins.Note: This feature cannot stop all trailersfrom swaying.Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is toohigh, the system may activate multipletimes, gradually reducing vehicle speed.This feature applies your vehicle brakes atindividual wheels and, if necessary, reducesengine power. If the trailer begins to sway,the stability control light flashes and themessage TRAILER SWAY REDUCESPEED appears in the information display.The first thing to do is slow your vehicledown, then pull safely to the side of theroad and check for proper tongue load andtrailer load distribution. See LoadCarrying (page 239).

RECOMMENDED TOWINGWEIGHTS

Note: Do not exceed the trailerweight for your vehicleconfiguration listed in the chartbelow.Note: Make sure to take intoconsideration trailer frontal area.Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) forvehicles without towing package,or 30 ft² (2.79 m²) for vehicles withtowing package.Note: For high altitude operation,reduce the gross combined weightby 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)elevation point.Note: Certain states requireseparate trailer brakes for trailersover a specified weight. Checkstate regulations for this specifiedweight. The maximum trailerweights listed may be limited tothis specified weight, as yourvehicle’s electrical system may notinclude the wiring connectorneeded to activate electric trailerbrakes.

247


Towing

Your vehicle may tow a trailerprovided the maximum trailerweight is less than or equal to the

maximum trailer weight listed foryour vehicle configuration on thefollowing chart.

Maximum Trailer WeightWithout Trailer Tow

Package1

Maximum TrailerWeight With Trailer Tow

Package1Powertrain

1,500 lb (680 kg)3,500 lb (1,587 kg)2.0L I4 GTDI—3,500 lb (1,587 kg)2.7L V6 GTDI

1 Calculated with SAE J2807 method.

248


Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKSFollow these guidelines for safe towing:• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your

vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).• Consult your local motor vehicle laws

for towing a trailer.• See the instructions included with

towing accessories for the properinstallation and adjustmentspecifications.

• Service your vehicle more frequently ifyou tow a trailer. See your scheduledmaintenance information.

• If you use a rental trailer, follow theinstructions the rental agency givesyou.

You can find information on loadspecification terms found on the tire labeland Safety Compliance label as well asinstructions on calculating your vehicle'sload in the Load Carrying chapter. SeeLoad Limit (page 240).Remember to account for the trailertongue weight as part of your vehicle loadwhen calculating the total vehicle weight.

HitchesDo not use a hitch that either clamps ontothe bumper or attaches to the axle.Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of thetotal trailer weight is on the tongue.

Safety ChainsNote: Never attach safety chains to thebumper.Always connect the safety chains to thehook retainers of your vehicle hitch.To connect the safety chains, cross themunder the trailer tongue and allow enoughslack for turning tight corners. Do not allowthe chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

WARNING: Do not connect atrailer's hydraulic brake system directlyto your vehicle's brake system. Yourvehicle may not have enough brakingpower and your chances of having acollision greatly increase.

Electric brakes and manual, automatic orsurge-type trailer brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them tothe manufacturer's specifications. Thetrailer brakes must meet local and federalregulations.The rating for the tow vehicle's brakingsystem operation is at the gross vehicleweight rating, not the gross combinedweight rating.Separate functioning brake systemsare required for safe control of towedvehicles and trailers weighing morethan 1500 lb (680 kg) when load.

Trailer Lamps

WARNING: Never connect anytrailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's taillamp wiring; this may damage theelectrical system resulting in fire. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon aspossible for assistance in proper trailertow wiring installation. Additionalelectrical equipment may be required.

Trailer lamps are required on most towedvehicles. Make sure all running lights, brakelights, turn signals and hazard lights areworking.

249


Towing

Before Towing a TrailerPractice turning, stopping and backing upto get the feel of your vehicle-trailercombination before starting on a trip.When turning, make wider turns so thetrailer wheels clear curbs and otherobstacles.

When Towing a Trailer• Do not drive faster than 70 mph

(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi(800 km).

• Do not make full-throttle starts.• Check your hitch, electrical connections

and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughlyafter you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).

• When stopped in congested or heavytraffic during hot weather, place thetransmission in park (P) to aid engineand transmission cooling and to helpA/C performance.

• Turn off the speed control with heavyloads or in hilly terrain. The speedcontrol may turn off automaticallywhen you are towing on long, steepgrades.

• Shift to a lower gear when driving downa long or steep hill. Do not apply thebrakes continuously, as they mayoverheat and become less effective.

• If your transmission is equipped with aGrade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, usethis feature when towing. This providesengine braking and helps eliminateexcessive transmission shifting foroptimum fuel economy andtransmission cooling.

• Allow more distance for stopping witha trailer attached. Anticipate stops andbrake gradually.

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, ifyou must park on a grade:

1. Turn the steering wheel to point yourvehicle tires away from traffic flow.

2. Set your vehicle parking brake.3. Place the transmission in park (P).4. Place wheel chocks in front and back

of the trailer wheels. Chocks are notincluded with your vehicle.

Launching or Retrieving a Boat orPersonal Watercraft (PWC)Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into the water.Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from the water.When backing down a ramp during boatlaunching or retrieval:• Do not allow the static water level to

rise above the bottom edge of the rearbumper.

• Do not allow waves to break higherthan 6 in (15 cm) above the bottomedge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water toenter vehicle components:• Causing internal damage to the

components.• Affecting driveability, emissions, and

reliability.Replace the rear axle lubricant anytimeyou submerge the rear axle in water. Watermay contaminate the rear axle lubricant,which is not a normal maintenanceinspection item unless there is a possibilityof a leak or other axle repair is required.

250


Towing

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS - 2.0LEmergency Towing

WARNING: If your vehicle has asteering wheel lock make sure theignition is in the accessory or on positionwhen being towed.

If your vehicle becomes inoperable withoutaccess to wheel dollies or a vehicletransport trailer, it can be flat-towed withall wheels on the ground, regardless of thepowertrain and transmission configuration,under the following conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward for

towing in a forward direction.• Refer to the Manual Park Release

procedure. See AutomaticTransmission (page 177). Failing todo so could result in damage to thetransmission.

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Recreational TowingFront-Wheel Drive VehiclesYou cannot recreational tow your vehiclewith all wheels on the ground becausevehicle or transmission damage couldoccur. Place the front wheels on atwo-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a towdolly, follow the instructions specified bythe equipment provider.

Rear-Wheel Drive VehiclesYou cannot recreational tow your vehiclewith all wheels on the ground becausevehicle or transmission damage couldoccur. We recommend towing your vehiclewith all four wheels off the ground, suchas when using a car-hauling trailer.Otherwise, you cannot recreational towyour vehicle.

All-Wheel and Four-Wheel DriveVehiclesYou cannot recreational tow your vehiclewith all wheels on the ground becausevehicle or transmission damage couldoccur. We recommend towing your vehiclewith all four wheels off the ground, suchas when using a car-hauling trailer.Otherwise, you cannot recreational towyour vehicle.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS - 2.7LEmergency Towing

WARNING: If your vehicle has asteering wheel lock make sure theignition is in the accessory or on positionwhen being towed.

If your vehicle becomes inoperable withoutaccess to wheel dollies or a vehicletransport trailer, it can be flat-towed withall wheels on the ground, regardless of thepowertrain and transmission configuration,under the following conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward for

towing in a forward direction.• Refer to the Manual Park Release

procedure. See AutomaticTransmission (page 177). Failing todo so may result in damage to thetransmission.

251


Towing

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Recreational TowingNote: Put your climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the vehicle. SeeClimate Control (page 131).Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational towing. An example ofrecreational towing would be towing yourvehicle behind a motorhome. We designedthese guidelines to prevent damage to yourtransmission.You can recreational tow your vehicle withall four wheels on the ground using theManual Park Release procedure, or withall four wheels off the ground using avehicle transport trailer. If you are using avehicle transport trailer, follow theinstructions specified by the equipmentprovider.If you recreational tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground:• Only tow your vehicle in the forward

direction.• Refer to the Manual Park Release

procedure. See AutomaticTransmission (page 177). Failing todo so may result in damage to thetransmission.

• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).

252


Towing

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGFuel economy is affected by several thingssuch as how you drive, the conditions youdrive under and how you maintain yourvehicle.There are some things to keep in mind thatmay improve your fuel economy:• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.• Drive at steady speeds.• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.• Combine errands and minimize

stop-and-go driving (When runningerrands, go to the furthest destinationfirst and then work your way backhome).

• Close the windows for high-speeddriving.

• Drive at reasonable speeds.• Keep the tires properly inflated and use

only the recommended size.• Use the recommended engine oil.• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.There are also some things you may wantto avoid doing because they reduce yourfuel economy:• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.• Avoid revving the engine before turning

off the car.• Avoid long idle periods.• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.• Reduce the use of air conditioning and

heat.• Avoid using speed control in hilly

terrain.• Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.• Avoid adding particular accessories to

your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,rollbars/light bars, running boards, skiracks).

• Avoid driving with the wheels out ofalignment.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).

BREAKING-INYou need to break in new tires forapproximately 300 mi (480 km). Duringthis time, your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.Avoid driving too fast during the first1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speedfrequently and change up through thegears early. Do not labor the engine.Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi(1,600 km).

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNING: Do not drive throughflowing or deep water as you may losecontrol of your vehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water cancause vehicle damage.Note: Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.Before driving through standing water,check the depth. Never drive through waterthat is higher than the bottom of the frontrocker area of your vehicle.

253


Driving Hints

E266447

When driving through standing water, drivevery slowly and do not stop your vehicle.Your brake performance and traction maybe limited. After driving through water andas soon as it is safe to do so:• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the

brakes and to check that they work.• Check that the horn works.• Check that the exterior lights work.• Turn the steering wheel to check that

the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING: Use a floor matdesigned to fit the footwell of yourvehicle that does not obstruct the pedalarea. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Pedals that cannotmove freely can cause loss of vehiclecontrol and increase the risk of seriouspersonal injury.

WARNING: Secure the floor matto both retention devices so that itcannot slip out of position and interferewith the pedals. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in the loss ofcontrol of your vehicle, personal injury ordeath.

WARNING: Do not place additionalfloor mats or any other covering on topof the original floor mats. This couldresult in the floor mat interfering with theoperation of the pedals. Failure to followthis instruction could result in the loss ofcontrol of your vehicle, personal injury ordeath.

WARNING: Always make sure thatobjects cannot fall into the driver footwell while your vehicle is moving. Objectsthat are loose can become trappedunder the pedals causing a loss ofvehicle control.

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floormat eyelet over the retention post andpress down to lock in position.To remove the floor mat, reverse theinstallation procedure.Note: Regularly check the floor mats tomake sure they are secure.

254


Driving Hints

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEVehicles Sold in the United States:Getting Roadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Companyoffers a complimentary roadsideassistance program. This program isseparate from the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.The service is available:• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.• For the coverage period supplied with

your vehicle.Roadside Assistance covers:• A flat tire change with a good spare

(except vehicles supplied with a tireinflation kit).

• Battery jump start.• Lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).• Fuel delivery — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall deliver upto 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.Roadside Assistance limits fuel deliveryservice to two no-charge occurrenceswithin a 12-month period.

• Winch out — available within 100 ft(30 m) of a paved or countymaintained road, no recoveries.

• Towing — independent servicecontractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall tow Fordeligible vehicles to an authorized dealerwithin 35 mi (56 km) of thedisablement location or to the nearestauthorized dealer. If a memberrequests a tow to an authorized dealerthat is more than 35 mi (56 km) fromthe disablement location, the membershall be responsible for any mileagecosts in excess of 35 mi (56 km).

• Roadside Assistance includes up to$200 for a towed trailer if the disabledeligible vehicle requires service at thenearest authorized dealer. If the towingvehicle is operational but the trailer isnot, then the trailer does not qualify forany roadside services.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:Using Roadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference. This card is inthe Owner's Manual kit.United States vehicle customers whorequire Roadside Assistance, call1-800-241-3673.If you need to arrange roadside assistancefor yourself, Ford Motor Companyreimburses a reasonable amount fortowing to the nearest dealership within35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursementinformation, United States vehiclecustomers call 1-800-241-3673.Customers need to submit their originalreceipts.

255


Roadside Emergencies

Vehicles Sold in Canada: GettingRoadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited offers a complimentaryroadside assistance program. This programis eligible within Canada or the continentalUnited States.The service is available 24 hours a day,seven days a week.This program is separate from the NewVehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverageis concurrent with the powertrain coverageperiod of your vehicle. Canadian roadsidecoverage and benefits may differ from theU.S. coverage.If you require more information, please callus in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visitour website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHERSNote: The hazard flashers operate whenthe ignition is in any position, or if the key isnot in the ignition. If used when the vehicleis not running, the battery loses charge. Asa result, there may be insufficient power torestart your vehicle.

The flasher control is on theinstrument panel. Use yourhazard flashers when your

vehicle is creating a safety hazard for othermotorists.

• Press the flasher control and all frontand rear direction indicators flash.

• Press the button again to switch themoff.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNING: If your vehicle has beeninvolved in a crash, have the fuel systemchecked. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in fire, personal injury ordeath.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicleafter a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes surethat various systems are safe to restart.Once the vehicle determines the systemsare safe, then the vehicle allows you torestart.Note: In the event that your vehicle doesnot restart after your third attempt, contacta qualified technician.The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow offuel to the engine in the event of amoderate to severe crash. Not everyimpact causes a shutoff.Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,you may restart your vehicle.1. Press START/STOP to switch off your

vehicle.2. Press the brake pedal and

START/STOP to switch on yourvehicle.

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedaland press START/STOP to switch offyour vehicle.

4. You can attempt to start the vehicleby pressing the brake pedal andSTART/STOP, or press START/STOPwithout pressing the brake pedal.

5. If the vehicle does not start, repeatsteps 1 through 4.

256



JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNING: Keep batteries out ofreach of children. Batteries containsulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes whenworking near the battery to protectagainst possible splashing of acidsolution. In case of acid contact with skinor eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed,call a physician immediately.

WARNING: Batteries normallyproduce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do notallow flames, sparks or lightedsubstances to come near the battery.When working near the battery, alwaysshield your face and protect your eyes.Always provide correct ventilation.

WARNING: Use only the specifiedjacking points. If you use other positions,you may damage the body, steering,suspension, engine, braking system orthe fuel lines.

WARNING: Use only adequatelysized cables with insulated clamps.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicle's electrical system.

Preparing Your VehicleDo not attempt to push-start yourautomatic transmission vehicle.Note: Attempting to push-start a vehiclewith an automatic transmission may causetransmission damage.Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start yourvehicle.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicle electrical system.Park the booster vehicle close to the hoodof the disabled vehicle, making sure thetwo vehicles do not touch.

To Connect the Booster Cables

WARNING: Make sure that thecables are clear of any moving parts andfuel delivery system parts.

WARNING: Do not connect the endof the second cable to the negative (-)terminal of the battery to be jumped. Aspark may cause an explosion of thegases that surround the battery.

Note: In the illustration that follows, thebottom vehicle represents the boostervehicle.

257



A

B

C D

E102925

Flat battery vehicle.ABooster battery vehicle.BPositive connection cable.CNegative connection cable.D

Park the booster vehicle close to the hoodof the disabled vehicle, making sure thetwo vehicles do not touch.1. Switch off the engine and any electrical

equipment.2. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of thedischarged battery.

E152134

3. Make the final connection of thenegative (-) cable to an exposed metalpart of the stalled vehicle's engine,away from the battery and the fuelinjection system, or connect thenegative (-) cable to a groundconnection point if available.

To Start the Engine1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and rev the engine moderately, or pressthe accelerator gently to keep yourengine speed between 2000 and 3000RPM, as shown in your tachometer.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both vehicle engines for anadditional three minutes beforedisconnecting the jumper cables.

Remove the jumper cables in the reverseorder that they were connected.Note: Do not switch the headlamps onwhen disconnecting the cables. The peakvoltage could blow the bulbs.

258



POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMThe system flashes the direction indicatorsand sounds the horn (intermittently) in theevent of a serious impact that deploys anairbag (front, side, side curtain or SafetyCanopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.The horn and indicators turn off when:• You press the hazard control button.• You press the panic button on the

remote entry transmitter (if equipped).• Your vehicle runs out of power.• Sounding of the horn is only enabled

in specific markets.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or,if you are a member of a roadsideassistance program, your roadsideassistance service provider.We recommend the use of a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment to tow yourvehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. FordMotor Company has not approved aslingbelt towing procedure. Vehicledamage may occur if towed incorrectly, orby any other means.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truckoperators. Have your tow truck operatorrefer to this manual for proper hook-upand towing procedures for your vehicle.It is acceptable to have your front-wheeldrive vehicle towed from the front if usingproper wheel lift equipment to raise thefront wheels off the ground. When towingin this manner, the rear wheels can remainon the ground.Front-wheel drive vehicles must have thefront wheels placed on a tow dolly whentowing your vehicle from the rear usingwheel lift equipment. This preventsdamage to the transmission.Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drivevehicle requires that all wheels be off theground, such as using a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment. This preventsdamage to the transmission, all-wheel orfour-wheel drive system and vehicle.

259



GETTING THE SERVICES YOUNEEDWarranty repairs to your vehicle must beperformed by an authorized dealer. Whileany authorized dealer handling your vehicleline will provide warranty service, werecommend you return to your sellingauthorized dealer who wants to ensureyour continued satisfaction.Please note that certain warranty repairsrequire special training and equipment, sonot all authorized dealers are authorizedto perform all warranty repairs. This meansthat, depending on the warranty repairneeded, you may have to take your vehicleto another authorized dealer.A reasonable time must be allowed toperform a repair after taking your vehicleto the authorized dealer. Repairs will bemade using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, orremanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Ford.

Away From HomeIf you are away from home when yourvehicle needs service, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center or use theonline resources listed below to find thenearest authorized dealer.In the United States:Mailing addressFord Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 48126Telephone1-800-392-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired:1-800-232-5952)If your vehicle is configured as amotorhome please call 1-800-444-3311for support.

Additional information and resources areavailable online:

Website

www.owner.ford.com

These are some of the items that can befound online:• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State or Zip Code.• Owner Manuals.• Maintenance Schedules.• Recalls.• Ford Extended Service Plans.• Ford Genuine Accessories.• Service specials and promotions.In Canada:Mailing addressCustomer Relationship CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8Telephone1-800-565-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired:1-888-658-6805)

Website

www.ford.ca

FacebookFordServiceCA (English)FordServiceQC (Français)Twitter@FordServiceCA

260


Customer Assistance

Additional AssistanceIf you have questions or concerns, or areunsatisfied with the service you arereceiving, follow these steps:1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling orservicing authorized dealer.

2. If your inquiry or concern remainsunresolved, contact the Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager.

3. If you require assistance or clarificationon Ford Motor Company policies,please contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center.

In order to help us serve you better, pleasehave the following information availablewhen contacting a Customer RelationshipCenter:• Vehicle Identification Number.• Your telephone number (home and

business).• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.In some states within the United States,you must directly notify Ford in writingbefore pursuing remedies under yourstate's warranty laws, and Ford is alsoallowed a final repair attempt.Additionally, in some states within theUnited States, a consumer has the optionof submitting a warranty dispute to theBBB Auto Line before taking action underthe Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or tothe extent allowed by state law, beforepursuing replacement or repurchaseremedies provided by certain state laws.This dispute handling procedure is notrequired prior to enforcing state createdrights or other rights which are independentof the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act orstate replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)requires that, if a manufacturer or itsrepresentative is unable to repair a motorvehicle to conform to the vehicle’sapplicable express warranty after areasonable number of attempts, themanufacturer shall be required to eitherreplace the vehicle with one substantiallyidentical or repurchase the vehicle andreimburse the buyer in an amount equal tothe actual price paid or payable by theconsumer (less a reasonable allowancefor consumer use). The consumer has theright to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)presumes that the manufacturer has hada reasonable number of attempts toconform the vehicle to its applicableexpress warranties if, within the first 18months of ownership of a new vehicle orthe first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whicheveroccurs first:1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely tocause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are madeon the same nonconformity (a defector condition that substantially impairsthe use, value or safety of the vehicle)OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repairof nonconformities for a total of morethan 30 calendar days (not necessarilyall at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumermust also notify the manufacturer of theneed for the repair of the nonconformityat the following address:Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126

261


Customer Assistance

You are required to submit your warrantydispute to BBB AUTO LINE before assertingin court any rights or remedies conferredby California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).You are also required to use BBB AUTOLINE before exercising rights or seekingremedies created by the FederalMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seekredress by pursuing rights and remediesnot created by California Civil Code Section1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE isnot required by those statutes.

THE BETTER BUSINESSBUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINEPROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to FordMotor Company and to your dealer. If awarranty concern has not been resolvedusing the three-step procedure outlinedearlier in this chapter in the Getting theServices you need section, you may beeligible to participate in the BBB AUTOLINE program.The BBB AUTO LINE program consists oftwo parts – mediation and arbitration.During mediation, a representative of theBBB will contact both you and Ford MotorCompany to explore options for settlementof the claim. If an agreement is not reachedduring mediation or you do not want toparticipate in mediation, and if your claimis eligible, you may participate in thearbitration process. An arbitration hearingwill be scheduled so that you can presentyour case in an informal setting before animpartial person. The arbitrator willconsider the testimony provided and makea decision after the hearing.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEprogram are usually decided within fortydays after you file your claim with the BBB.You are not bound by the decision, andmay reject the decision and proceed tocourt where all findings of the BBB AutoLine dispute, and decision, are admissiblein the court action. Should you choose toaccept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Fordis then bound by the decision, and mustcomply with the decision within 30 daysof receipt of your acceptance letter.BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using theinformation provided below, please call orwrite to request a program application.You will be asked for your name andaddress, general information about yournew vehicle, information about yourwarranty concerns, and any steps you havealready taken to try to resolve them. ACustomer Claim Form will be mailed thatwill need to be completed, signed andreturned to the BBB along with proof ofownership. Upon receipt, the BBB willreview the claim for eligibility under theProgram Summary Guidelines.You can get more information bycalling BBB AUTO LINE at1-800-955-5100, or writing to:BBB AUTO LINE3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600Arlington, Virginia 22201BBB AUTO LINE applications can also berequested by calling the Ford MotorCompany Customer Relationship Centerat 1-800-392-3673.For additional information refer to theBetter Business Bureau website.Note: Ford Motor Company reserves theright to change eligibility limitations, modifyprocedures, or to discontinue this processat any time without notice and withoutobligation.

262


Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THEMEDIATION/ARBITRATIONPROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorizedCanadian dealers. In those cases whereyou continue to feel that the efforts by Fordof Canada and the authorized dealer toresolve a factory-related vehicle serviceconcern have been unsatisfactory, Ford ofCanada participates in an impartial thirdparty mediation/arbitration programadministered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).The CAMVAP program is a straight forwardand relatively speedy alternative to resolvea disagreement when all other efforts toproduce a settlement have failed. Thisprocedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthyand expensive legal proceedings.In the CAMVAP program, impartialthird-party arbitrators conduct hearings atmutually convenient times and places inan informal environment. These impartialarbitrators review the positions of theparties, make decisions and, whenappropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,and final as the arbitrator’s award isbinding on both you and Ford of Canada.CAMVAP services are available in allCanadian territories and provinces. Formore information, without charge orobligation, call your CAMVAP ProvincialAdministrator directly at 1-800-207-0685or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCEOUTSIDE THE U.S. ANDCANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreignembassy or consulate. These officials caninform you of local vehicle registrationregulations and where to find unleadedfuel or petrol/gas engines or the propersulfur fuel for diesel engines.If you cannot find the proper fuelrecommended for your vehicle, contactour Customer Relationship Center.The use of improper fuels in your vehiclewithout proper conversion may damagethe effectiveness of your emission controlsystem and may cause engine knocking orserious engine damage. Ford MotorCompany or Ford of Canada is notresponsible for any damage caused by useof improper fuel. Using improper fuels mayalso result in difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the United States.If your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islandsand/or Puerto Rico, Central America, theCaribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact the corresponding Ford CustomerAssistance Center:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Centers in:

263


Customer Assistance

E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relation-ship Center

[email protected]/AN/AAsia Pacific

[email protected]/A+1-800-841-3673Caribbean andCentral America

[email protected] 4 3327 266

Ford

Middle East

80004443673

Lincoln80004441067

UAE80004441066

Saudi Arabia8008443673

Mobily and Zain cellphone users in Saudi

800850078

Kuwait22280384

[email protected]/AN/ANorth Africa

[email protected]/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands

[email protected]/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa

[email protected] [email protected]/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea

If you buy your vehicle in North Americaand then relocate to any of the abovelocations, register your vehicleidentification number (VIN) and newaddress with Ford Global Trade Servicesby emailing, [email protected].

If you are in another foreign country,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Inthe event your inquiry is unresolved,communicate your concern with thedealership’s Sales Manager, ServiceManager or Customer Relations Manager.If you require additional assistance orclarification, please contact the respectiveCustomer Relationship Center aspreviously listed.Customers in the U.S. should call1-800-392-3673.

264


Customer Assistance

ORDERING ADDITIONALOWNER'S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio,contact Helm, Incorporated at:HELM, INCORPORATED47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, Michigan 48170Attention: Customer ServiceOr to order a free publication catalog, calltoll free: 1-800-782-4356Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. ESTHelm, Incorporated can also be reachedby their website:www.helminc.com(Items in this catalog may be purchasedby credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’sManualFrench Owner’s Manual can be obtainedfrom your authorized dealer or bycontacting Helm, Incorporated using thecontact information listed previously in thissection.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(U.S. ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingFord Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Ford MotorCompany.To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go towww.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator1200 New Jersey Avenue,SoutheastWashington, D.C. 20590You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform Transport Canada and Ford ofCanada.

265


Customer Assistance

www.safercar.gov

www.safercar.gov

Transport Canada Contact Information

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)

Website

1-800-333-0510Phone

Ford of Canada Contact Information

www.ford.caWebsite

1-800-565-3673Phone

266


Customer Assistance

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTPower Distribution Box

WARNING: Always disconnect thebattery before servicing high currentfuses.

WARNING: To reduce risk ofelectrical shock, always replace thecover to the power distribution boxbefore reconnecting the battery orrefilling fluid reservoirs.

Note: There is a 40A fuse on the cowl sideengine harness that controls the all wheeldrive module. If this fuse requires service,see an authorized dealer.The power distribution box is in the enginecompartment. It has high-current fusesthat protect your vehicle's main electricalsystems from overloads.If the battery has been disconnected andreconnected, some features need to bereset. See Changing the 12V Battery(page 291).

E190797

267


Fuses

Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or RelayNumber

Not used (spare).30A11

Starter relay.—2

Rear wiper.15A23Rain sensor.Rear washer pump relay coil.

Blower motor relay.—4

Power point 3 - back of console.20A15

Not used.—6

Powertrain control module - vehicle power1.20A27


Powertrain control module relay.—9

Power point 1 - driver front.20A110



All wheel drive module relay coil.

Not used.—13

Not used.—14

Run-start relay.—15

Power point 2 - console bin.20A116

Power point 4 - luggage compartment.20A117


Run-start electronic power assist steering.10A219

268


Fuses


Headlamp leveling motors.10A220


Air conditioner clutch solenoid.10A222

Run-start 6.15A223Blind spot information system.Rear view camera.Voltage quality module (start/stop).Front split view camera.Front split view camera module.


Run-start anti-lock brake system.10A325

Run-start powertrain control module.10A326

Not used.—27

Rear washer pump.10A228


Not used.—30

Not used.—31

Electronic fan 1 relay.—32

A/C clutch relay.—33


Not used.—35

Not used.—36

Power transfer unit fan.10A237



Horn relay.—40

269


Fuses


Low beam assumption relay.—41

Fuel pump relay.—42

2nd row easy fold seat release.15A243


Not used.—45

Not used.—46

Not used.—47

Steering column lock relay power.15A248

Not used.—49

Horn.20A250

Not used.—51

Not used.—52

Not used.—53

Brake on off switch.10A354

Alternator sensor.10A355

Not used.–861 M case fuse.2 Micro 2 fuse.3 Micro 3 fuse.

Power Distribution Box - BottomThere are fuses on the bottom of the fusebox. To access the bottom of the fuse box,do the following:

270


Fuses

E145983

1. Release the latches on both sides ofthe fuse box.

2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse boxfrom the cradle.

3. Move the fuse box toward the centerof the engine compartment.

4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse boxto access the bottom side.

E190798

271


Fuses


Not used.—56

Not used.—57

Fuel pump feed.30A158

Electronic fan 3.40A259


Not used.—61

Body control module 1.50A262


Not used.—64

Front heated seat.20A165

Heated wiper park.15A166

Body control module 2.50A267

Heated rear window.40A168

Anti-lock brake system valves.30A169

Passenger seat.30A170

Not used.—71


Rear heated seats.20A173

Driver seat module.30A174Power driver seat (less memory).

Wiper motor 1.25A175

Power liftgate module.30A176

272


Fuses


Climate control seat module.30A177

Trailer lighting module.40A178

Blower motor.40A279

Wiper motor 2.25A180

110 volt inverter.40A181

Not used.–82


Starter solenoid.30A184

Not used.—85

Anti-lock brake system pump.60A287

1 M case fuse.2 J case fuse.

Passenger Compartment FusePanelThe fuse panel is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering column.

Note: It may be easier to access the fusepanel if you remove the finish trim piece.

273


Fuses

E145984


Not used.-1

Memory seats.7.5A12Lumbar.Wireless charger.

Driver door unlock.20A13


Audio amplifier.20A15

Not used (spare).10A 26




Keypad.5A210Power liftgate module logic power.Hands free liftgate module.

274


Fuses


Embedded modem.


Climate control module.7.5A212Gear shift module.

Cluster.7.5A213Steering column control module.Smart datalink connector (gateway)module.

Extended power module.10A214

Datalink power.10A215



Push button start switch.5A218

Extended power module.7.5A219

Not used (spare).7.5A220

Humidity and in–car temperature sensor.5A 221

Occupant classification system.5A222

Delayed accessory (power inverter logic,moonroof logic, driver window switchpower).

10A123

Central lock/unlock.20A124

Driver door (window, mirror).30A125Driver door module.Driver door lock indicator.Driver lock switch illumination.

Front passenger door (window, mirror).30A126Front passenger door module.Front passenger lock indicator.

275


Fuses


Front passenger switch illumination(window, lock).

Moonroof.30A127

Amplifier.20A128




Center stack display.10A132Voice control (SYNC).Radio transceiver module.

Radio.20A133

Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37,circuit breaker 38).30A134


Auto-dimming rear view mirror.15A136Auto high beam/lane departure mirrormodule.Rear heated seat module logic power.

Heated steering wheel module.20A137Active front steering wheel.

Rear power windows.30A338Rear window switch illumination.

1 Micro 2 fuse.2 Micro 3 fuse.3 Circuit breaker.

276


Fuses

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNING: Always replace a fusewith one that has the specifiedamperage rating. Using a fuse with ahigher amperage rating can cause severewire damage and could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle arenot working, a fuse may have blown. Blownfuses are identified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriate fusesbefore replacing any electricalcomponents.

Fuse Types

E207206

Fuse TypeCallout

Micro 2A

Micro 3B

MaxiC

MiniD

277


Fuses

Fuse TypeCallout

M CaseE

J CaseF

J Case Low ProfileG

278


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network ofauthorized dealers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialized tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.If your vehicle requires professional service,an authorized dealer can provide thenecessary parts and service. Check yourwarranty information to find out whichparts and services are covered.Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,fluids and service parts conforming tospecifications. Motorcraft® parts aredesigned and built to provide the bestperformance in your vehicle.

Precautions• Do not work on a hot engine.• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burningmaterial (such as cigarettes) awayfrom the battery and all fuel relatedparts.

Working with the Engine Off1. Set the parking brake and shift the

transmission to park (P).2. Switch off the engine.3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofvehicle damage and personal burninjuries, do not start your engine with theair cleaner removed and do not removeit while the engine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift thetransmission to park (P).

2. Block the wheels.

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOODOpening the Hood

E142457

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the left-handside of the instrument panel.

279


Maintenance

E277804

2. Slightly lift the hood.3. Release the hood latch by pushing the

secondary release lever to yourleft-hand side.

E191432

4

4. Open the hood. The hood strutautomatically supports the hood.

Closing the Hood1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop

under its own weight for the last8–12 in (20–30 cm).

Note: Make sure that the hood is correctlyclosed.

280


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

E294775

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 286).AEngine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 283).BEngine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 283).CBrake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 290).DBattery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 291).EPower distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 277).FAir filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 285).GWindshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 294).H

281


Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

E273095

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 286).ABrake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 290).BBattery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 291).CPower distribution box. See Fuses (page 267).DAir filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 285).EEngine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 283).FEngine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 283).GWindshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 294).H

282


Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LECOBOOST™

E270482

Minimum.ANominal.BMaximum.C

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.7LECOBOOST™

E250320

Minimum.ANominal.BMaximum.C

ENGINE OIL CHECK

WARNING: Do not work on a hotengine.

To check the engine oil level consistentlyand accurately, do the following:1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make

sure the transmission is in park (P) orneutral (N).

2. Run the engine until it reaches normaloperating temperature.

3. Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.

4. Switch the engine off and wait 15minutes for the oil to drain into the oilpan. Checking the engine oil level toosoon after you switch the engine offmay result in an inaccurate reading.

5. Open the hood. See Opening andClosing the Hood (page 279).

6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint-free cloth. See UnderHood Overview (page 281).

7. Reinstall the dipstick and remove itagain to check the oil level. SeeEngine Oil Dipstick (page 283).

8. Make sure that the oil level is betweenthe maximum and minimum marks. Ifthe oil level is at the minimum mark,add oil immediately. See Capacitiesand Specifications (page 348).

9. If the oil level is correct, replace thedipstick and make sure it is fully seated.

Note: Do not remove the dipstick when theengine is running.Note: If the oil level is between themaximum and minimum marks, the oil levelis acceptable. Do not add oil.Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately3,000 mi (5,000 km).

283


Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil

WARNING: Do not remove the fillercap when the engine is running.

WARNING: Do not add engine oilwhen the engine is hot. Failure to followthis instruction could result in personalinjury.

Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage that maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

E142732

Only use oils certified for gasoline enginesby the American Petroleum Institute (API).An oil with this trademark symbolconforms to the current engine andemission system protection standards andfuel economy requirements of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Committee (ILSAC).To top up the engine oil level do thefollowing:1. Clean the area surrounding the engine

oil filler cap before you remove it.2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See

Under Hood Overview (page 281).Turn it counterclockwise and removeit.

3. Add engine oil that meets ourspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 348). You mayhave to use a funnel to pour the engineoil into the opening.

4. Recheck the oil level.5. If the oil level is correct, replace the

dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn

it clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than themaximum mark. Oil levels above themaximum mark may cause engine damage.Note: Make sure you install the oil filler capcorrectly.Note: Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately.

OIL CHANGE INDICATORRESETUse the information display controls onthe steering wheel to reset the oil changeindicator.

From the main menu scroll to:

Action and descriptionMessage

Press the right arrow button,then from this menu scrollto the following message.

Settings


Vehicle


Oil Life

Press and hold the OKbutton until the instrumentcluster displays thefollowing message.

Hold OK toReset

284


Maintenance

Action and descriptionMessage

Reset Successful

When the oil change indic-ator resets the instrumentcluster displays 100%.

Remaining Life

{00}%

If the instrument clusterdisplays one of the followingmessages, repeat theprocess.

Not Reset

Reset Cancelled

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIRFILTER

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofvehicle damage and personal burninjuries, do not start your engine with theair cleaner removed and do not removeit while the engine is running.

When changing the air filter element, useonly the air filter element listed. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page343).For turbocharged equipped vehicles: Whenservicing the air cleaner, it is important thatno foreign material enter the air inductionsystem. The engine and turbocharger aresusceptible to damage from even smallparticles.Change the air filter element at the properinterval. See Scheduled Maintenance(page 431).

Note: Failure to use the correct air filterelement may result in severe enginedamage. The customer warranty may bevoid for any damage to the engine if thecorrect air filter element is not used.

E144365

1. Release the clamps that secure the airfilter housing cover.

2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.3. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter

housing and cover to make sure no dirtgets in the engine and to make sure youhave a good seal.

5. Install a new air filter element. Becareful not to crimp the filter elementedges between the air filter housingand cover. This could cause filterdamage and allow unfiltered air toenter the engine if not properly seated.

6. Install the air filter housing cover.7. Engage the clamps to secure the air

filter housing cover to the air filterhousing.

285


Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK


WARNING: Do not put coolant inthe windshield washer reservoir. Ifsprayed on the windshield, coolant couldmake it difficult to see through thewindshield.

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofpersonal injury, make sure the engine iscool before unscrewing the coolantpressure relief cap. The cooling systemis under pressure. Steam and hot liquidcan come out forcefully when you loosenthe cap slightly.

WARNING: Do not add coolantfurther than the MAX mark.

When the engine is cold, check theconcentration and level of the coolant atthe intervals listed in the scheduledmaintenance information. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 431).Note: Make sure that the coolant level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks on thecoolant reservoir.Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Maintain coolant concentration within48% to 50%, which equates to a freezepoint between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F(-37°C). Coolant concentration should bechecked using a refractometer. We do notrecommend the use of hydrometers orcoolant test strips for measuring coolantconcentration.

Adding Coolant


WARNING: Do not add enginecoolant when the engine is on or thecooling system is hot. Failure to followthis instruction could result in personalinjury.

Note: Automotive fluids are notinterchangeable. Take care not to putengine coolant in the windshield washerfluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid inthe engine coolant reservoir.Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants, or non-specified additivesas they can cause damage to the enginecooling or heating systems. Resultingcomponent damage may not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.

286


Maintenance

It is very important to use predilutedcoolant approved to the correctspecification in order to avoid plugging thesmall passageways in the engine coolingsystem. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 343). Do not mixdifferent colors or types of coolant in yourvehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or usingan incorrect coolant may harm the engineor cooling system components and maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,use the approved concentrated coolantdiluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page 343).Using water that has not been deionisedmay contribute to deposit formation,corrosion and plugging of the small coolingsystem passageways.Note: Coolants marketed for all makes andmodels may not be approved to ourspecifications and may cause damage tothe cooling system. Resulting componentdamage may not be covered by the vehicleWarranty.If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.To top up the coolant level do thefollowing:1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure

escapes as you unscrew the cap.2. Add prediluted coolant approved to

the correct specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page343).

3. Add enough prediluted coolant toreach the correct level.

4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turnthe cap clockwise until it contacts thehard stop.

5. Check the coolant level in the coolantreservoir the next few times you driveyour vehicle. If necessary, add enoughprediluted engine coolant to bring thecoolant level to the correct level.

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) ofengine coolant per month, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.Operating an engine with a low level ofcoolant can result in engine overheatingand possible engine damage.In case of emergency, you can add a largeamount of water without engine coolantin order to reach a vehicle service location.In this instance, qualified personnel:1. Must drain the cooling system.2. Chemically clean the coolant system.3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as

possible.Water alone, without engine coolant, cancause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.Do not use the following as a coolantsubstitute:• Alcohol.• Methanol.• Brine.• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or

methanol antifreeze.Alcohol and other liquids can cause enginedamage from overheating or freezing.Do not add extra inhibitors or additives tothe coolant. These can be harmful andcompromise the corrosion protection ofthe coolant.

Recycled CoolantWe do not recommend the use of recycledcoolant as an approved recycling processis not yet available.

287


Maintenance

Dispose of used engine coolant in anappropriate manner. Follow yourcommunity's regulations and standardsfor recycling and disposing of automotivefluids.

Severe ClimatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates:• It may be necessary to increase the

coolant concentration above 50%.• A coolant concentration of 60%

provides improved freeze pointprotection. Coolant concentrationsabove 60% decrease the overheatprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:• You can decrease the coolant

concentration to 40%.• Coolant concentrations below 40%

decrease the freeze and corrosionprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extremeclimates should use prediluted coolant foroptimum cooling system and engineprotection.

Coolant ChangeAt specific mileage intervals, as listed inthe scheduled maintenance information,the coolant should be changed. Addprediluted coolant approved to the correctspecification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 343).

Fail-Safe CoolingFail-safe cooling allows you to temporarilydrive your vehicle before any incrementalcomponent damage occurs. The fail-safedistance depends on ambienttemperature, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling WorksIf the engine begins to overheat,the coolant temperature gaugemoves toward the red zone:

A warning lamp illuminates anda message may appear in theinformation display.

If the engine reaches a presetover-temperature condition, the engineautomatically switches to alternatingcylinder operation. Each disabled cylinderacts as an air pump and cools the engine.When this occurs, your vehicle stilloperates, however:• Engine power is limited.• The air conditioning system turns off.Continued operation increases the enginetemperature, causing the engine tocompletely shut down. Your steering andbraking effort increases in this situation.When the engine temperature cools, youcan re-start the engine. Have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible to minimizeengine damage.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNING: Fail-safe mode is foruse during emergencies only. Operateyour vehicle in fail-safe mode only aslong as necessary to bring your vehicleto rest in a safe location and seekimmediate repairs. When in fail-safemode, your vehicle will have limitedpower, will not be able to maintainhigh-speed operation, and maycompletely shut down without warning,potentially losing engine power, powersteering assist, and power brake assist,which may increase the possibility of acrash resulting in serious injury.

288


Maintenance


Your vehicle has limited engine powerwhen in the fail-safe mode, drive yourvehicle with caution. Your vehicle does notmaintain high-speed operation and theengine may operate poorly.Remember that the engine is capable ofautomatically shutting down to preventengine damage. In this situation:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and switch the engine off.2. If you are a member of a roadside

assistance program, we recommendthat you contact your roadsideassistance service provider.

3. If this is not possible, wait a shortperiod for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level. If the coolantlevel is at or below the minimum mark,add prediluted coolant immediately.

5. When the engine temperature cools,you can re-start the engine. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible tominimize engine damage.

Note: Driving your vehicle without repairincreases the chance of engine damage.

Engine Coolant TemperatureManagement (If Equipped)

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofcrash and injury, be prepared that thevehicle speed may reduce and thevehicle may not be able to acceleratewith full power until the coolanttemperature reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, theengine may temporarily reach a highertemperature during severe operatingconditions, for example ascending a longor steep grade in high ambienttemperatures.At this time, you may notice the coolanttemperature gauge moves toward the redzone and a message may appear in theinformation display.You may notice a reduction in vehiclespeed caused by reduced engine power inorder to manage the engine coolanttemperature. Your vehicle may enter thismode if certain high-temperature andhigh-load conditions take place. Theamount of speed reduction depends onvehicle loading, grade and ambienttemperature. If this occurs, there is noneed to stop your vehicle. You cancontinue to drive.The air conditioning may automaticallyturn on and off during severe operatingconditions to protect the engine fromoverheating. When the coolanttemperature decreases to the normaloperating temperature, the air conditioningturns on.If the coolant temperature gauge movesfully into the red zone, or if the coolanttemperature warning or service enginesoon messages appear in your informationdisplay, do the following:

289


Maintenance

1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Fully apply the parking brake,shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

2. Leave the engine running until thecoolant temperature gauge needlereturns to the normal position. If thetemperature does not drop afterseveral minutes, follow the remainingsteps.

3. Switch the engine off and wait for it tocool. Check the coolant level.

4. If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.

5. If the coolant level is normal, restartthe engine and continue.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECKNote: Transmission fluid should be checkedby an authorized dealer. If required, fluidshould be added by an authorized dealer.Have an authorized dealer check andchange the transmission fluid at thecorrect service interval. See Maintenance(page 279). Your transmission does notconsume fluid. However, the fluid levelshould be checked if the transmission isnot working properly, (i.e., if thetransmission slips or shifts slowly) or if younotice some sign of fluid leakage.Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives, treatments or cleaningagents. The use of these materials mayaffect transmission operation and resultin damage to internal transmissioncomponents.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNING: Do not use any fluidother than the recommended brake fluidas this will reduce brake efficiency. Useof incorrect fluid could result in the lossof vehicle control, serious personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Only use brake fluidfrom a sealed container. Contaminationwith dirt, water, petroleum products orother materials may result in brakesystem damage or failure. Failure toadhere to this warning could result in theloss of vehicle control, serious personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Do not allow the fluidto touch your skin or eyes. If thishappens, rinse the affected areasimmediately with plenty of water andcontact your physician.

WARNING: The brake systemcould be affected if the brake fluid levelis below the MIN mark or above the MAXmark on the brake fluid reservoir.

290


Maintenance

E170684

1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see

where the brake fluid level is relativeto the MIN and the MAX marks on thereservoir.

Note: If the brake fluid level is between theMIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, itis acceptable.Note: If the brake fluid level is below theMIN mark or above the MAX mark, haveyour vehicle checked as soon as possible.Note: To avoid fluid contamination, thereservoir cap must remain in place and fullytight, unless you are adding fluid.Only use fluid that meets ourspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 343).

Brake Fluid Service IntervalBrake fluid absorbs water over time whichdegrades the effectiveness of the brakefluid. Change the brake fluid at thespecified intervals to prevent degradedbraking performance.

For detailed interval information, seeScheduled Maintenance in your Owner'sManual or your local maintenance guide.

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECKYour vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering (EPS) system. There is nofluid reservoir to check or fill.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNING: Batteries normallyproduce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do notallow flames, sparks or lightedsubstances to come near the battery.When working near the battery, alwaysshield your face and protect your eyes.Always provide correct ventilation.

WARNING: When lifting aplastic-cased battery, excessive pressureon the end walls could cause acid to flowthrough the vent caps, resulting inpersonal injury and damage to thevehicle or battery. Lift the battery with abattery carrier or with your hands onopposite corners.

WARNING: Keep batteries out ofreach of children. Batteries containsulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes whenworking near the battery to protectagainst possible splashing of acidsolution. In case of acid contact with skinor eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed,call a physician immediately.

291


Maintenance

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash your handsafter handling.

Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®maintenance-free battery which normallydoes not require additional water duringits life of service.Note: If your vehicle's battery has a coveror shield, make sure it is reinstalled after thebattery has been cleaned or replaced.Note: See an authorized dealer for lowvoltage battery access, testing, orreplacement.When a low voltage battery replacementis necessary, see an authorized dealer toreplace the low voltage battery with a Fordrecommended replacement low voltagebattery that matches the electricalrequirements of the vehicle.To ensure proper operation of the batterymanagement system (BMS), do not allowa technician to connect any electricaldevice ground connection directly to thelow voltage battery negative post. Aconnection at the low voltage batterynegative post can cause inaccuratemeasurements of the battery conditionand potential incorrect system operation.Note: If a person adds electrical orelectronic accessories or components to thevehicle, the accessories or components mayadversely affect the low voltage batteryperformance and durability and may alsoaffect the performance of other electricalsystems in the vehicle.For longer, trouble-free operation, keep thetop of the battery clean and dry. Also,make certain the battery cables are alwaystightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery orterminals, remove the cables from theterminals and clean with a wire brush. Youcan neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water.When a battery replacement is required,the battery should only be replaced witha Ford recommended replacement batterythat matches the electrical requirementsof the vehicle.Because your vehicle’s engine iselectronically-controlled by a computer,some engine control settings aremaintained by power from the low voltagebattery. Some engine computer settings,like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,optimize the driveability and performanceof the engine. Some other computersettings, like the clock and radio stationpresets, are also maintained in memory bypower from the low voltage battery. Whena technician disconnects and connects thelow voltage battery, these settings areerased. Complete the following procedurein order to restore the settings:1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,

set the parking brake.2. Shift the transmission into park (P).3. Switch off all accessories.4. Fully press the brake pedal and start

the vehicle.5. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature. While theengine is warming up, complete thefollowing: Reset the clock. See AudioSystem (page 374). Reset the powerwindows bounce-back feature. SeeWindows and Mirrors (page 93).Reset the radio station presets. SeeAudio System (page 374).

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute. If the engine turns off, pressthe accelerator pedal to start theengine.

292


Maintenance

7. While the engine is running, press thebrake pedal and shift into neutral (N).

8. Allow the engine to run for at least oneminute by pressing on the acceleratorpedal.

9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)to completely relearn the idle and fueltrim strategy.

Note: If you do not allow the engine torelearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the engine computereventually relearns the idle trim and fueltrim strategy.Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority aboutrecycling old batteries.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPSVertical Aim AdjustmentThe headlamps on your vehicle areproperly aimed at the assembly plant. Ifyour vehicle has been involved in a crash,have the aim of the headlamp beamchecked by an authorized dealer.

Headlamp Aiming Target

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters).ACenter height of lamp to ground.B25 feet (7.6 meters).CHorizontal reference line.D

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.

2. Measure the height of the headlampbulb center from the ground and markan 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference lineon the vertical wall or screen at thisheight.

Note: To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to block the lightfrom one headlamp while adjusting theother.3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and openthe hood.

293


Maintenance

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observea flat zone of high intensity lightlocated at the top of the right handportion of the beam pattern. If the topedge of the high intensity light zone isnot at the horizontal reference line, theheadlamp will need to be adjusted.

E194757

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on eachheadlamp. Using a Phillips #2screwdriver, turn the adjuster eitherclockwise or counterclockwise in orderto adjust the vertical aim of theheadlamp. The horizontal edge of thebrighter light should touch thehorizontal reference line.

6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNING: If you operate yourvehicle in temperatures below 40°F(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreezeprotection. Failure to use washer fluidwith antifreeze protection in coldweather could result in impairedwindshield vision and increase the riskof injury or accident.

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level islow. Only use a washer fluid that meetsFord specifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 343).State or local regulations on volatileorganic compounds may restrict the useof methanol, a common windshield washerantifreeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they providecold weather protection without damagingthe vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades orwasher system.

FUEL FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a lifetimefuel filter that is integrated with the fueltank. Regular maintenance or replacementis not needed.

294


Maintenance

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluidor water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESClean the wiper blades and the windshieldto improve wiper performance.Note: Do not move the wiper arm when theignition is on as it may cause damage to thewiper motor.Replace the wiper blades at least annuallyfor optimum performance.

Front Wiper Blades

E129990

1

1

2

1. Lift the wiper arm and then press thewiper blade locking buttons together.

Note: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.3. Remove the wiper blade.4. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

Rear Window Wiper Blade

E271380

1. Lift the wiper arm.Note: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.2. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

295


Maintenance

REMOVING A HEADLAMP1. Open the hood. See Opening and

Closing the Hood (page 279).

2

2

E194758

2

4

3

2. Remove the screws.3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of

the vehicle to disengage it from thelower fixing point.

4. Lift the headlamp up and remove it.

E133750

5

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNING: Switch the lamps andthe ignition off. Failure to follow thiswarning could result in serious personalinjury.

WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.Let the bulb cool down before removingit. Failure to do so could result inpersonal injury.

Use the correct specification bulb.See Bulb Specification Chart (page 368).Install in the reverse order unless otherwisestated.

296


Maintenance

Headlamp

E188959C

Headlamp low beam.AHeadlamp low and high beam -vehicles with high-intensitydischarge headlamps.Headlamp high beam.BDaytime running lamp.Front direction indicator.C

Front Direction Indicator1. Remove the headlamp assembly. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 296).2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

Headlamp Low Beam1. Remove the cover.2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

Headlamp High Beam1. Remove the cover.

2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

High-Intensity Discharge HeadlampsThese lamps operate at a high voltage.See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Daytime Running Lamp1. Remove the cover.2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

LED LampsLED lamps are not serviceable items. Seean authorized dealer if they fail.The following lamps are LED:• Brake and rear lamps.• Central high mounted brake lamp.• Front fog lamps.• Front side marker lamps.• Front signature lamps.• Rear direction indicators.• Rear side marker lamps.• Reversing lamps.• Side direction indicators.

297


Maintenance

License Plate Lamp

3

2

1

E72789

1. Use a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, to carefully remove thelamp.

2. Remove the lamp.3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

298


Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATIONYour dealer has many quality productsavailable to clean your vehicle and protectits finishes.

CLEANING PRODUCTSMaterialsFor best results, use the following productsor products of equivalent quality:

SpecificationName

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)

Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &Canada)

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate withBitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)

CLEANING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, we recommend MotorcraftDetail Wash.

• Never use strong household detergentsor soap, for example dish washing orlaundry liquid. These products candiscolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash your vehicle when it is hotto the touch, or during strong or directsunlight.

299


Vehicle Care

• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel to eliminate waterspotting.

• Immediately remove fuel spillages, birddroppings, insect deposits and road tar.These may cause damage to yourvehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.We recommend Motorcraft Bug andTar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, forexample antennas, before entering acar wash.

• When filling with AdBlue®, remove anyresidue on painted surfacesimmediately.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellentscan damage painted surfaces. If thesesubstances come in contact with yourvehicle, wash the affected area as soon aspossible.

Cleaning the HeadlampsNote: Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Note: Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Exterior Chrome Parts• Apply a high quality-cleaning product

to bumpers and other chrome parts.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.We recommend Motorcraft CustomBright Metal Cleaner.

• Do not apply the cleaning product tohot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaningproduct on chrome surfaces longerthan the time recommended.

• Using non-recommended cleaners canresult in severe and permanentcosmetic damage.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, forexample steel wool or plastic pads as theycan scratch the chrome surface.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metalcleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic PartsFor routine cleaning we recommendMotorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or greasespots are present, we recommendMotorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferredhowever, pressure washing may be usedunder the following conditions:• Do not use water pressure higher than

2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).• Do not use water hotter than 179°F

(82°C).• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray

angle pattern.• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)

distance and 90° angle to yourvehicle's surface.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzleat an angle to the vehicle's surface maydamage graphics and cause the edges topeel away from the vehicle's surface.

UnderbodyRegularly clean the underside of yourvehicle using water. Keep body and doordrain holes free of debris or foreignmaterial.

Under HoodFor removing black rubber marks fromunder the hood we recommend MotorcraftWheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bugand Tar Remover.

300


Vehicle Care

WAXINGRegular waxing is necessary to protect yourcar's paint from the elements. Werecommend that you wash and wax thepainted surface once or twice a year.When washing and waxing, park yourvehicle in a shaded area out of directsunlight. Always wash your vehicle beforeapplying wax.• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

to apply and remove the wax.• Apply a small amount of wax in a

back-and-forth motion, not in circles.• Do not allow wax to come in contact

with any non-body (low-gloss black)colored trim. The wax will discolor orstain the parts over time.• Roof racks.• Bumpers.• Grained door handles.• Side moldings.• Mirror housings.• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.• After waxing, your car's paint should

feel smooth, and be free of streaks andsmudges.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildup keepthe engine warmer than normal.

When washing:• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressurefluid could penetrate the sealed partsand cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with coldwater to avoid cracking the engineblock or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean. InCanada, use Motorcraft EngineShampoo.

Note: If your vehicle has an engine coverremove the cover before application ofMotorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.Immediately rinse away any over spray.• Never wash or rinse the engine while it

is hot or running; water in the runningengine may cause internal damage.

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,spark plug wire or spark plug well, orthe area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distributionbox, and air filter assembly to preventwater damage when cleaning theengine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS ANDWIPER BLADESCar wash chemicals and environmentalfallout can result in windshield and wiperblade contamination. Dirty windshield andwipers will result in poor windshield wiperoperation. Keep the windshield and wiperblades clean to maintain windshield wiperperformance.

301


Vehicle Care

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:• Clean the windshield with a

non-abrasive glass cleaner. Whencleaning the interior of the windshield,avoid getting any glass cleaner on theinstrument panel or door panels. Wipeany glass cleaner off these surfacesimmediately.

• For windshields contaminated withtree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, cleanthe entire windshield using steel wool(no greater than 0000 grade) in acircular motion and rinse with water.

• Clean the wiper blades with isopropylrubbing alcohol or windshield washerconcentrate.

Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNING: Do not use cleaningsolvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle'sseatbelts, as these actions may weakenthe belt webbing.

WARNING: On vehicles equippedwith seat-mounted airbags, do not usechemical solvents or strong detergents.Such products could contaminate theside airbag system and affectperformance of the side airbag in a crash.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seatsequipped with side airbags:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft Professional StrengthCarpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on thematerial, spot-clean the area first withMotorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. InCanada, use Motorcraft Multi-PurposeCleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate)or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners, which canstain and discolor the fabric and affectthe flame retardant abilities of the seatmaterials.

MirrorsDo not clean the housing or glass of anymirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL AND INSTRUMENTCLUSTER LENS

WARNING: Do not use chemicalsolvents or strong detergents whencleaning the steering wheel orinstrument panel to avoid contaminationof the airbag system.

Note: Follow the same procedure ascleaning leather seats for cleaning leatherinstrument panels and leather interior trimsurfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats(page 303).Clean the instrument panel and clusterlens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to drythese areas.

302


Vehicle Care

• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increasethe gloss of the upper portion of theinstrument panel. The dull finish in thisarea helps protect you fromundesirable windshield reflection.

• Do not use any household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners as thesemay damage the finish of theinstrument panel, interior trim andcluster lens.

• Wash or wipe your hands clean if youhave been in contact with certainproducts such as insect repellent andsuntan lotion to avoid possible damageto the interior painted surfaces.

• Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.Your warranty may not cover thesedamages.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice hasbeen spilled on the instrument panel or oninterior trim surfaces:1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

soft cloth as quickly as possible.2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and

Vinyl Cleaner or a commerciallyavailable leather cleaning product forautomotive interiors. Test any cleaneror stain remover on an inconspicuousarea.

3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with aclean, soft cloth and a mild soap andwater solution. Dry the area with aclean, soft cloth.

4. If necessary, apply more soap andwater solution or cleaning product toa clean, soft cloth and press it onto thesoiled area. Allow this to set at roomtemperature for 30 minutes.

5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with aclean, damp cloth, use a rubbingmotion for 60 seconds on the soiledarea.

6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF

EQUIPPED)

Note: Follow the same procedure ascleaning leather seats for cleaning leatherinstrument panels and leather interior trimsurfaces.Note: Clean and treat spills as soon aspossible. Test any cleaner or stain removeron an inconspicuous area.Note: Avoid soaking any surface.Note: We recommend distilled water whencleaning.For cleaning and removing stains such asdye transfer, use a commercially availableleather cleaning product for automotiveinteriors.Do not use the following products as thesemay damage the leather:• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based

leather conditioners.• Household cleaners.• Alcohol solutions.• Solvents or cleaners intended

specifically for rubber, vinyl andplastics.

To clean:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Wipe the surface with a soft, damp

cloth and a mild soap and watersolution. Dry the area with a clean, softcloth.

• Do not rub any stains into the leather.• For perforated leather, do not use foam

cleaning products.

303


Vehicle Care

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEAuthorized dealers have touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. Your vehiclecolor code is printed on a sticker on thefront, left-hand side door jamb. Take yourcolor code to your authorized dealer tomake sure you get the correct color.Before repairing minor paint damage, usea cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and TarRemover to remove particles such as birddroppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tarspots, road salt and industrial fallout.Read the instructions before using cleaningproducts.

CLEANING THE WHEELS1. Regularly clean them with a wheel

cleaner. We recommend that you useFord approved wheel cleaner ifavailable.

2. Remove dirt and brake dust with asponge.

3. Remove tar and grease with a bug andtar remover. We recommend that youuse Ford approved bug and tar removerif available.

4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with waterafter cleaning.

If you intend on parking your vehicle for anextended period after cleaning the wheelswith a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle fora few minutes before doing so. Thisreduces the risk of corrosion of the brakediscs, brake pads and linings.Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.Note: Some car washes could damagewheel rims and covers.

Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,harsh cleaning products, chrome wheelcleaners or abrasive materials coulddamage wheel rims and covers.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you plan on storing your vehicle for 30days or more, read the followingmaintenance recommendations to makesure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.We engineer and test all motor vehiclesand their components for reliable, regulardriving. Under various conditions,long-term storage may lead to degradedengine performance or failure unless youuse specific precautions to preserve enginecomponents.

General• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.• Protect from sunlight, if possible.• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protectagainst rust and damage.

Body• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to

remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud fromexterior surfaces, rear-wheel housingand the underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash your vehicle if it isstored in exposed locations.

• Touch-up exposed or primed metal toprevent rust.

• Cover chrome and stainless steel partswith a thick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessarywhen you wash your vehicle.

• Lubricate all hood, door and luggagecompartment hinges and latches witha light grade oil.

304


Vehicle Care

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine• Change the engine oil and filter prior to

storage because used engine oilcontains contaminates which maycause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days for aminimum of 15 minutes. Run at fastidle with the climate controls set todefrost until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

• With your foot on the brake, shiftthrough all the gears while the engineis running.

• We recommend that you change theengine oil before you use your vehicleagain.

Fuel system• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of thefuel pump nozzle.

Cooling system• Protect against freezing temperatures.• When removing your vehicle from

storage, check coolant fluid level.Confirm that there are no coolingsystem leaks and that fluid is at therecommended level.

Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery,we recommend that you disconnectthe battery cables to maintain batterycharge for quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memoryfeatures if you disconnect the batterycables.

Brakes• Make sure the brakes and parking brake

release fully.

Tires• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under your vehicle are coveredwith grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)every 15 days to lubricate working partsand prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From StorageWhen your vehicle is ready to come out ofstorage, do the following:• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on windowsurfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for anydeterioration.

• Check under the hood for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage such as mice or squirrelnests.

• Check the exhaust for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage.

• Check tire pressures and set tireinflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Driveyour vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back andforth to remove rust build-up.

305


Vehicle Care

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,oil and gas) to make sure there are noleaks, and fluids are at recommendedlevels.

• If you remove the battery, clean thebattery cable ends and check fordamage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you haveany concerns or issues.

BODY STYLING KITSThe distance between the underside ofyour vehicle and the ground is less thanthat of other models. Drive with extremecare to avoid damage to your vehicle.

306


Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATIONUse only approved wheel and tire sizes,using other sizes could damage yourvehicle. If you change the diameter of thetires from that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the correctspeed. Take your vehicle to an authorizedFord dealer to have the systemreprogrammed. If you intend to change thesize of the wheels from that fitted by themanufacturer, you can check the suitabilitywith an authorized dealer.Additional information related to thefunctionality and maintenance of your tirescan be found later in this chapter. See TireCare (page 315).The Ford recommended tire inflationpressures can be found on the Tire Label,which is located on the B-pillar or the edgeof the driver's door. This information canalso be found on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label, affixed to either thedoor hinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets the door latch post;next to the driver’s seating position.Ford strongly recommends maintainingthese tire pressures at all times. Failure tofollow the tire pressure recommendationscan cause uneven treadwear patterns,reduced fuel economy, and adverselyaffect the way your vehicle handles.Note: Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and when thetires are cold.Note: Check your tire pressures at leastonce per month.Set the pressure for your spare tire to thehighest value given for your vehicle and tiresize combination, if equipped.

Notice to utility vehicle and truckowners

WARNING: Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles.

WARNING: Vehicles with a highercenter of gravity (utility and four-wheeldrive vehicles) handle differently thanvehicles with a lower center of gravity(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,excessive speed and abrupt steering inthese vehicles. Failure to drive cautiouslyincreases the risk of losing control of yourvehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injuryand death.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantly morelikely to die than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING: Do not becomeoverconfident in the ability of four-wheeldrive vehicles. Although a four-wheeldrive vehicle may accelerate better thana two-wheel drive vehicle in low tractionsituations, it won't stop any faster thantwo-wheel drive vehicles. Always driveat a safe speed.

Utility vehicles and trucks handledifferently than passenger cars in thevarious driving conditions that areencountered on streets, highways andoff-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are notdesigned for cornering at speeds as highas passenger cars any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to performsatisfactorily under off-road conditions.

307


Wheels and Tires

Study your owner's manual and anysupplements for specific information aboutequipment features, instructions for safedriving and additional precautions toreduce the risk of an accident or seriousinjury.

How your vehicle differs fromother vehiclesSport utility vehicles and trucks can differfrom some other vehicles in a fewnoticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:• Higher - to allow higher load carrying

capacity and to allow it to travel overrough terrain without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.

• Shorter - to give it the capability toapproach inclines and drive over thecrest of a hill without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.All other things held equal, a shorterwheelbase may make your vehiclequicker to respond to steering inputsthan a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

• Narrower - to provide greatermaneuverability in tight spaces,particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensionaldifferences, Sport utility vehicles andtrucks often have a higher center of gravityand a greater difference in center of gravitybetween the loaded and unloadedcondition. These differences that makeyour vehicle so versatile also make ithandle differently than an ordinarypassenger car.

TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATORKIT (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: The temporary mobility kit containsenough sealant compound in the canisterfor one tire repair only. See your authorizeddealer for replacement sealant canisters.

The kit is under the load floor in the cargoarea. The kit consists of an air compressorto re-inflate the tire and a canister ofsealing compound that effectively sealsmost punctures caused by nails or similarobjects. This kit provides a temporary tirerepair, allowing you to drive your vehicleup to 120 mi (200 km) at a maximumspeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tireservice location.

E175977

Air compressor (inside).ASelector switch.BOn and off button.CAir pressure gauge.DSealant bottle and canister.EDual purpose hose: air andrepair.

F

308


Wheels and Tires

Tire valve connector.GAccessory power plug.HCasing/housing.IBike/raft/sports ball adapters.J

General Information

WARNING: Failure to follow theseguidelines could result in an increasedrisk of loss of vehicle control, injury ordeath.

Note: Do not use the kit if you have severelydamaged a tire. Only seal punctures withinthe tire tread with the kit.Do not attempt to repair punctures largerthan ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage tothe tire's sidewall. The tire may notcompletely seal.Loss of air pressure may adversely affecttire performance. For this reason:Note: Do not drive the vehicle above50 mph (80 km/h).Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi(200 km). Drive only to the closestauthorized dealer or tire repair shop to haveyour tire inspected.• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers.• Periodically monitor tire inflation

pressure in the affected tire; if the tireis losing pressure, have the vehicletowed.

• Read the information in the Tips forUse of the Kit section to make sure safeoperation of the kit and your vehicle.

Tips for Use of the KitTo ensure safe operation of the kit:

• Read all instructions and cautions fully.• Before operating the kit, make sure

your vehicle is safely off the road andaway from moving traffic. Switch onthe hazard lights.

• Always set the parking brake to ensurethe vehicle does not moveunexpectedly.

• Do not remove any foreign objects,such as nails or screws, from the tire.

• When using the kit, leave the enginerunning (only if the vehicle is outdoorsor in a well-ventilated area) so thecompressor does not drain thevehicle's battery.

• Do not allow the compressor tooperate continuously for more than 15minutes. This will help prevent thecompressor from overheating.

• Never leave the kit unattended duringoperation.

• Sealant compound contains latex.Those with latex sensitivities shoulduse appropriate precautions to avoidan allergic reaction.

• Keep the kit away from children.• Only use the kit when the ambient

temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)and 158°F (70°C).

• Only use the sealing compound beforethe use-by date. The use-by date is ona label on the sealant canister, whichyou can see through the rectangularviewing window on the bottom of thecompressor. Check the use-by dateregularly and replace the canister whenthe sealant expires.

• Do not store the kit unsecured insidethe passenger compartment of thevehicle as it may cause injury during asudden stop or crash. Always store thekit in its original location.

309


Wheels and Tires

• After sealant use, an authorized dealermust replace the tire pressuremonitoring system sensor and valvestem on the wheel.

• Operating the kit could cause anelectrical disturbance in radio, CD andDVD player operation.

E175978

* When inflation only is requiredfor a tire or other objects, theselector must be in the Air

position.

What to do When a Tire IsPuncturedYou can repair a tire puncture within thetire's tread area in two stages with the kit.• In the first stage, inflate the tire with a

sealing compound and air. After youinflate the tire, you will need to drivethe vehicle a short distance 4 mi(6 km) to distribute the sealant in thetire.

• In the second stage, check the tirepressure and adjust, if necessary, to thevehicle's specified tire inflationpressure.

First Stage: Inflating the Tire withSealing Compound and Air

WARNING: Do not stand directlyover the kit while inflating the tire. If younotice any unusual bulges ordeformations in the tire's sidewall duringinflation, stop and call roadsideassistance.

WARNING: If the tire does notinflate to the recommended tire pressurewithin 15 minutes, stop and call roadsideassistance.

WARNING: Do not run the enginewhen operating the air compressorunless the vehicle is outdoors or in awell-ventilated area.

Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, leveland secure area, away from moving traffic.Switch the hazard lights on. Apply theparking brake and switch the engine off.Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.Sealant compound contains latex. Useappropriate precautions to avoid anyallergic reactions.Do not remove any foreign object that haspierced the tire. If a puncture is in the tiresidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.1. Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve.2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black

tube) from the back of the compressorhousing.

3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve byturning the connector clockwise.Tighten the connection securely.

310


Wheels and Tires

E200523

4. Plug the power cable into the 12-voltpower point in the vehicle.

5. Remove the warning sticker found onthe casing/housing and place it on thetop of the instrument panel or thecenter of the dash.

6. Start the vehicle and leave the enginerunning so the compressor does notdrain the vehicle’s battery.

E175981

7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealantposition. Switch the kit on by pressingthe on/off button (B).

8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed onthe tire label on the driver's door or thedoor jamb area. The initial air pressuregauge reading may indicate a valuehigher than the label pressure whileyou pump the sealing compound intothe tire. This is normal and should beno reason for concern. The pressuregauge reading will indicate the tireinflation pressure after about 30seconds of operation. You shouldcheck the final tire pressure with thecompressor turned OFF in order to getan accurate pressure reading.

311


Wheels and Tires

E175982

9. When the tire reaches therecommended tire pressure, switch offthe kit, unplug the power cable, anddisconnect the hose from the tire valve.Re-install the valve cap on the tirevalve and return the kit to the stowagearea.

10. Immediately and cautiously, drive thevehicle 4 mi (6 km) to distribute thesealant evenly inside the tire. Do notexceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

11. After 4 mi (6 km), stop and check thetire pressure. See Second Stage:Checking Tire Pressure.

Note: If you experience any unusualvibration, ride disturbance or noise whiledriving, reduce your speed until you cansafely pull off to the side of the road to callfor roadside assistance. Note: Do notproceed to the second stage of thisoperation.

Second Stage: Checking TirePressureNote: If you are proceeding from the FirstStage: Re-inflating the Tire with SealingCompound and Air section and haveinjected sealant in the tire and the pressureis below 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to thenext step.

WARNING: The power plug mayget hot after use and should be handledcarefully when unplugging.

Check the air pressure of your tires asfollows:

E175983

1. Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve.

2. Firmly screw the air compressor hoseonto the valve stem by turningclockwise.

3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to theair position.

312


Wheels and Tires

4. If required, switch on the compressorand adjust the tire to therecommended inflation pressureshown on the tire label on the driver'sdoor or door jamb area. You shouldcheck the tire pressure with thecompressor turned OFF in order to getan accurate pressure reading.

5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valvecap on the tire and return the kit to thestowage area.

What to Do After the Tire Has BeenSealedAfter using the kit to seal your tire, you willneed to replace the sealant canister. Youcan obtain sealant canisters and spareparts at an authorized dealer. You candispose of empty sealant canisters athome. However, you should dispose ofcanisters still containing liquid sealantthrough your local authorized dealer or tiredealer, or in accordance with local wastedisposal regulation.Note: After you use the sealing compound,the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph(80 km/h) and the maximum drivingdistance is 120 mi (200 km). You shouldinspect the sealed tire immediately.You can check the tire pressure any timewithin the 120 mi (200 km) by performingthe steps listed previously in the SecondStage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure.

Removal of the sealant canister fromthe kit

E175984

1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (blacktube) from the compressor housing.

E175985

2. Unwrap the power cord.

E175986

3. Remove the back cover.

313


Wheels and Tires

E175987

4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90degrees and pull away fromcasing/housing to remove.

Installation of the sealant canister tothe kit1. With the canister held perpendicular

to the housing, insert the canisternozzle into the connector and pushuntil seated.

2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees downinto the housing/casing.

E175988

3. Snap the back cover back into place.

E175989

4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (blacktube) around the channel on thebottom of the housing/casing.

E175990

5. Wrap the power cord around thehousing and stow the accessory powerplug into its storage area.

Note: If you experience any difficulties withthe removal or installation of the sealantcanister, consult an authorized dealer forassistance.Make sure you check the sealantcompound’s use-by date regularly. Theuse-by date is on a label on the sealantcanister, which you can see through therectangular viewing window on the bottomof the kit. Replace the sealant canisterwhen the sealant expires.

314


Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Important Information AboutLow-Profile TiresIf your vehicle has 265/40R21tires, they are low-profile tires.These tires and wheels give yourvehicle a sport appearance. Withlow-profile tires, you may noticean increase in road noise andfaster tire wear, depending onroad conditions and driving styles.Due to their design, low-profiletires and wheels are more proneto road damage from potholes,rough or unpaved roads, car washrails and curb contact thanstandard tires and wheels.Note: Your vehicle's warranty doesnot cover these types of damages.Take extra caution when driving onrough roads to avoid impacts thatcould cause wheel and tiredamage.Important Information AboutSport Tires and WheelsThe design of the optional265/40R21 tires enhances theperformance of your vehicle. Tocontinue providing thisperformance, you must take extracare when operating andmaintaining your vehicle.These low-profilehigh-performance tires optimizethe driving dynamics you expectin a sport vehicle in both dry andwet conditions. These tires are notoptimized for off-road or winter

(snow or cold weather)performance, and their ride, noise,and wear characteristics aredifferent than non-performancetires. With low-profile tires, youmay notice an increase in roadnoise and faster wear, dependingon road conditions and drivinghabits. Also, because of theirlower profile, the tires are moresusceptible to road damage frompotholes, rough or unpaved roads,car wash rails, and curb contactthan standard tires and wheels.Note: Your vehicle’s warranty doesnot cover these types of damages.Take extra caution when driving onrough roads to avoid impacts thatcould cause wheel and tiredamage.The optional 265/40R21 tires arefor track use and may exhibitsignificantly reduced tread life andincreased tire noise compared tothe standard equipment tiresunder normal driving conditions.Increasing the front cambersettings beyond the factorysettings may further acceleratetread wear and induce tire noise.Note: Do not use tire chains onyour vehicle’s optional 265/40R21tires and wheels. The use of anytype of tire chain on these tires maydamage your vehicle. See UsingSnow Chains (page 331).

315


Wheels and Tires

Notice to Crossover VehicleOwnersCrossover vehicles handledifferently than passenger cars inthe various driving conditions thatyou encountered on streets,highways and off-road. Crossovervehicles are not designed forcornering at speeds as high aspassenger cars any more thanlow-slung sports cars aredesigned to perform satisfactorilyunder off-road conditions.Crossover vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. Toreduce this risk of serious injury ordeath from a rollover or othercrash you must:• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt

maneuvers.• Drive at safe speeds for the

conditions.• Keep tires properly inflated.• Never overload or improperly

load your vehicle.• Make sure every passenger is

properly restrained.

WARNING: In a rollovercrash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to diethan a person wearing aseatbelt.

Information About UniformTire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.The Tire Quality Grades can befound where applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample: Treadwear 200Traction AA Temperature A.These Tire Quality Grades aredetermined by standards that theUnited States Department ofTransportation has set.Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.They do not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary usespare tires, light truck or LT typetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as definedin Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

316


Wheels and Tires

U.S. Department ofTransportation Tire qualitygrades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires FordMotor Company to give you thefollowing information about tiregrades exactly as the governmenthas written it.TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear 1 ½ times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.Traction AA A B C

WARNING: The tractiongrade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highestto lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.Temperature A B C

WARNING: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under the

317


Wheels and Tires

Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 139. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.Glossary of Tire Terminology*Tire label: A label showing theoriginal equipment tire sizes,recommended inflation pressureand the maximum weight thevehicle can carry.*Tire Identification Number(TIN): A number on the sidewallof each tire providing informationabout the tire brand andmanufacturing plant, tire size anddate of manufacture. Also referredto as DOT code.*Inflation pressure: A measureof the amount of air in a tire.*Standard load: A class ofP-metric or Metric tires designedto carry a maximum load at setpressure. For example: forP-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) andfor Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will notincrease the tire’s load-carryingcapability.*Extra load: A class of P-metricor Metric tires designed to carry aheavier maximum load at 42 psi(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflationpressure beyond this pressure willnot increase the tire’sload-carrying capability.

*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit ofair pressure.*PSI: Pounds per square inch, astandard unit of air pressure.*Cold tire pressure: The tirepressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of directsunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being driven for1.0 mi (1.6 km).*Recommended inflationpressure: The cold inflationpressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition) or Tire Label located onthe B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver’s door.* B-pillar: The structural memberat the side of the vehicle behindthe front door.*Bead area of the tire: Area ofthe tire next to the rim.* Sidewall of the tire: Areabetween the bead area and thetread.*Tread area of the tire: Area ofthe perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mountedon the vehicle.*Rim: The metal support (wheel)for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

318


Wheels and Tires

Information Contained on theTire SidewallBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.Information on P Type Tires

H

I

J

KL

M

A

BC D E

FG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example ofa tire size, load index and speedrating. The definitions of theseitems are listed below. (Note thatthe tire size, load index and speedrating for your vehicle may bedifferent from this example.)

A. P: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that may be used for service oncars, sport utility vehicles,minivans and light trucks. Note: Ifyour tire size does not begin witha letter this may mean it isdesignated by either the EuropeanTire and Rim TechnicalOrganization or the Japan TireManufacturing Association.B. 215: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width.D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.F. 95: Indicates the tire's loadindex. It is an index that relates tohow much weight a tire can carry.You may find this information inyour owner’s manual. If not,contact a local tire dealer.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

319


Wheels and Tires

G. H: Indicates the tire's speedrating. The speed rating denotesthe speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time under a standardcondition of load and inflationpressure. The tires on your vehiclemay operate at differentconditions for load and inflationpressure. These speed ratings mayneed to be adjusted for thedifference in conditions. Theratings range from 81 mph(130 km/h) to 186 mph(299 km/h). These ratings arelisted in the following chart.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

Speed ratingLetterrating

81 mph (130 km/h)M87 mph (140 km/h)N99 mph (159 km/h)Q106 mph (171 km/h)R112 mph (180 km/h)S118 mph (190 km/h)T124 mph (200 km/h)U130 mph (210 km/h)H149 mph (240 km/h)V

Speed ratingLetterrating

168 mph (270 km/h)W186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximumspeed capability over 149 mph(240 km/h), tire manufacturerssometimes use the letters ZR. Forthose with a maximum speedcapability over 186 mph (299km/h), tire manufacturers alwaysuse the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): This begins withthe letters DOT and indicates thatthe tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbersor letters are the plant codedesignating where it wasmanufactured, the next two arethe tire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.

320


Wheels and Tires

J. Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates thenumber of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel,nylon, polyester, and others.K. Maximum Load: Indicates themaximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by thetire. See the Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), for the correct tirepressure for your vehicle.L. Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades:*Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditionson a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.

*Traction: The traction grades,from highest to lowest are AA, A,B, and C. The grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.*Temperature: The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B andC, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.M. Maximum InflationPressure: Indicates the tiremanufacturer's maximumpermissible pressure, or thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe vehicle manufacturer'srecommended cold inflationpressure, which can be found onthe Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the vehicle label.

321


Wheels and Tires

The tire suppliers may haveadditional markings, notes orwarnings such as standard loador radial tubeless.Additional InformationContained on the Tire Sidewallfor LT Type TiresNote: Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

A

BC

BDE142544

LT type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires. These differences aredescribed below.A. LT: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that is intended for service on lighttrucks.B. Load Range and LoadInflation Limits: Indicates thetire's load-carrying capabilitiesand its inflation limits.

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual,defined as four tires on the rearaxle (a total of six or more tires onthe vehicle).D. Maximum Load Single lb(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicatesthe maximum load and tirepressure when the tire is used asa single, defined as two tires(total) on the rear axle.Information on T Type TiresT145/80D16 is an example of atire size.Note: The temporary tire size foryour vehicle may be different fromthis example. Tire Quality Gradesdo not apply to this type of tire.

322


Wheels and Tires

AB C D

E

E142545

T type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires. These differences aredescribed below.A. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation, that is intended fortemporary service on cars,sport-utility vehicles, minivans andlight trucks.B. 145: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio,which gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width. Numbers of 70 orlower indicate a short sidewall.D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.Location of the Tire LabelYou will find a Tire Labelcontaining tire inflation pressureby tire size and other importantinformation located on the B-Pillaror the edge of the driver’s door.Inflating Your TiresSafe operation of your vehiclerequires that your tires areproperly inflated. Remember thata tire can lose up to half of its airpressure without appearing flat.Every day before you drive, checkyour tires. If one looks lower thanthe others, use a tire gauge tocheck pressure of all tires andadjust if required.At least once a month and beforelong trips, inspect each tire andcheck the tire pressure with a tiregauge (including spare, ifequipped). Inflate all tires to theinflation pressure recommendedby Ford Motor Company.

323


Wheels and Tires

You are strongly urged to buy areliable tire pressure gauge, asautomatic service station gaugesmay be inaccurate. Fordrecommends the use of a digitalor dial-type tire pressure gaugerather than a stick-type tirepressure gauge.Use the recommended coldinflation pressure for optimum tireperformance and wear.Under-inflation or over-inflationmay cause uneven treadwearpatterns.

WARNING: Under-inflationis the most common cause oftire failures and may result insevere tire cracking, treadseparation or blowout, withunexpected loss of vehiclecontrol and increased risk ofinjury. Under-inflation increasessidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heatbuildup and internal damage tothe tire. It also may result inunnecessary tire stress, irregularwear, loss of vehicle control andaccidents. A tire can lose up tohalf of its air pressure and notappear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to theFord recommended inflationpressure even if it is less than themaximum inflation pressureinformation found on the tire. TheFord recommended tire inflationpressure is found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label

(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. Failure tofollow the tire pressurerecommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way yourvehicle handles.Maximum Inflation Pressure isthe tire manufacturer's maximumpermissible pressure and thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe manufacturer’s recommendedcold inflation pressure, which canbe found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label orTire Label.

324


Wheels and Tires

When weather temperaturechanges occur, tire inflationpressures also change. A 10°F(6°C) temperature drop cancause a corresponding drop of1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.Check your tire pressuresfrequently and adjust them to theproper pressure which can befound on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label or Tire Label.To check the pressure in yourtire(s):1. Make sure the tires are cool,meaning they are not hot fromdriving even a mile.Note: If you are checking tirepressure when the tire is hot, (forexample, driven more than 1.0 mi(1.6 km), never bleed or reduce airpressure. The tires are hot fromdriving and it is normal forpressures to increase aboverecommended cold pressures. Ahot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could besignificantly under-inflated.Note: If you have to drive adistance to get air for your tire(s),check and record the tire pressurefirst and add the appropriate airpressure when you get to thepump. It is normal for tires to heatup and the air pressure inside to goup as you drive.2. Remove the cap from the valveon one tire, then firmly press thetire gauge onto the valve andmeasure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach therecommended air pressure.Note: If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pressing on the metal stemin the center of the valve. Thenrecheck the pressure with your tiregauge.4. Replace the valve cap.5. Repeat this procedure for eachtire, including the spare.Note: Some spare tires operate ata higher inflation pressure than theother tires. For T type mini-sparetires, see the Dissimilar SpareWheel and Tire Assembly section.Store and maintain at 60 psi(4.15 bar). For full-size anddissimilar spare tires, see theDissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information section.Store and maintain at the higher ofthe front and rear inflation pressureas shown on the Tire Label.6. Visually inspect the tires tomake sure there are no nails orother objects embedded thatcould poke a hole in the tire andcause an air leak.7. Check the sidewalls to makesure there are no gouges, cuts orbulges.

325


Wheels and Tires

Inspecting Your Tires andWheel Valve StemsPeriodically inspect the tire treadsfor uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones,nails or glass that may be wedgedin the tread grooves. Check the tireand valve stems for holes, cracks,or cuts that may permit airleakage and repair or replace thetire and replace the valve stem.Inspect the tire sidewalls forcracking, cuts, bruises and othersigns of damage or excessivewear. If internal damage to the tireis suspected, have the tiredemounted and inspected in caseit needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety, tires that aredamaged or show signs ofexcessive wear should not be usedbecause they are more likely toblow out or fail.Improper or inadequate vehiclemaintenance can cause tires towear abnormally. Inspect all yourtires, including the spare,frequently, and replace them ifone or more of the followingconditions exist:

Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down toone sixteenth of an inch (2millimeters), tires must bereplaced to help prevent yourvehicle from skidding andhydroplaning. Built-in treadwearindicators, or wear bars, whichlook like narrow strips of smoothrubber across the tread willappear on the tire when the treadis worn down to one sixteenth ofan inch (2 millimeters).When the tire tread wears downto the same height as these wearbars, the tire is worn out and mustbe replaced.DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treadsand sidewalls for damage (suchas bulges in the tread or sidewalls,cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread orsidewall). If damage is observed

326


Wheels and Tires

or suspected have the tireinspected by a tire professional.Tires can be damaged duringoff-road use, so inspection afteroff-road use is alsorecommended.Age

WARNING: Tires degradeover time depending on manyfactors such as weather, storageconditions, and conditions of use(load, speed, inflation pressure)the tires experience throughouttheir lives.You should replace your sparetire when you replace the roadtires or after six years due toaging even if it has not beenused.

WARNING: In general, tiresshould be replaced after sixyears regardless of tread wear.However, heat caused by hotclimates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate theaging process and may requiretires to be replaced morefrequently.

U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumberBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies and

describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.This begins with the letters DOTand indicates that the tire meetsall federal standards. The nexttwo numbers or letters are theplant code designating where itwas manufactured, the next twoare the tire size code and the lastfour numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.Tire ReplacementRequirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide a safe rideand handling capability.

WARNING: Only usereplacement tires and wheelsthat are the same size, loadindex, speed rating and type(such as P-metric versusLT-metric or all-season versusall-terrain) as those originallyprovided by Ford. The

327


Wheels and Tires

recommended tire and wheelsize may be found on either theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, orthe door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), or theTire Label which is located onthe B-Pillar or edge of thedriver's door. If this informationis not found on these labels, thenyou should contact yourauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. Use of any tire or wheelnot recommended by Ford canaffect the safety andperformance of your vehicle,which could result in anincreased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death.

WARNING: To reduce therisk of serious injury, whenmounting replacement tires andwheels, you should not exceedthe maximum pressure indicatedon the sidewall of the tire to setthe beads without additionalprecautions listed below. If thebeads do not seat at themaximum pressure indicated,re-lubricate and try again.

WARNING: When inflatingthe tire for mounting pressuresup to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greaterthan the maximum pressure onthe tire sidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken toprotect the person mounting thetire:

• Make sure that you have thecorrect tire and wheel size.

• Lubricate the tire bead andwheel bead seat area again.

• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

• Use both eye and earprotection.

WARNING: For a mountingpressure more than 20 psi(1.38 bar) greater than themaximum pressure, a Forddealer or other tire serviceprofessional should do themounting.

WARNING: Always inflatesteel carcass tires with a remoteair fill with the person inflatingstanding at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

Important: Remember to replacethe wheel valve stems when theroad tires are replaced on yourvehicle.

328


Wheels and Tires

The two front tires or two rear tiresshould generally be replaced as apair.The tire pressure sensors mountedin the wheels (originally installedon your vehicle) are not designedto be used in aftermarket wheels.The use of wheels or tires notrecommended by Ford MotorCompany may affect theoperation of your tire pressuremonitoring system.If the tire pressure monitoringsystem indicator is flashing, thesystem is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might beincompatible with your tirepressure monitoring system, orsome component of the systemmay be damaged.Safety Practices

WARNING: If your vehicleis stuck in snow, mud or sand, donot rapidly spin the tires;spinning the tires can tear thetire and cause an explosion. Atire can explode in as little asthree to five seconds.

WARNING: Do not spin thewheels at over 34 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail andinjure a passenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great dealto do with your tire mileage andsafety.*Observe posted speed limits*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns*Avoid potholes and objects onthe road*Do not run over curbs or hit thetire against a curb when parkingHighway HazardsNo matter how carefully you drivethere’s always the possibility thatyou may eventually have a flat tireon the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic.This may further damage the flattire, but your safety is moreimportant.If you feel a sudden vibration orride disturbance while driving, oryou suspect your tire or vehiclehas been damaged, immediatelyreduce your speed. Drive withcaution until you can safely pulloff the road. Stop and inspect thetires for damage. If you cannotdetect a cause, have the vehicletowed to the nearest repair facilityor tire dealer to have the vehicleinspected.

329


Wheels and Tires

Tire and Wheel AlignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb orpothole can cause the front endof your vehicle to becomemisaligned or cause damage toyour tires. If your vehicle seems topull to one side when you’redriving, the wheels may be out ofalignment. Have an authorizeddealer check the wheel alignmentperiodically.Wheel misalignment in the frontor the rear can cause uneven andrapid treadwear of your tires andshould be corrected by anauthorized dealer. Front-wheeldrive vehicles and those with anindependent rear suspension mayrequire alignment of all fourwheels.The tires should also be balancedperiodically. An unbalanced tireand wheel assembly may result inirregular tire wear.Tire RotationNote: If your tires show unevenwear ask an authorized dealer tocheck for and correct any wheelmisalignment, tire imbalance ormechanical problem involvedbefore tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may beequipped with a dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly. Adissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly is defined as a sparewheel and tire assembly that isdifferent in brand, size orappearance from the road tires andwheels. If you have a dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly it isintended for temporary use onlyand should not be used in a tirerotation.Note: After having your tiresrotated, inflation pressure must bechecked and adjusted to thevehicle requirements.Rotating your tires at therecommended interval (asindicated in the scheduledmaintenance information) willhelp your tires wear more evenly,providing better tire performanceand longer tire life. Sometimeirregular tire wear can becorrected by rotating the tires.Front-wheel drive and All-wheeldrive vehicles (front tires on theleft side of the diagram).

E142547

330


Wheels and Tires

USING SUMMER TIRESSummer tires provide superiorperformance on wet and dry roads.Summer tires do not have the Mud andSnow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating onthe tire side wall. Since summer tires donot have the same traction performanceas All-season or Snow tires, we do notrecommend using summer tires whentemperatures drop to about 45°F (7°C) orbelow (depending on tire wear andenvironmental conditions) or in snow andice conditions. Like any tire, summer tireperformance is affected by tire wear andenvironmental conditions. If you must drivein those conditions, we recommend usingMud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season orSnow tires.Always store your summer tires indoors attemperatures above 19°F (-7°C). Therubber compounds used in these tires loseflexibility and may develop surface cracksin the tread area at temperatures below19°F (-7°C). If the tires have beensubjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warmthem in a heated space to at least 41°F(5°C) for at least 24 hours before installingthem on a vehicle, or moving the vehiclewith the tires installed, or checking tireinflation. Do not place tires near heatersor heating devices used to warm the roomwhere the tires are stored. Do not applyheat or blow heated air directly on the tires.Always inspect the tires after storageperiods and before use.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNING: Snow tires must be thesame size, load index, speed rating asthose originally provided by Ford. Use ofany tire or wheel not recommended byFord can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, which could

result in an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death. Additionally, the use ofnon-recommended tires and wheelscould cause steering, suspension, axle,transfer case or power transfer unitfailure.

The tires on your vehicle may haveall-weather treads to provide traction inrain and snow. However, in some climates,you may need to use snow tires and cables.Your vehicle may not be compatible withsnow chain or cable usage with thefactory-fitted wheels and tires.Follow these guidelines when using snowtires and traction device:• If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle.• Purchase chains or cables from a

manufacturer that clearly labels bodyto tire dimension restrictions.

• Use no larger than 10 mm cables orchains ONLY on the front axle with235/60R18 tires. Do not use chains orcables on any other size tires.

• The snow chains or cables must bemounted in pairs on the front axle.

• When driving with tire cables, do notexceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or themaximum speed recommended by thechain manufacturer, whichever is less.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cablesrub or bang against the vehicle, stopand re-tighten them. If this does notwork, remove the cables to preventvehicle damage.

• Remove the cables when you no longerneed them. Do not use cables on dryroads.

• If a temporary spare tire is mounted onyour vehicle, do not use snow chainson the axle with the temporary sparetire.

331


Wheels and Tires

If you have any questions regarding snowchains or cables, please contact anauthorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNING: The tire pressuremonitoring system is not a substitute formanually checking tire pressures. Youshould periodically check tire pressuresusing a pressure gauge. Failure tocorrectly maintain tire pressures couldincrease the risk of tire failure, loss ofcontrol, vehicle rollover and personalinjury.

Note: You should only use tire sealants inroadside emergencies as they may causedamage to the tire pressure monitoringsystem sensor.Note: If the tire pressure monitoring systemsensor becomes damaged, it may notfunction.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated

to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with License exempt RSSStandards of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

332


Wheels and Tires

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.


Changing Tires With a TirePressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tirepressure sensor located inside the wheeland tire assembly cavity. The pressuresensor is attached to the valve stem. Thepressure sensor is covered by the tire and isnot visible unless the tire is removed. Takecare when changing the tire to avoiddamaging the sensor.You should always have your tires servicedby an authorized dealer.Check the tire pressure periodically (atleast monthly) using an accurate tiregauge. See When Inflating Your Tires inthis chapter.

Understanding Your Tire PressureMonitoring System

E250820

The tire pressure monitoring systemmeasures pressure in your road tires andsends the tire pressure readings to yourvehicle. You can view the tire pressurereadings through the information display.See General Information (page 105). Thelow tire pressure warning light will turn onif the tire pressure is significantly low. Oncethe light is illuminated, your tires areunder-inflated and need to be inflated tothe manufacturer’s recommended tirepressure. Even if the light turns on and ashort time later turns off, your tire pressurestill needs to be checked.

When Your Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledWhen one of your road tires needs to bereplaced with the temporary spare, thesystem will continue to identify an issue toremind you that the damaged road wheeland tire assembly needs to be repaired andput back on your vehicle.To restore the full function of the tirepressure monitoring system, have thedamaged road wheel and tire assemblyrepaired and remounted on your vehicle.

333


Wheels and Tires

When You Believe Your System is NotOperating ProperlyThe main function of the tire pressuremonitoring system is to warn you when

your tires need air. It can also warn you inthe event the system is no longer capableof functioning as intended. See thefollowing chart for information concerningyour tire pressure monitoring system:

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressurewarning light

Make sure tires are at the proper pres-sure. See Inflating your tires in thischapter. After inflating your tires to themanufacturer’s recommended pressureas shown on the Tire Label (located onthe edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),the vehicle must be driven for at leasttwo minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflated

Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When Your Temporary Spare Tireis Installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When Your Temporary Spare Tireis Installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

Flashing warninglight

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

334


Wheels and Tires

When Inflating Your Tires

WARNING: Do not use the tirepressure displayed in the informationdisplay as a tire pressure gauge. Failureto follow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

When putting air into your tires (such as ata gas station or in your garage), the tirepressure monitoring system may notrespond immediately to the air added toyour tires.It may take up to two minutes of drivingover 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turnoff after you have filled your tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

How Temperature Affects Your TirePressureThe tire pressure monitoring systemmonitors tire pressure in each pneumatictire. While driving in a normal manner, atypical passenger tire inflation pressuremay increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)from a cold start situation. If the vehicle isstationary overnight with the outsidetemperature significantly lower than thedaytime temperature, the tire pressure maydecrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. Thislower pressure value may be detected bythe tire pressure monitoring system asbeing significantly lower than therecommended inflation pressure andactivate the system warning light for lowtire pressure. If the low tire pressurewarning light is on, visually check each tireto verify that no tire is flat. If one or moretires are flat, repair as necessary. Checkthe air pressure in the road tires. If any tireis under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicleto the nearest location where air can beadded to the tires. Inflate all the tires tothe recommended inflation pressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: If the tire pressuremonitor sensor becomes damaged itmay not function.

Note: The use of tire sealant may damageyour tire pressure monitoring system andshould only be used in roadsideemergencies. If you must use a sealant, usethe Tire Mobility Kit sealant. Replace the tirepressure monitoring system sensor andvalve stem on the wheel by an authorizeddealer after use of the sealant.Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light will illuminate when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full function ofthe monitoring system, all road wheelsequipped with tire pressure monitoringsensors must be mounted on the vehicle.If you get a flat tire while driving, do notapply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease your speed. Hold the steeringwheel firmly and slowly move to a safeplace on the side of the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorizeddealer in order to prevent damage to thetire pressure monitoring system sensors.See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 332). Replace the spare tire with aroad tire as soon as possible. Duringrepairing or replacing of the flat tire, havean authorized dealer inspect the tirepressure monitoring system sensor fordamage.

335


Wheels and Tires

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNING: Failure to follow theseguidelines could result in an increasedrisk of loss of vehicle control, injury ordeath.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel andtire, then it is intended for temporary useonly. This means that if you need to use it,you should replace it as soon as possiblewith a road wheel and tire assembly thatis the same size and type as the road tiresand wheels that were originally providedby us. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheelis damaged, replace it instead of repairingit.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tirebegins with the letter T for tire size andmay have Temporary Use Only molded inthe sidewall.2. Full-size dissimilar spare with labelon wheel: This spare tire has a label onthe wheel that states: THIS WHEEL ANDTIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USEONLY.When driving with one of the dissimilarspare tires listed above, do not:• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire

at a time.

• Use commercial car washingequipment.

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tireslisted above at any one wheel location canlead to impairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability, if

applicable.3. Full-size dissimilar spare withoutlabel on wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.

336


Wheels and Tires

When driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Towing a trailer.• Driving vehicles equipped with a

camper body.• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyand seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change Procedure

WARNING: When one of the frontwheels is off the ground, thetransmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off thejack, even if the transmission is in park(P).

WARNING: To help prevent yourvehicle from moving when changing awheel, shift the transmission into park(P), set the parking brake and use anappropriate block or wheel chock tosecure the wheel diagonally opposite tothe wheel being changed. For example,when changing the front left wheel,place an appropriate block or wheelchock on the right rear wheel.

WARNING: Never place anythingbetween the vehicle jack and yourvehicle.

WARNING: Never place anythingbetween the vehicle jack and the ground.

WARNING: Park your vehicle sothat you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic or place yourself in any danger andset up a warning triangle.

WARNING: Do not get under avehicle that is only supported by avehicle jack.

WARNING: Do not attempt tochange a tire on the side of the vehicleclose to moving traffic. Pull far enoughoff the road to avoid the danger of beinghit when operating the jack or changingthe wheel.

WARNING: Use only the specifiedjacking points. If you use other positions,you may damage the body, steering,suspension, engine, braking system orthe fuel lines.

WARNING: Always use the jackprovided as original equipment with yourvehicle. If using a jack other than the oneprovided, make sure the jack capacity isadequate for the vehicle weight,including any vehicle cargo ormodifications. If you are unsure if the jackcapacity is adequate, contact theauthorized dealer.

WARNING: The jack supplied withthis vehicle is only intended for changingwheels. Do not use the vehicle jack otherthan when you are changing a wheel inan emergency.

WARNING: Make sure there is nogrease or oil on the threads or thesurface between the wheel lugs andnuts. This can cause the lug nuts toloosen while driving.

337


Wheels and Tires

E166722

Note: The jack does not requiremaintenance or additional lubrication overthe service life of your vehicle.Note: Passengers should not remain in yourvehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.1. Park on a level surface, set the parking

brake and activate the hazard flashers.2. Place the transmission in park (P) and

turn the engine off.

E175447

3. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.For example, if the left front tire is flat,block the right rear wheel.

4. Lift and remove the carpeted load floorpanel to access the minispare and jackkit.

5. Remove the wing nut securing thespare tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

6. Remove the spare tire and jack kit fromthe spare tire compartment.

E178186

7. Remove plastic wing nut and jack andlug wrench assembly.

8. Detach the lug wrench from the jackby turning the jack hex nut drive screwcounterclockwise. This will lower thejack and loosen the mechanical lock.

E181744

9. Unfold the wrench for use.

E175694

10. If your vehicle has wheel trim coveringthe lug nuts, use the tool providedwith the jack assembly to remove thewheel trim.

338


Wheels and Tires

E294584

11. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-halfturn counterclockwise, but do notremove them until the wheel is raisedoff the ground.

12. If your vehicle has a warning triangleand you are jacking the vehicle on theroadside shoulder, set the warningtriangle upright on the shoulder of theroad facing the direction of oncomingtraffic.

E242877

13. Arrows depict vehicle jacking pointson the underside of the vehicle at thelocations shown above. The warninglabel on the jack depicts the details.

14. Find the arrows embossed on thevehicle downward flange next to thetire you are changing.

E201100

15. Position the jack so that the vehicledownward flange rests in the jacksaddle flange between the arrows,as shown above. Raise the vehicle byusing the lug wrench to turn the jacknut clockwise. Once the flat tire is offthe ground, remove the lug nuts withthe lug wrench.

16. Replace the flat tire with the sparetire, making sure the valve stem isfacing outward. Reinstall the lug nutsuntil the wheel is snug against thehub. Do not fully tighten the lug nutsuntil the wheel has been lowered.

17. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

18. Remove the jack and fully tighten thelug nuts in the order shown. SeeTechnical Specifications (page341).

339


Wheels and Tires

1

2

3 4

5

E306781

19. To store the jack kit, fold the jackwrench handle and engage it to thebracket of the jack base using the lugwrench pin. Swing the wrenchupwards, adjust the jack height untilthe wrench hook engages to the holeon the jack. Turn the hex nutclockwise by hand until secure.Re-position the jack kit assembly intothe original vehicle position andsecure with the plastic wing nut. Makesure the jack is fastened securelybefore you drive.

E176165

20. Unblock the wheel and retrieve thewarning triangle.

Stowing the flat tireYou cannot store the full-sized road wheelin the temporary spare tire well.1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked

inside the jack channel. Lower thecarpeted load floor.

2. Stow the flat tire in the cargo area onthe load floor with the wheel facing up.Secure the flat tire with the retainerstrap by following the next steps.

E142906

3. Locate the rear left side and right sidecargo tie-down rings. Push the loop endof the retainer strap through one cargotie-down ring. Thread the non-loop endthrough the loop.

4. Weave the retainer strap through thewheel openings.

5. Locate the cargo tie-down in theopposite rear corner of the cargo area.Thread the retainer strap though thetie-down and pull tight.

340


Wheels and Tires

E143746

6. Secure the flat tire by tying a 2-halfhitch knot.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreignmaterials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheelhub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fastenersthat attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces ofthe wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheelmounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off whileyour vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.

lb.ft (Nm)*Bolt size

162 lb.ft (220 Nm)M14 x 1.5

*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only ourrecommended replacement fasteners.Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after anywheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

341


Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot boreAInspect the wheel pilot hole andmounting surface prior to installation.Remove any visible corrosion or looseparticles.

342


Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

SpecificationMeasurement

122Cubic inches.

Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.

1-3-4-2Firing order.

10:1Compression ratio.

0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap.

Drivebelt Routing

E161383

A

B

A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley grooveclosest to engine.

B. Short drivebelt is on second pulleygroove farthest from engine.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

SpecificationMeasurement

164Cubic inches.

1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.

Coil on plugIgnition system.

0.028-0.031 in. (0.7 - 0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.

10.0:1Compression ratio.

343



Drivebelt Routing

E191903

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent

FA-1912AAir filter element.

BAGM-48H6-760Battery.1

FP-71ACabin air filter.

FP-80 (odor)Cabin air filter.

FL-910-SEngine oil filter.2

SP-550Spark plug.3

WW-2755 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.WW-2760 (passenger side)

WW-1414 (rear window)1 The design of this Motorcraft part is for vehicles with Automatic-Start-Stop.2 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performancespecification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.3 For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs atthe recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 434).We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or atwww.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed ourspecifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions anddurability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.

344



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

Motorcraft Part NumberComponent

FA-1912AAir filter element.

BAGM-48H6-760Battery.

FP-71ACabin air filter.

FP-80 (odor)Cabin air filter.

FL-2062Engine oil filter.1

SP-578Spark plug.2

WW-2755 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.WW-2760 (passenger side)

WW-1414 (rear window)1 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performancespecification SAE/USCAR-36.2 For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs atthe recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 434).We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or atwww.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed ourspecifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions anddurability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.

345



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe vehicle identification number islocated on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX isrepresentative of your vehicle identificationnumber.The Vehicle Identification Number containsthe following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierABrake system, Gross VehicleWeight Rating, Restraint Devicesand their locations

B

Make, vehicle line, series, bodytype

C

Engine typeDCheck digitEModel yearFAssembly plantGProduction sequence numberH

346



VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

E167469

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations require that aSafety Compliance Certification Label beaffixed to a vehicle and prescribe wherethe Safety Compliance Certification Labelmay be located. The Safety ComplianceCertification Label shall be affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, the door latch post,or the edge of the door near the door latch,next to the driver's seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODEDESIGNATION

E167814

The transmission code is on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thefollowing table shows the transmissioncode along with the transmissiondescription.

CodeDescription

8Eight-speed automatic transmission 8F35

FEight-speed automatic transmission 8F57

347



CAPACITIES ANDSPECIFICATIONS - 2.0LECOBOOST™Use oil and fluid that meets the definedspecification and viscosity grade.If you do not use oil and fluid that meetsthe defined specification and viscositygrade, it could result in:• Component damage not covered by

the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.

• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Reduced brake performance.

Air Conditioning System

WARNING: The air conditioningrefrigerant system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. Only qualifiedpersonnel should service the airconditioning refrigerant system. Openingthe air conditioning refrigerant systemcan cause personal injury.

Capacities

Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant

3.21 fl oz (95 ml)20.81 oz (0.59 kg)All.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant (U.S.)R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)YN-33-A (U.S.)HS7Z-19B519-BA (Canada)

WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil (U.S.)Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / HuilePAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)YN-35 (U.S. & Canada)

Automatic TransmissionNote: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON® ULV transmission fluid shouldonly use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.The use of any other fluid could causetransmission damage

348



Capacities

QuantityVariant

11.4 qt (10.8 L) 1All.

1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C949-AMERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid (U.S.)Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-matique Motorcraft® (Canada)XT-12-QULV (U.S. & Canada)

Engine CoolantCapacities

QuantityVariant

9.7 qt (9.2 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant(U.S.)Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jauneMotorcraft® (Canada)VC-13DL-G (U.S.)CVC-13DL-G (Canada)

349



Engine Oil

E142732

E276075

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN PLUS requirements and display theAPI Certification Mark for gasoline engines.Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.

Capacities

Including the Oil FilterVariant

5.5 qt (5.2 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil(U.S.)Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30Motorcraft® (Canada)XO-5W30-Q1SP (U.S.)CXO-5W30-LSP6 (Canada)

350



Alternative Engine Oil forExtremely Cold ClimatesTo improve engine cold start performance,

we recommend that you use the followingalternative engine oil in extremely coldclimates, where the ambient temperaturereaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30

E240523

Fuel TankCapacities

QuantityVariant

18.4 gal (69.5 L)Front wheel drive.

18.5 gal (70 L)All wheel drive.

Grease

351



Materials

SpecificationName

ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray (U.S.)Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graissetout usage en aérosol Motorcraft® (Canada)XL-5-A (U.S. & Canada)

Hydraulic Brake SystemNote: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid could cause reduced brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials could result inbrake system damage and possible failure.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance MotorVehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance MotorVehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobilehaute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)

LocksMaterials

SpecificationName

-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant (U.S.)Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippantMotorcraft® (Canada)XL-1 (U.S.)CXC-51-A (Canada)

352



Power Transfer UnitCapacities

QuantityVariant

12.7 ± 1.7 fl oz (375 ± 50 ml)All.

Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium SyntheticHypoid Gear Lubricant (U.S.)Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium SyntheticHypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de hautequalité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85Motorcraft® (Canada)XY-75W85-QL (U.S. & Canada)

Rear Axle

QuantityVariant

28.1 ± 1.0 fl oz (830 ± 30 ml)All.

Materials

SpecificationName

-Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid (U.S.)Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid /Déconnecter le liquide du pont arrière Motorcraft®(Canada)XY-75W-QL (U.S. & Canada)

Washer ReservoirCapacities

QuantityVariant

Fill as required.All.

353



Materials

SpecificationName

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-trate with Bitterant (U.S.)Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield WasherFluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-craft® (Canada)ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)

CAPACITIES ANDSPECIFICATIONS - 2.7LECOBOOST™, STUse oil and fluid that meets the definedspecification and viscosity grade.If you do not use oil and fluid that meetsthe defined specification and viscositygrade, it could result in:• Component damage not covered by

the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.

• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Reduced brake performance.



Capacities


3.21 fl oz (95 ml)20.99 oz (0.595 kg)All.

354



Materials

SpecificationName




Capacities

QuantityVariant

12.2 qt (11.5 L) 1All.


Materials

SpecificationName


355




QuantityVariant

12.4 qt (11.7 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName


Engine Oil

E142732

E276075

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN PLUS requirements and display theAPI Certification Mark for gasoline engines.

356



Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessary

and could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.

Capacities


6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName


Alternative Engine Oil forExtremely Cold ClimatesTo improve engine cold start performance,we recommend that you use the followingalternative engine oil in extremely coldclimates, where the ambient temperaturereaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Materials

SpecificationName


357



E240523

Fuel TankCapacities

QuantityVariant

18.5 gal (70 L)All.

GreaseMaterials

SpecificationName


358



Hydraulic Brake System Note: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid could cause reduced brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials could result inbrake system damage and possible failure.

Materials

SpecificationName


LocksMaterials

SpecificationName



QuantityVariant

12.7 ± 1.7 fl oz (375 ± 50 ml)All.

359



Materials

SpecificationName


Rear AxleCapacities

QuantityVariant

28.1 ± 1.0 fl oz (830 ± 30 ml)All.

Materials

SpecificationName



QuantityVariant


360



Materials

SpecificationName


CAPACITIES ANDSPECIFICATIONS - 2.7LECOBOOST™Use oil and fluid that meets the definedspecification and viscosity grade.If you do not use oil and fluid that meetsthe defined specification and viscositygrade, it could result in:• Component damage not covered by

the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.

• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Reduced brake performance.



Capacities


3.21 fl oz (95 ml)20.81 oz (0.59 kg)All.

361



Materials

SpecificationName




Capacities

QuantityVariant

12.2 qt (11.5 L) 1All.


Materials

SpecificationName


362




QuantityVariant

12.4 qt (11.7 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName


Engine Oil

E142732

E276075

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN PLUS requirements and display theAPI Certification Mark for gasoline engines.

363



Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessary

and could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.

Capacities


6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.

Materials

SpecificationName


Alternative Engine Oil forExtremely Cold ClimatesTo improve engine cold start performance,we recommend that you use the followingalternative engine oil in extremely coldclimates, where the ambient temperaturereaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Materials

SpecificationName


364



E240523

Fuel TankCapacities

QuantityVariant

18.5 gal (70 L)All.

GreaseMaterials

SpecificationName


365



Hydraulic Brake System Note: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid could cause reduced brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials could result inbrake system damage and possible failure.

Materials

SpecificationName


LocksMaterials

SpecificationName



QuantityVariant

15.6 ± 1.7 fl oz (460 ± 50 ml)All.

366



Materials

SpecificationName


Rear AxleCapacities

QuantityVariant

28.1 ± 1.0 fl oz (830 ± 30 ml)All.

Materials

SpecificationName



QuantityVariant


367



Materials

SpecificationName


BULB SPECIFICATION CHARTReplacement bulbs are specified in thechart below. Headlamp bulbs must bemarked with an authorized D.O.T. markingfor North America to make sure they havethe proper lamp performance, lightbrightness, light pattern, and safe visibility.The correct bulbs will not damage thelamp assembly or void the lamp assemblywarranty and will provide quality bulbillumination time.

Exterior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.

LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.

PWM/LEDH15/LEDDaytime running lamps.

21WY21WFront direction indicator.

LEDLEDFront side marker lamp.

LEDLEDFront signature lamp.

559005LLHeadlamp high beam.

55H11LLHeadlamp low beam.

HIDD3SHigh-intensity discharge headlamps.

5W5WLicense plate lamp.

368




LEDLEDRear direction indicator.

LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.

LEDLEDReversing lamps.

LEDLEDSide direction indicator.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Interior Lamps


LEDLEDInterior lamp.

LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

369



CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TOA MOBILE NETWORK

What Is the ModemThe modem allows you to connect yourvehicle to the Internet to use when you areon the road.If you enable the modem using theFordPass app, you can access thefollowing services:• Locating and remotely starting, locking

and unlocking your vehicle. See theinformation in FordPass app.

• Automatic system updates.

Enabling the Modem UsingFordPass1. Open the FordPass app on your device

and log in.

2. Select your vehicle.3. Select the option for vehicle details.4. Select the option to activate your

vehicle.5. Switch the ignition on.6. Make sure that the name on the screen

matches the name shown in yourFordPass account.

7. Confirm the association of your vehiclewith your FordPass account.

Enabling the Modem Using theTouchscreen


1. Select FordPass Connect.2. Select Connectivity Settings.3. Switch connectivity features on.

370


Network Connectivity

NETWORK CONNECTIVITY – TROUBLESHOOTINGWi-Fi Network

Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom

I cannot connect to a Wi-Finetwork.

– Password error.• Enter the correct network password.

– Weak network signal.• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to

a place where the network signal is not obstructed.– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.

• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use thedefault name unless it contains a unique identifier,for example as part of the MAC address.

The Wi-Fi connectiondisconnects after successfulconnection.


a place where the network signal is not obstructed.

I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspotbut the network signalstrength is weak.

– Obstructed network signal.• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position

your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing theWi-Fi hotspot.

• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windowsbut not on the windshield, position your vehicle sothat the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot oropen the windows that are facing the hotspot.

• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windowsand the windshield, open the windows that arefacing the hotspot.

• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have thegarage door closed, open the garage door.

I cannot see a network in thelist of available networksthat I expect to see.

– Hidden network.• Make the network visible and try again.

371




I cannot see the Wi-FiHotspot name when I searchfor Wi-Fi networks on mycell phone or other device.

– System limitation.• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at

this time.

– Weak network signal• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to

a place where the network signal is not obstructed.– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet

connection.• Use an more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.

Software downloads taketoo long.

– No software update available.– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance

of terms and conditions.• Test the connection using another device. If the

network requires a subscription or acceptance ofterms and conditions, contact the network serviceprovider.

The system seems toconnect to a Wi-Fi networkand the signal strength isexcellent but the softwaredoes not update.

Mobile Network


– Modem is not enabled.• Switch connectivity features on.

– Weak network signal.• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the

network signal is not obstructed.

I cannot confirm theconnection of the modemwith the FordPass account.

372



CREATING A WI-FI HOTSPOTYou can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in yourvehicle and allow devices to connect to itfor access to the Internet.

Press the button to enter thesettings menu.

1. Select Connectivity Features.2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.Note: The vehicle hotspot default settingis on.3. Select Settings.4. Make sure that you have Wi-Fi visibility

switched on.Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting ison.

Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Nameand Password


1. Select Connectivity Features.2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.3. Select Settings.Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.4. Scroll to Hide password.5. Uncheck the box.

Connecting a Device to the Wi-FiHotspot1. On your device, turn on Wi-Fi and select

the hotspot from the list of availableWi-Fi networks.

2. When prompted, enter the password.

Purchasing a Data Plan1. Connect a device to the hotspot.Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portalopens on your device.

2. If the portal does not open on yourdevice, open a website and it redirectsto the vehicle network carrier’s portal.

Note: Secure websites do not redirect.Note: If you have an active plan, the systemdoes not redirect to the vehicle networkcarrier’s portal when you connect a device.Visit the vehicle network carrier’s websiteto purchase more data.Note: If data usage information is availablein the vehicle hotspot menu, it isapproximate.Note: If you carry out a master reset, thesystem does not remove your vehicle fromyour vehicle network carrier’s account. Toremove your vehicle from the account,contact your vehicle network carrier.Note: The vehicle network carrier providesVehicle Hotspot services, subject to yourvehicle network carrier agreement, coverageand availability.

CHANGING THE WI-FIHOTSPOT NAME ORPASSWORD


1. Select Connectivity Features.2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.3. Select Settings.4. Select SSID: ___.5. Enter your required SSID.6. Select Done.7. Select Password: ___.8. Enter your required password.9. Select Done.

373


Wi-Fi Hotspot

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING: Driving while distractedcan result in loss of vehicle control, crashand injury. We strongly recommend thatyou use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is thesafe operation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of any

hand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Radio Frequencies and ReceptionFactorsNote: Listening to loud audio for longperiods of time could damage your hearing.

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, theweaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andresult in the audio system muting.

Station overload

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:SYNC 3


E289642

Note: Depending on your vehicle optionpackage, the controls may look differentfrom what you see here.Note: The touchscreen system controlsmost of the audio features.Note: Some features, such as satellite radioor CD player, may not be available in yourlocation. Check with an authorized dealer.

374


Audio System

Adjusting the Volume

E265373

Turn to adjust the volume.

Changing Radio Stations

E265696

In radio mode, turn to search through theradio frequency band.In satellite radio mode, turn to find theprevious or next available satellite radiostation.

Ejecting the CD (If Equipped)

E265032

Press and release the button toeject a CD.

Inserting a CD (If Equipped)

Insert a CD into the CD slot.

Switching the Audio Unit On andOff


Note: The power button may be on thevolume dial.

Using Seek, Fast Forward andReverse

E265044

E265045

In radio mode, select a frequency band andpress and release either button. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds inthat direction.In CD mode, press and release to selectthe next or previous track. Press and holdto move quickly forward or backwardthrough the current track.In satellite radio mode, press and releaseto select the next or previous satellite radiostation. If you select a specific category,such as jazz, rock or news, press to find thenext or previous station in the category youselect.

375


Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:SYNC 3/BANG AND OLUFSENAUDIO SYSTEM


A

B

A

1 2

203A

A

E287572

Note: Depending on your vehicle optionpackage, the controls may look differentfrom what you see here.Note: The touchscreen system controlsmost of the audio features.Note: Some features, such as satellite radioor CD player, may not be available in yourlocation. Check with an authorized dealer.

Accessing the Sound Settings

E265271

Press and release to accesssettings for Treble, Midrange,Bass, Fade and Balance.

Adjusting the Volume

E265373

Turn to adjust the volume.

Changing Radio Stations

E265272

In radio mode, press and release + or - tosearch through the radio frequency band.In satellite radio mode, press and release+ or - to find the previous or next availablesatellite radio station.

Ejecting the CD (If Equipped)

E265032

Press and release the button toeject a CD.

Inserting a CD (If Equipped)

Insert a CD into the CD slot.

376


Audio System

Switching the Audio Unit On andOff


Using Seek, Fast Forward andReverse

In radio mode, select a frequency band andpress and release either button. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds inthat direction.In CD mode, press and release to selectthe next or previous track. Press and holdto move quickly forward or backwardthrough the current track.In satellite radio mode, press and releaseto select the next or previous satellite radiostation. If you select a specific category,such as jazz, rock or news, press to find thenext or previous station in the category youselect.

DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound quality

than analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visitwww.hdradio.com.When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the HD Radio logo on yourscreen. When this logo is available, youmay also see Title and Artist fieldson-screen.The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.When HD Radio broadcasts are active, youcan access the following functions:• Scan allows you to hear a brief

sampling of all available stations. Thisfeature still works when HD Radioreception is on, although it does notscan for HD2-HD7 channels. You maysee the HD logo appear if the stationhas a digital broadcast.

• Memory presets allow you to save anactive channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slotuntil the sound returns. There is a briefmute while the radio saves the station.Sound returns when finished. Whenswitching to an HD2 or HD3 memorypreset, the sound mutes before thedigital audio plays, because the systemhas to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, youcannot access a station you save if yourvehicle is outside the station’s receptionarea.

377


Audio System

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential Reception Issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are onthe fringe of the reception area, the station may mute dueto weak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back tothe analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is availableagain. However, if you are listening to any of the possibleHD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and staysmuted unless it is able to connect to the digital signalagain.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in theanalog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is anHD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Dependingon the station quality, you may hear a slight sound changewhen the station changes from analog to digital. Blendingis the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back toanalog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.

378


Audio System

Potential Station Issues

ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignmentby the radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeatin audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. Thereception issue may clear upas you continue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending inand out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait untilthe audio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is avail-able.

There is an audio mutedelay when selecting HD2 orHD3, multicast preset orDirect Tune.

No action required. Thestation is not available inyour current location.

The previously storedmulticast preset or directtune is not available in yourcurrent reception area.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3multicast channel whenrecalling a preset or from adirect tune.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Text information does notmatch currently playingaudio.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

There is no text informationshown for currently selectedfrequency.

No action required. This isnormal behavior.

Pressing Scan disablesHD2-HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not foundwhen Scan is pressed.

*http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corporationand foreign patents. HD Radio and the HDand HD Radio logos are proprietarytrademarks of DTS Ford Motor Companyand DTS are not responsible for thecontent sent using HD Radio technology.Content may be changed, added or deletedat any time at the station owner'sdiscretion.

SATELLITE RADIOSiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts avariety of music, news, sports, weather,traffic and entertainment satellite radiochannels. For more information and acomplete list of SiriusXM satellite radiochannels, visit www.siriusxm.com in theUnited States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

379


Audio System

Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors

Potential satellite radio reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antennaclear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterial as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andthe audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate theinterference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-ence

SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceNote: SiriusXM reserves the unrestrictedright to change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming including canceling, movingor adding particular channels, and its prices,at any time, with or without notice to you.Ford Motor Company shall not beresponsible for any such programmingchanges.

E208625

SiriusXM satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSiriusXM satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription term,which begins on the date of sale or leaseof your vehicle. See an authorized dealerfor availability.For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and acomplete list of SiriusXM satellite radiochannels, and other features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account.

380


Audio System

Locating Your ESNWith satellite radio as the source, use thetouchscreen to select the following:

1. Select Settings. See Settings (page413).

2. Select SiriusXM.3. Select SiriusXM information.

Troubleshooting

ActionConditionMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more thantwo seconds to produceaudio for the selectedchannel.

Acquiring…

If this message does notclear shortly, or with an igni-tion key cycle, your receivermay have a fault. See anauthorized dealer for service.

There is an internal moduleor system failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longeravailable.

Invalid Channel

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe tothe channel, or tune toanother channel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from theSiriusXM satellite or Siri-usXM tower to your vehicleantenna.

No Signal

No action required. Theprocess may take up tothree minutes.

Update of channelprogramming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolvesubscription issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call

1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide toturn off the Lock or Skipfunction on that station.

All the channels in theselected category are eitherskipped or locked.

None found

Check Channel Guide

No action required.SiriusXM has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

Subscription Updated

381


Audio System

USB PORT


E201595

The USB port allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks and chargedevices.Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle havedata transfer capabilities. See AuxiliaryPower Points (page 153).

MEDIA HUB


The media hub may be on the instrumentpanel or center console.The media hub may contain one or moreof the following inputs:See USB Port (page 382).

382


Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION


About SYNCThe system allows you to interact with theentertainment, information andcommunication systems on your vehicleusing voice commands and a touchscreen.The system provides easy interaction withaudio, phone, navigation, mobile apps andsettings.Note: You can switch the system on anduse it for up to an hour without switchingthe ignition on.Note: You can use the system after youswitch the ignition off for up to 10 minutesor until you open a door.Note: For your safety, some features arespeed-dependent. Their use is limited towhen your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph(5 km/h).

Using the Touchscreen

E293823

Status bar.AHome screen.BClock. See Settings (page 413).COutside air temperature.DFeature bar.E

Status BarCell phone microphone muted.

Audio system muted.

Software update installed.

Wi-Fi connected.

Cell phone roaming.

Text message received.

383


SYNC™ 3

Automatic crash notificationsystem off.

Cell phone network signalstrength.

Vehicle data sharing on.

Vehicle location sharing on.

Vehicle data and vehicle locationsharing on.

Wireless charger active.

Feature Bar

E100027

Select to use the radio, a USB, amedia player or a Bluetoothdevice. See Entertainment

(page 391).

E283811

Select to adjust climate settingsSee Climate (page 401).

Select to make calls and accessthe phonebook on your cellphone. See Phone (page 403).

Select to use the navigationsystem. See Navigation (page405).

Select to search for and usecompatible apps on your iOS orAndroid device. See Apps (page

410).

E280315

Select to adjust system settings.See Settings (page 413).

Cleaning the TouchscreenSee Cleaning the Interior (page 302).

Updating the SystemUpdating the System Using a USB Drive

Downloading an Update1. Go to the SYNC update page on the

local Ford website.2. Download the update.Note: The website notifies you if an updateis available.3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.Note: The USB drive needs to be empty andmeet the minimum requirements detailedon the website.4. Follow the instructions provided to

download the update to the USB drive.

Installing an UpdateNote: You can use the system when aninstallation is in progress.1. Disconnect all other USB devices from

the USB ports.2. Connect the USB drive with the update

to a USB port.Note: Installation starts automaticallywithin 10 minutes.

Updating the System Using a Wi-FiNetwork Connection

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

E280315


1. Select Automatic Updates.2. Select System Wi-Fi.3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.Note: Enter the network password toconnect to a secure network.

384


SYNC™ 3

Switching Automatic System UpdatesOn

E280315


1. Select Automatic Updates.2. Switch Automatic System Updates

on.The system is now set to check for andreceive system updates when it isconnected to a Wi-Fi network.Note: You can use the system when adownload is in progress.Note: If the system is disconnected fromthe Wi-Fi network when a download is inprogress, the download continues the nexttime the system is connected to a Wi-Finetwork.

Additional Information andAssistanceFor additional information and assistance,we recommend that you contact anauthorized dealer or refer to the local Fordwebsite.

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThe system allows you to interact with theentertainment, information andcommunication systems on your vehicleusing voice commands. This allows youto keep your hands on the steering wheeland focus on what is in front of you.

E142599

Press the voice control buttonon the steering wheel and waitfor the voice prompt.

Note: Press the voice control button againto interrupt a voice prompt and beginspeaking.Note: Turn the volume control when a voiceprompt plays to adjust the volume.Note: Press and hold the voice controlbutton on the steering wheel to use Siri onyour iOS device.The following voice commands aredesigned to help you from any screen:• List of Commands• HelpThe following tables list some of the morefrequently used voice commands. For acomplete list of voice commands, refer toour website.

General

DescriptionVoice Command

Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.1___ List of Commands

Cancel an active voice session.Cancel

Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.1___ Help

Return to the previous screen.Go back

Go to the main menu.Main Menu

385


SYNC™ 3


Go to the next page.Next Page

Go to the previous page.Previous Page1 Add the name of the feature to the command.

EntertainmentAudio Source


Use the radio.Radio

Use the CD player.CD Player

Use a Bluetooth device.Bluetooth Stereo

Use a USB or media player.USB

Radio


Listen to AM radio.AM

Tune to a specific AM frequency.1AM ___

Listen to SiriusXM radio.2Sirius Channel ___

Listen to FM radio.FM

Tune to a specific FM frequency.1FM ___

1 Add the radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.2 You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius Channel 16" or "SiriusThe Pulse".

386


SYNC™ 3

USB and Media Player


Play your music by category.1

Play Album ___

Play Artist ___

Play Genre ___

Play Playlist ___

Play Song ___

Play Audiobook ___

Play Podcast ___

Browse music on a USB device.

Browse All Albums

Browse All Artists

Browse All Audiobooks

Browse All Genres

Browse All Playlists

Browse All Podcasts

Browse All Songs

Browse your music by category on a USB device.1

Browse Album ___

Browse Artist ___

Browse Audiobook ___

Browse Genre ___

Browse Playlist ___

Browse Podcast ___1 Add an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcastname or track name to the command. Say the name exactly as it appears on your device.

Climate (If Equipped)

You can control the temperature of thevehicle using voice commands.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that forclimate voice commands it can be thedesired degrees for the temperaturesetting.

387


SYNC™ 3

To adjust the temperature, say:

DescriptionVoice command

Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F(15.5–29.5°C).

Set Temperature ___

Phone


Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth enabled device.Pair Phone

Redial the last number that you dialed.Redial

Dial a number.1Dial ___

Call a specific contact from your phonebook.2Call ___

Call a specific contact from your phonebook at aspecific location.3

Call ___ ___

Listen to a text message.Listen to Message

Listen to a specific text message from a list of textmessages.

Listen to Message ___

Reply to the last text message.Reply to Message1 Add the number you want to dial to the command.2 Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last nameof your contact exactly as it appears on your device.3 Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the firstand last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.

388


SYNC™ 3

Navigation (If Equipped)

Setting a Destination


Enter a destination address. When prompted,provide the house number, the street and city.

Find an Address

Search for a point of interest by name or by category.Find a Place

Search for a nearby point of interest by category.1Find the Next ___

Search for a point of interest category.1Find a POI Category

Set your saved home address as your destination.Drive Home

Set your saved place of work as your destination.Drive to Work

Display and select from a list of previous destina-tions.

Show Previous Destinations

Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Show Favorites1 Add a point of interest category or the name of a major brand or chain to the command.

Route Guidance


Cancel the current route.Cancel Route

Select an alternate route.Detour

Repeat the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction

Display an overview of the route.Show Route

Display a list of traffic events on your route.Show Traffic

Display the map on the touchscreen.Show Map

Display a two-dimensional map with north towardthe top of the touchscreen.

North Up

Display a two-dimensional map with the directionyou are traveling toward the top of the touchscreen.

Heading Up

Display a three-dimensional map with the directionyou are traveling toward the front.

Show 3D

389


SYNC™ 3

AppsGeneral


Start an app. The system prompts you for the appname.

Mobile Applications

Get a list of apps running on your device.List Applications

Search and connect to apps running on your device.Find Applications

Active App


Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.1___ Help

Close an app.1Exit ___

1 Add an app name to the command.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped)

DescriptionVoicecommand

Displays a list of traffic incidents.ShowTraffic

Displays the current weather map.ShowWeatherMap

Displays a list of fuel prices.Show FuelPrices

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5Day Fore-cast

390


SYNC™ 3

Voice Settings


Go to the voice settings menu.Voice Settings

Switch long voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Novice

Switch short voice prompts on.Interaction Mode Advanced

Switch call confirmation on. The system promptsyou to confirm before making a call.

Phone Confirmation On

Switch call confirmation off. The system does notprompt you to confirm before making a call.

Phone Confirmation Off

Switch the display of voice commands on.Voice Command Lists On

Switch the display of voice commands off.Voice Command Lists Off

Automatic Blower Motor SpeedReductionIf necessary, the system decreases theblower motor speed when you are usingvoice commands to reduce the amount ofbackground noise in your vehicle. It returnsto normal when you are done.

Switching Automatic Blower MotorSpeed Reduction OffSimultaneously press the A/C andrecirculated air buttons.

ENTERTAINMENT

A

BE293491

Audio source. Select to choosea different audio source.

A

Presets. Swipe left to view morepresets.

B

You can access these options using thetouchscreen or voice commands.

391


SYNC™ 3

Sources Press this button to select the source ofmedia you want to listen to.

Menu Item

AM

FM1SIRIUS

1CD

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB

Bluetooth Stereo

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, theydisplay here as individual source selections.

Apps

1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.

AM/FM RadioTuning a StationYou can use the tune or seek controls onthe radio bezel to select a station.

To tune a station using thetouchscreen, select:

Menu Item

Direct Tune

A pop up appears, allowing you to type inthe frequency of a station. You can onlyenter a valid station for the source you arecurrently listening to.You can press the backspace button todelete the previously entered number.

Once you have entered the station'scall numbers, you can select:

Action and Descrip-tion

Menu Item

Press to beginplaying the stationyou have entered.

Enter

Press to exitwithout changingthe station.

Cancel

PresetsTo set a new preset, tune to the stationand then press and hold one of thememory preset buttons. The audio mutesbriefly while the system saves the stationand then returns.You may be able to add additional presetpages using the settings option on thefeature bar.

392


SYNC™ 3

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (IfActivated)Note: This feature may not be available inall markets and requires an activesubscription.

E234451

SiriusXM satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSiriusXM satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription termthat begins on the date of sale or lease ofyour vehicle. See an authorized dealer foravailability.

For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and alist of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,and other features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestrictedright to change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming. This includes canceling,moving or adding particular channels, andits prices, at any time, with or without noticeto you. We are not responsible for any suchprogramming changes.Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Action and DescriptionMenu Item

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers ofa station.

Direct Tune

Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:

The system tunes to the station you select.Enter

You exit the pop-up and the current stationcontinues to play.

Cancel

You can press the backspace button to delete the previousnumber.

393


SYNC™ 3


Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned tothe current station. Changing stations erases the previousaudio.

Replay

When you are in replay mode, you are notable to select a different preset until youreturn to live audio. Pressing this buttonreturns you to the live broadcast.

Live

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The systemalerts you when it plays again on any channel.

ALERT

Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. SeeSettings (page 413).

Memory PresetsTo set a preset, tune to the station thenpress and hold one of the memory presetbuttons. The audio mutes briefly while thesystem saves the station and returns oncethe station is stored.

You may be able to add additional presetpages using the settings option on thefeature bar.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. SeeSettings (page 413).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting


For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clearof snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-storms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audiosystem may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-ence and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signalinterference

394


SYNC™ 3

Troubleshooting Tips

ActionCauseMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more than twoseconds to produce audio forthe selected channel.

Acquiring Signal

If this message does not clearshortly, or with an ignition keycycle, your receiver may havea fault. See an authorizeddealer for service.

There is an internal module orsystem failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longer avail-able.

Invalid Channel

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to thechannel, or tune to anotherchannel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from the Siri-usXM satellite or SiriusXMtower to your vehicle antenna.

Satellite acquiringsignal…

No action required. Theprocess may take up to threeminutes.

Update of channel program-ming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve subscrip-tion issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide or theSirius XM Settings tile to turnoff the Lock or Skip function onthat station.

All the channels in the selectedcategory are either skipped orlocked.

None found. Checkchannel guide.

No action required.SiriusXM has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

SIRIUS Subscriptionupdated

HD Radio™ Information (IfAvailable)To activate HD radio, please see the RadioSettings in the Settings Chapter. SeeSettings (page 413).

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.

395


SYNC™ 3

HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visit:

Website

www.hdradio.com

When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the following indicators onyour screen:

E142616

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digitalstation, and then changes to orange whendigital audio is playing. When this logo isavailable, you may also see Title and Artistfields on-screen.The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.Note: There is also an additional featurefor stations that have more than 1 HDmulticast (For example, HD1 or HD2). TheHD logo and Radio text appears as a button.Pressing this button allows you to cyclethrough all of the HD stations on thatspecific frequency. For example, if you areon 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressingthe button repeatedly causes the radio tocycle through the HD stations in a cyclicincreasing order.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Soundreturns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digitalaudio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digitalsignal.

Presets

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle isoutside the station’s reception area.

396


SYNC™ 3

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting


If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on thefringe of the reception area, the station may mute due toweak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to theanalog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unlessit is able to connect to the digital signal again.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analogversion. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radiostation, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the stationquality, you may hear a slight sound change when the stationchanges from analog to digital. Blending is the shift fromanalog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.


ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignment bythe radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip orrepeat in audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. The recep-tion issue may clear up as youcontinue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading orblending in and out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait until theaudio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is available.

There is an audio mutedelay when selectingHD2 or HD3, multicastpreset or Direct Tune.

397


SYNC™ 3


ActionCauseIssues

No action required. The stationis not available in your currentlocation.

The previously stored multicastpreset or direct tune is notavailable in your current recep-tion area.

Cannot access HD2 orHD3 multicast channelwhen recalling a presetor from a direct tune.

Fill out the station issue form.1Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

Text information doesnot match currentlyplaying audio.

Fill out the station issue form.1

Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

There is no textinformation shown forcurrently selectedfrequency.

1 You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corporationand foreign patents. HD Radio and the HDand HD Radio logos are proprietarytrademarks of DTS. The vehiclemanufacturer and DTS are not responsiblefor the content sent using HD Radiotechnology. Content may be changed,added or deleted at any time at the stationowner's discretion.

CD (If equipped)Once you select this option, the systemreturns you to the main audio screen.The current audio information appears onthe screen.

The following buttons are also available:

FunctionButton

You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicatethe track is set to repeat.

Repeat

398


SYNC™ 3

FunctionButton

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeatoff, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeatcurrent folder (a small folder displays).

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk playin random order.

Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo or USBBluetooth Stereo and USB allow you toaccess media that you store on yourBluetooth device or USB device such asmusic, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

FunctionButton

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting throughthree modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted witha small number one).

Repeat

Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.To get more information about thecurrently playing track, press the cover artor Info button.

For some devices, SYNC 3 is able toprovide 30-second skip buttons when youlisten to audio books or podcasts. Thesebuttons allow you to skip forward orbackward within a track.While playing audio from a USB device youcan look for certain music by selecting thefollowing:

FunctionButton

If available, displays the list of tracks in theNow Playing playlist.

Browse

This option, which is available underbrowse, allows you to play all tracks or tofilter the available media into one of thebelow categories.

New Search

Play All

399


SYNC™ 3

FunctionButton

Playlists

Artist

Albums

Songs

Genres

Podcasts

Audio books

Composers

This button allows you to choose a specificletter to view within the category you arebrowsing.

A-Z Jump

If available, this allows you to browse thefolders and files on your USB device.

Explore Device

USB Ports

E211463

The USB ports are in the center console orbehind a small access door in theinstrument panel.This feature allows you to plug in USBmedia devices, memory sticks, flash drivesor thumb drives, and charge devices if theysupport this feature.

Select this option to play audio from yourUSB device.

AppsThe system supports the use of certainaudio apps such as iHeartRadio through aUSB or Bluetooth enabled device.Each app gives you different on-screenoptions depending on the app's content.See Apps (page 410).

Supported Media Players, Formatsand Metadata InformationThe system is capable of hosting nearlyany digital media player, including iPod,iPhone, and most USB drives.Supported audio formats include MP3,WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.Supported audio file extensions includeMP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, andFLAC.

400


SYNC™ 3

Supported USB file systems include: FAT,exFAT, and NTFS.SYNC 3 is also able to organize the mediafrom your USB device by metadata tags.Metadata tags, which are descriptivesoftware identifiers embedded in themedia files, provide information about thefile.If your indexed media files contain noinformation embedded in these metadatatags, SYNC 3 may classify the emptymetadata tags as unknown.SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10devices.

CLIMATETouch the climate button on thetouchscreen to access your climate controlfeatures.Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. SeeSettings (page 413).

Accessing the Climate ControlMenu

E265038

Touch the button to accessadditional controls for the frontclimate system.

Directing the AirflowTouch the button to directairflow to the windshield airvents and de-mister.

Touch the button to directairflow to the instrument panelair vents.

Touch the button to directairflow to the footwell air vents.

You can direct air through any combinationof these air vents.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedTouch up or down to increase ordecrease the volume of air thatcirculates in your vehicle.

Setting the TemperatureTouch up or down on the left-handtemperature control to set the left-handtemperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.Touch up or down on the right-handtemperature control to set the right-handtemperature.

Switching Auto Mode On and OffTouch the button to switch onautomatic operation, then setthe temperature.

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.


A pop-up appears on the screento display the air conditioningoptions.

MAX A/C: Touch the button to activateand maximize cooling. The driver andpassenger temperatures are set to LO,recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel vents, air conditioningautomatically turns on and the fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed.

401


SYNC™ 3

A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioningon or off. Use A/C with recirculated air toimprove cooling performance andefficiency.Note: In certain conditions, such asmaximum defrost, the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate eventhough you switch off the air conditioning.


Touch the button.

Switching the Climate ControlledSeats On and Off

E265282

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various climatecontrolled seat settings.

Switching Dual Zone Mode On andOff

E265280

Touch the button to switch ontemperature control for theright-hand side of the vehicle.

Switching the Heated ExteriorMirrors On and Off

E266189

Touch the button.

Switching the Heated WindshieldOn and Off

Touch the button to clear thewindshield of thin ice and fog.The heated windshield turns off

after a short period of time.

Switching the Heated RearWindow On and Off

E184884

Touch the button to clear therear window of thin ice and fog.

Switching the Heated Seats Onand Off

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various heatsettings.

Switching the Heated SteeringWheel On and Off

Touch the button.

Switching Maximum AirConditioning On and Off

Touch the button for maximumcooling.

Recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel air vents, air conditioningturns on and the blower motor adjusts tothe highest speed.


Touch the button for maximumdefrosting.

Air flows through the windshield air vents,and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed.You can also use this setting to defog andclear the windshield of a thin covering ofice.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.

402


SYNC™ 3

Note: The heated rear window also turnson when you select maximum defrost.


Touch the button to switchbetween outside air andrecirculated air.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. This mayreduce the time needed to cool the interior,when used with A/C, and reduce unwantedodors from entering your vehicle.Note: Recirculated air may turn off, orprevent you from switching on, in all air flowmodes except MAX A/C to reduce the riskof fogging. Recirculation may also turn onand off in various air distribution controlcombinations during hot weather to improvecooling efficiency.

Switching the Ventilated Seats Onand Off

E268558

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various ventilatedseat settings.

Accessing Rear Climate Controls

E270447

Touch the button to accessadditional controls for the rearclimate system.

Rear Climate Control LockIndicator

E265289

Touch the button.When on, you can only operatethe rear passenger settings

through the front controls.

Switching Rear Auto Mode On andOff

Touch the button to switch onrear automatic operation, thenset the temperature.

Switching the Rear ClimateControlled Seats On and Off

E265282

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various climatecontrolled seat settings.

Switching the Rear Heated SeatsOn and Off

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various heatsettings.

Switching the Rear VentilatedSeats On and Off

E268558

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various ventilatedseat settings.

PHONE


403


SYNC™ 3

Check the compatibility of your device onthe regional website.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for theFirst TimeGo to the settings menu on your cell phoneand switch Bluetooth on.

Select the phone option on thefeature bar.

1. Select Add Phone.Note: A prompt alerts you to search for yourvehicle on your cell phone.2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.Note: A number appears on your cell phoneand on the touchscreen.3. Confirm that the number on your cell

phone matches the number on thetouchscreen.

Note: The touchscreen indicates that youhave successfully paired your cell phone.4. Download the phonebook from your

cell phone when you are prompted.Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,use the phone settings to specify theprimary phone. You can change this settingat any time.

Using Your Cell PhoneRecent Call ListDisplay and select an entry from a list ofprevious calls.

ContactsDisplay a smart search form to look up yourcontacts. Use the List button toalphabetically sort your contacts.

Change PhoneDisplay the list of paired or connecteddevices that you can select.

Phone SettingsChange ring tones, alerts or pair anotherphone.

Do Not DisturbReject incoming calls and switch ring tonesand alerts off.

Phone KeypadDirectly dial a number.

MuteMute the microphone.

Text MessagingSetting Text Message Notification

iOS1. Go to the settings menu on your cell

phone.2. Select Bluetooth.3. Select the information icon to the right

of your vehicle.4. Switch text message notification on.

Android1. Go to the settings menu on your cell

phone.2. Select Bluetooth.3. Select the profiles option.4. Select the phone profile.5. Switch text message notification on.

404


SYNC™ 3

Using Text Messaging

DescriptionMenu Item

Hear the text message.Hear It

View the text message.View

Call the sender.Call

Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply

Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)

1. Connect your device to a USB port.2. Follow the instructions on the

touchscreen.Note: Certain features of the system arenot available when you are using AppleCarPlay.

Switching Apple CarPlay OffSelect the settings option on thefeature bar.

1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.

Android Auto (If Equipped)

1. Connect your device to a USB port.2. Follow the instructions on the

touchscreen.Note: You might need to enable AndroidAuto from the settings menu.Note: Certain features of the system arenot available when you are using AndroidAuto.

Switching Android Auto OffSelect the settings option on thefeature bar.

1. Select Android Auto.

2. Switch Android Auto off.

NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: For more information, refer to ourwebsite.

Select the navigation option onthe feature bar.

E297557

Map view menu.AZoom out.BZoom in.CRoute guidance menu.DDestination entry menu.E

405


SYNC™ 3

Setting a DestinationDestination Entry Menu

DescriptionItem

Enter a destination address.Search

Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations

Set your saved home address as your destinationHome

Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work

Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites

Setting a Destination Using the TextEntry Screen

E297558

Text entry field.AAutomatic suggestions based onthe text you enter.

B

Information icon.CSearch.DKeyboard settings.E

Note: Select one of the suggestions tocopy the detail to the text entry field.

You can search by entering all or part ofthe destination, such as the Address, POICategory or Name, Intersection, City,Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you donot specify a location, the system willuse the current vehicle location. You canspecify a location by address, city, stateor zip code. For additional search support,please visit: support.ford.com.Note: Press the button in the top right-handcorner of the main map to display estimatedtime of arrival, remaining travel time ordistance to destination.

406


SYNC™ 3

Setting a Destination Using the MapScreen

E297559

Re-center the map.ASelected location.B3D map rotation. Swipe left orright.

C

Start route guidance.DDestination name.E

Select the location on the map.Select Start to begin route guidance.

Changing the Format of the MapDisplay the map in one of the followingformats:• A two-dimensional map with the

direction you are traveling toward thetop of the screen.

• A two-dimensional map with northtoward the top of the screen.

• A three-dimensional map with thedirection you are traveling toward thefront.

ZoomDisplay more or less detail on the map.Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoomin and out. Place two fingers on the screenand move them apart to zoom in. Place twofingers on the screen and bring themtogether to zoom out.

Route Guidance

E297560F

A

Turn indicator. Select to hear thelast voice prompt.

A

Point of interest.BEstimated time of arrival,distance to destination or timeto destination.

C

Current road.DMute guidance prompts.ECancel route guidance.F

Note: To change guidance prompt volume,turn the volume control when a guidanceprompt plays.

407


SYNC™ 3

Route Guidance Menu

DescriptionMenu Item

Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View

View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map

View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info

View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoidit.

Turn List

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link informationby pressing this button. This information requires an activesubscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a routeis not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When aroute is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearbyor on the route.

Traffic List

Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 413).Navigation Settings

View information about your current location.Where Am I?

Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route

View the entire current route on the map.View Route

View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour

Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints

The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order

Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go

Adjusting the Guidance PromptVolumeTurn the volume control when a guidanceprompt plays to adjust the volume.Note: If you have inadvertently adjustedthe volume to zero, press the turn indicatorbutton to play the last voice prompt andthen adjust the volume to the desired level.

Muting Guidance PromptsSelect the mute option on thescreen to mute guidanceprompts.

Note: The system mutes the next and allfuture guidance prompts.

Adding WaypointsYou can add a waypoint to a navigationroute as a destination along your route.You can add up to five waypoints.1. Select the search option on the map.2. Set a destination.3. Select Add Waypoint.4. Select Go.

408


SYNC™ 3

Canceling Route GuidanceSelect the route guidance menuoption on the active guidancescreen.

Select Cancel Route.

E294817

Note: The route guidance menu option isalways in the bottom right-hand corner ofthe main map.

cityseeker (If Equipped)

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)information is limited to approximately 1,110cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 inCanada and 15 in Mexico).

E225487

cityseeker, when available, is a service thatprovides more information about certainpoints of interest such as restaurants,hotels and attractions.

When you have selected a point of interest,the location and information appear, suchas address, phone number and a starrating.Press More Information to see a photo,a review, a list of services and facilities, theaverage room or meal price and the webaddress. This screen displays the point ofinterest icons.For restaurants, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, averagecost, review, handicap access, hours ofoperation, and website address.For hotels, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, pricecategory, review, check-in and checkouttimes, hotel service icons and websiteaddress. Hotel service icons include:• Restaurant• Business center• Handicap facilities• Laundry• Refrigerator• 24 hour room service• Fitness center• Internet access• Pool• Wi-FiAttractions include nearby landmarks,amusement parks, historic buildings andmore. cityseeker can provide informationsuch as star rating, reviews, hour ofoperation and admission price.

409


SYNC™ 3

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is availableon vehicles equipped with navigation andonly in select markets. You must activateand subscribe to receive SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link information. It helps youlocate the best gas prices, find movielistings, get current traffic alerts, view theweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see current sports scores.The system calculates a reasonableefficient route based on available speedlimits, traffic, and road conditions. You mayknow a local short cut that is more efficientat a given time than the route provided bySYNC 3, but you should expect a slightdifference in minutes or miles with theSYNC 3 route.

Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)

The Michelin travel guide is a service whichprovides additional information aboutcertain places of interest, for examplerestaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Pointsof interest that have Michelin travel guideinformation display a button to show youmore information. Push the button to seethe additional information. If you havepaired your phone with the system, youcan press the phone button to directlyestablish a call with the selected point ofinterest.

Navigation Map Accuracy andUpdatesHERE is the digital map provider for thenavigation application. If you find map dataerrors, you may report them directly toHERE by going to www.here.com. HEREevaluates all reported map errors andresponds with the result of theirinvestigation by e-mail.

The navigation system map data maycontain inaccurate or incompleteinformation due to the passage of time,changing circumstances, sources used andthe nature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which may lead toincorrect results. Inaccurate speed limitinformation, turn restrictions and otherroad attributes may affect the determinedroute and associated guidanceAnnual navigation map updates areavailable for purchase through yourdealership. Depending on your purchaseagreement, you might be eligible for freeMap update. You can choose to downloadthe Map data update onto a USB, order aUSB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automaticupdates. To update your Map data overWi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected toa Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files arelarge, so it is highly recommended toperform the update when free Wi-Fi isavailable otherwise high data rates mayapply. For USB updates, free map updateeligibility, and other details, contactdealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the UnitedStates and Canada or 01-800-557-5539in Mexico or visit our local website for moreinformation.

APPSThe system allows you interact with selectmobile apps while keeping your eyes onthe road. Voice commands, your steeringwheel buttons, or a quick tap on yourtouchscreen give you advanced control ofcompatible mobile apps. You can alsostream your favorite music or podcasts,share your time of arrival with friends, andkeep connected safely.

410


SYNC™ 3

When you start an app through the systemfor the first time, you could be asked togrant certain permissions. You can reviewand change the permissions that you havegranted at any time when your vehicle isnot moving. We recommend that youcheck your data plan before using yourapps through the system. Using themcould result in additional charges. We alsorecommend that you check the appprovider's terms and conditions andprivacy policy before using their app. Makesure that you have an active account forapps that you want to use through thesystem. Some apps will work with nosetup. Others require you to configuresome personal settings before you can usethem.Note: For more information about availableapps, visit catalog.ford.com.

Using Apps on an iOS DeviceSelect the apps option on thefeature bar.

1. If your device is connected via USB,switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone(page 403).

2. Connect your device to a USB port orpair and connect using Bluetooth.

3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, selectDisable.

4. Start the apps on your device that youwant to use through SYNC.

Note: If you close the apps on your device,you will not be able to use them through thesystem.5. Select the app that you want to use on

the touchscreen.Note: Connect your device to a USB port ifyou want to use a navigation app. Whenusing a navigation app, keep your deviceunlocked and the app open.

Using Apps on an Android DeviceSelect the apps option on thefeature bar.

1. If your device is connected via USB,switch Android Auto off. See Phone(page 403).

2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 403).3. Start the apps on your device that you

want to use through SYNC.Note: If you close the apps on your device,you will not be able to use them through thesystem.4. Select Find Mobile Apps.Note: The system searches and connectsto compatible apps that are running on yourdevice.5. Select the app that you want to use on

the touchscreen.Note: Mobile Apps on your device use theUSB port to establish a connection withSYNC. Some devices may lose the ability toplay music over USB when Mobile Apps areenabled.

Using Mobile Navigation on anAndroid Device1. Connect your device to a USB port.2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone

(page 403).3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via

USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.4. Select the apps option on the feature

bar.5. Select the navigation app that you

want to use on the touchscreen.Note: When using a navigation app, keepyour device unlocked and the app open.

411


SYNC™ 3

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

Equipped)


Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link maynot be available in all markets.

Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic andTravel Link, your vehicle must havenavigation.Note: A paid subscription is required toaccess and use these features. Go towww.siriusxm.com/travellink for moreinformation.Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic andclick on Coverage map and details for acomplete listing of all traffic areas coveredby SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsiblefor any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXMTraffic and Travel Link services or its use invehicles.When you subscribe to SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link, it can help you locate thebest gas prices, find movie listings, getcurrent traffic alerts, view the currentweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see scores to current sports games.


Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favoriteplaces, if programmed.

Traffic on Route

Traffic Nearby

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to yourvehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and theirshow times, if available.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.

Weather

Select to see the weather map,which can show storms, radarinformation, charts and winds.

Map

412


SYNC™ 3


Select to choose from a listing ofweather locations.

Area

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a varietyof sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easieraccess. The score automatically refreshes when a game is inprogress.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions

SETTINGS

E280315


E268570

Once you select a tile, press thebutton next to a menu item toview an explanation of the

feature or setting.

SoundSelect this tile to adjust sound the settings.

ClockSelect this tile to adjust the clock settings.

BluetoothSelect this tile to switch Bluetooth on andoff and adjust the settings.

PhoneSelect this tile to connect, disconnect, andmanage the connected device settings.

AudioSelect this tile to adjust the audio settings.

Driver Assist (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust Driver Assistfeatures like Parking Aids, Lane KeepingSystem, Pedestrian Detection, andAuto-Start-Stop.

VehicleSelect this tile to adjust vehicle settingslike windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKeysettings.

FordPassSelect this tile to adjust the FordPasssettings

GeneralSelect this tile to adjust settings likelanguage, measurement units, or to resetthe system.

911 Assist (If Equipped)

Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on andoff.

Automatic UpdatesSelect this tile to adjust the automaticupdate settings.

Mobile AppsSelect this tile to adjust permissions,enable, disable, and update mobile apps.

413


SYNC™ 3

DisplaySelect this tile to adjust display settingslike brightness and auto dim.

Charge Settings (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust the electric vehiclecharge settings.

Voice ControlSelect this tile to adjust voice controlsettings like command confirmations anddisplayed lists.


Select this tile to adjust navigation settingslike map preferences and route guidance.

Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust the position andmassage function of your multi contourseats.

Seats (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust the lumbarfunction of your seats.

Message Center (If Equipped)

Select this tile to view vehicle messages.

Personal Profiles (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust recalled memoryfeatures when using personal profiles.

Valet Mode (If Equipped)

Select this tile to enable and disable valetmode.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Select this tile to change the color orintensity of the interior lighting.

414


SYNC™ 3

SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTINGVoice Recognition


The system does not under-stand what I am saying.

– You are using the wrong voice commands.• See Using Voice Recognition (page 385).• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our

website.– You are speaking too soon.

• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.

The system does not under-stand the name of a track orartist.

– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voicecommands.• Connect your device to a USB port.• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice

control button on the steering wheel to use Siri toplay specific tracks.

– You are using the wrong voice commands.• See Using Voice Recognition (page 385).• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our

website.– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on

your device.• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it

appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviationsin the name.

The song or artist name may have some special char-acters that are not being recognized by the system.

– The name contains special characters, for example *,- or +.• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-

screen to select and play the track.

415


SYNC™ 3


– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears onyour device.• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly

as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-ations in the name.

– The name contains special characters, for example *,- or +.• Rename the contact on your device or use the

touchscreen to select and call the contact.

The system does not under-stand the name of a contactin the phonebook on mydevice and calls the wrongcontact.

– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears onyour device.• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly

as it appears on your device. The system appliesphonetic pronunciation rules of the selectedlanguage to the names of contacts in the phone-book on your device. Select the name of thecontact on the touchscreen and use the Hear itoption to get an idea of how the system expectsyou to pronounce it.

The system does not under-stand foreign names ofcontacts in the phonebookon my device.

– Device limitation.• The system uses text-to-speech technology and

uses a synthetically generated voice rather thanpre-recorded human voice.

The system voice promptsand the pronunciation ofsome words does not seemto be very accurate.

USB and Bluetooth Audio


I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,

reset it and try again.– Cable connection issue.

• Correctly connect the cable to your device and thevehicle USB port.

– Incompatible cable.• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer

of your device.

416


SYNC™ 3


– Incorrect device settings.• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-

install program or active security settings.• Check that your device is not set only to charge.

– Device lock screen enabled.• Unlock your device before connecting it.

The system does not recog-nize my device.

– Device limitation.• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very

hot or very cold weather conditions.– Cable connection issue.

• Correctly connect the cable to your device and thevehicle USB port.

– Incompatible cable.• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer

of your device.

The system does not under-stand the name of a track orartist.

– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voicecommands.• Connect your device to a USB port.• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice

control button on the steering wheel to use Siri toplay specific tracks.

I cannot stream audio frommy Bluetooth device.

– Incompatible device.• Check the compatibility of your device on our

website.– Device not connected.

• Pair your device. See Phone (page 403).– Media player not running.

• Start the media player on your device.

The system does not recog-nize the music on my device.

– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for exampleartist, song title, album or genre.• Repair the files on your device.

– Corrupt files.• Repair the files on your device.

417


SYNC™ 3


– Copyright protected files.• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-

right protected.– Unsupported file format.

• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.See Entertainment (page 391).

– Device indexing required.• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 413).

– Device lock screen enabled.• Unlock your device before connecting it.

Sometimes I cannot hear atrack playing on my device.

– Device malfunction.• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,

reset it and try again.

When I disconnect my iOSdevice the audio volume isset to maximum.

– Device limitation.• Turn the volume down on your device

If the system does not play the tracks on your USB devicein the correct order, the following information could help:

The system does not playthe tracks on my USB drivein the correct order. – If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the

system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sortedalphabetically by file name in the root directory.

– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after thesystem has finished indexing, SYNC plays all trackssorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tagregardless of where they are located. SYNC uses thefile name if the title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.

– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks fromthe browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sortedalphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless ofwhere they are located. SYNC uses the file name if thetitle in the ID3 Tag does not exist.

– If you are selecting a track when using the exploredevice option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabeticallyby file name in the folder you have selected. SYNCthen plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder youhave selected.

418


SYNC™ 3

Phone


During a call, I can hearexcessive background noise.

– Incorrect cell phone settings.• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell

phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.

– Cell phone malfunction.• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.

– Cell phone microphone muted.• Unmute your cell phone microphone.

During a call, I can hear theother person but theycannot hear me.

During a call, I cannot hearthe other person and theycannot hear me.

– System restart required.• Restart the system. Switch the ignition off and

open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle.Wait until the touchscreen is off and any illumin-ated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock thevehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.

I cannot download phone-book.

– Incompatible cell phone.• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our

website.– Incorrect cell phone settings.

• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from yourcell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.

– Incorrect system settings.• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See

Settings (page 413).– Cell phone malfunction.

• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.

– Incorrect cell phone settings.• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your

cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.• Check the location of the missing contacts on your

cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, movethem to the cell phone memory.

– Incorrect system settings.• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See

Settings (page 413).

A message displayssuggesting that my phone-book has downloaded but itis empty or it has missingcontacts.

419


SYNC™ 3


– Incompatible cell phone.• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our

website.– Cell phone malfunction.

• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.• Install the latest cell phone firmware.• Delete your device from system and delete SYNC

from your device and try again.• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See

Settings (page 413).

I cannot connect my cellphone.

Text messaging does notwork.

– You did not switch on text message notifications.• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone

(page 403).– Incompatible cell phone.

• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on ourwebsite.

– Cell phone malfunction.• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.

– Device message sharing is not enabled.• Check the permissions on your device to ensure

text message sharing is enabled.– Incompatible cell phone.

• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on ourwebsite.

I cannot hear text messages.

420


SYNC™ 3



I cannot enter a street namewhen I am abroad.

– Incorrect entry method.• Enter the street name with the country.

The system does not recog-nize coordinates.

– You are using the wrong coordinates format.• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,

E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if thedirection is West and keep a positive value if thedirection is East, for example 12.5412 means Eastand -12.5412 means West.

421


SYNC™ 3

Apps


The system cannot find anyapps.

– Incompatible device.• You will need an Android device with OS 4.3 or

higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pairand connect your Android device to find AppLinkcompatible apps. Connect your iOS device to aUSB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth.

I have a compatible deviceand it is correctly connectedbut the system still cannotfind any apps.

– AppLink compatible apps not installed on your device.• Download and install the latest version of the app.

– AppLink compatible apps not running on your device.• Start the apps to allow the system to find them

and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.– Incorrect app settings.

• Check and adjust the app settings on your deviceand allow SYNC to access the app if required.

I have a compatible device,it is correctly connected andmy apps are running but thesystem still cannot find anyapps.

– Apps failed to fully close.• Restart the apps and try again.• If you have an Android device with apps that have

an exit or quit option, use this and then restart theapps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in thesettings menu on your device.

• If you have an iOS device with iOS 7.0 or higher, tapthe home button on your device twice and thenswipe the app upward to close it.

I have an Android devicethat is correctly connected,I have restarted my appsand they are running but thesystem still cannot findthem.

– An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-ating system could result in apps not being found.• Switch Bluetooth off and on again to force the

system to reconnect to your device.

422


SYNC™ 3


I have an iOS device that iscorrectly connected, I haverestarted my apps and theyare running but the systemstill cannot find them.

– Cable connection issue.• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a

moment and then connect it again to force thesystem to reconnect to your device.

I have an Android devicerunning a media app whichthe system has found but Icannot hear the sound orthe sound is very quiet.

– Device volume is low.• Turn the volume up on your device.

I have an Android devicerunning a number ofcompatible apps but thesystem cannot find all ofthem.

– Device limitation. Some Android devices have a limitednumber of Bluetooth ports that apps can use toconnect. If you have more apps running on your devicethan the number of available Bluetooth ports, thesystem cannot find all of them.• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find

those that you want to use.

423


SYNC™ 3

Wi-Fi Connectivity


I cannot connect to a Wi-Finetwork.

– Password error.• Enter the correct network password.


a place where the network signal is not obstructed.– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.

• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use thedefault name unless it contains a unique identifier,for example as part of the MAC address.

The Wi-Fi connectiondisconnects after successfulconnection.


a place where the network signal is not obstructed.

I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspotbut the network signalstrength is weak.

– Obstructed network signal.• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position

your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing theWi-Fi hotspot.

• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windowsbut not on the windshield, position your vehicle sothat the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot oropen the windows that are facing the hotspot.

• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windowsand the windshield, open the windows that arefacing the hotspot.

• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have thegarage door closed, open the garage door.

I cannot see a network in thelist of available networksthat I expect to see.

– Hidden network.• Make the network visible and try again.

424


SYNC™ 3


I cannot see SYNC when Isearch for Wi-Fi networks onmy cell phone or otherdevice.

– System limitation.• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.

– Weak network signal• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to

a place where the network signal is not obstructed.– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet

connection.• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.

Software downloads taketoo long.

– No software update available.– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance

of terms and conditions.• Test the connection using another device. If the

network requires a subscription or acceptance ofterms and conditions, contact the network serviceprovider.

The system seems toconnect to a Wi-Fi networkand the signal strength isexcellent but the softwaredoes not update.

Personal Profiles (If Equipped)

Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom

You have not set up Personal Profiles.

I cannot create a profile.

You entered an invalid profile.

You did not select a memory button when prompted.

You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or youshifted out park (P) when creating a profile.

Personal Profiles has been switched off.

You did not select the lock button on the remote control.

I cannot link a remotecontrol.

The remote control selected was already associated withanother profile and the system declined to overwrite.

The system performed a profile recall when linking aremote control.

You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or youshifted out park (P) when creating a profile.

425


SYNC™ 3

Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom

You are using the old linking method.

Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.

My personalized settings donot save.

A different personal profile is active.

Another user changed the settings for the wrong personalprofile.

You did not create a personal profile.

My profile will not recall.

Personal Profiles is turned off.

The profile you requested is already active.

You did not link the memory button you are using to aprofile.

You did not link the remote control you are using to aprofile.

You are using the wrong remote control.

You are pressing a button other than the unlock or remotestart on a linked remote control.

You deleted the personal profile.

You switched the personal profiles off.My preset positions recall,but my profile does not.

The vehicle is in motion.My profile recalls but mypreset positions do not. The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-

ously active profile.

Unlink and relink your remote control in the PersonalProfiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.I lost a remote control.

You erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. Thiscould happen if you let a dealership add a new remotecontrol to replace a lost one.I lost all profiles.Someone performed a master reset without your know-ledge.

426


SYNC™ 3

Resetting the System1. Simultaneously press and hold the

seek up and the audio unit powerbuttons until the screen goes black.

2. Wait three minutes to allow the systemto complete the reset.

3. Press the audio unit power button toswitch the system on.

Note: You can reset the system to restorefunctionality that has stopped working. Thesystem reset is designed to restorefunctionality and not delete any data thatyou have stored.

Additional Information andAssistanceFor additional information and assistance,we recommend that you contact anauthorized dealer or refer to our website.

427


SYNC™ 3

For a complete listing of the accessoriesthat are available for your vehicle, pleasecontact your authorized dealer or visit theonline store web site:

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com

Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca

We will repair or replace any properlyauthorized dealer-installed Ford OriginalAccessory found to be defective infactory-supplied materials or workmanshipduring the warranty period, as well as anycomponent damaged by the defectiveaccessories.We will warrant your Ford OriginalAccessory through the warranty thatprovides the greatest benefit:• 24 months, unlimited mileage.• The remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.Contact an authorized dealer for detailsand a copy of the warranty.*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessorymanufacturer designs, develops andtherefore warrants Ford LicensedAccessories, and does not design or testthese accessories to Ford Motor Companyengineering requirements. Contact anauthorized Ford dealer for themanufacturer’s limited warranty details,and request a copy of the Ford LicensedAccessories product limited warranty fromthe accessory manufacturer.

For maximum vehicle performance, keepthe following information in mind whenadding accessories or equipment to yourvehicle:• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR or GAWR asindicated on the Safety ComplianceCertification label). Ask an authorizeddealer for specific weight information.

• The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and CanadianRadio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulate the useof mobile communications systemsthat are equipped with radiotransmitters, for example two-wayradios, telephones and theft alarms.Any such equipment installed in yourvehicle should comply with FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulations and should beinstalled only by an authorized dealer.

• An authorized dealer needs to installmobile communications systems.Improper installation may harm theoperation of your vehicle, particularlyif the manufacturer did not design themobile communication systemspecifically for automotive use.

• If you or an authorized Ford dealer addany non-Ford electrical or electronicaccessories or components to yourvehicle, you may adversely affectbattery performance and durability. Inaddition, you may also adversely affectthe performance of other electricalsystems in the vehicle.

428


Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISINGCOST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORDPROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

Ford Protect Extended ServicePlans (U.S. Only)Ford Protect extended service plan meanspeace of mind. It’s the extended serviceplan backed by Ford Motor Company, andprovides more protection beyond the NewVehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Whenyou visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on FordProtect extended service plans!

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for ItselfOne trip to the Service Center could easilyexceed the price of your Ford Protectextended service plan. With Ford Protectextended service plan you minimize yourrisk for unexpected repair bills and risingrepair costs.

Up to 1,000+ Covered VehicleComponentsThere are four mechanical Ford Protectextended service plans with different levelsof coverage. Ask your authorized dealer fordetails.1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over1,000 covered components, this planis so complete it’s probably easier tolist what’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.Ford Protect extended service plans arehonored by all authorized Ford dealers inthe U.S., Canada and Mexico.

That means you get:• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or

Lincoln dealership.• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using genuine parts.

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental BenefitIf you bring your car into your dealer forservice, we’ll give you a loaner to use forthe day.

Extended Rental BenefitsIf your vehicle is kept overnight for coveredrepairs, you are eligible for rental carcoverage, including warranty repairs, andField Service Actions.

Roadside AssistanceExclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,including:• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts.• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car.• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car

coverage or other transportation.

Transferable CoverageIf you sell your vehicle before your FordProtect extended service plan coverageexpires, you can transfer any remainingcoverage to the new owner. Which shouldgive you and your potential buyer a littlemore peace of mind.

429


Ford Protect

Less Cost to Properly Maintain YourVehicleFord Protect extended service plan alsooffers a Premium Maintenance Plan thatcovers all scheduled maintenance, andselected wear items. The coverage isprepaid, so you never have to worry aboutthe cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.Covered maintenance includes:• Windshield wiper blades.• Spark plugs.• The clutch disc (if equipped).• Brake pads and linings.• Shock absorbers.• Struts.• Engine Belts.• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and

o-rings.• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if

equipped).• Cabin air filter replacement every

20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electricvehicles only).

Interest Free Finance OptionsJust a 5% down payment will provide youwith an affordable, no interest, no feepayment program allowing you all thesecurity and benefits Ford Protectextended service plan has to offer whilepaying over time. You are pre-approvedwith no credit check or hassles. To learnmore, call our Ford Protect extendedservice plan specialists at 800-367-3377.Ford Protect Extended Service PlanP.O. Box 321067Detroit, MI 48232

Ford Protect Extended ServicePlan (CANADA ONLY)You can get more protection for yourvehicle by purchasing a Ford Protectextended service plan. Ford Protectextended service plan is the only servicecontract backed by Ford Motor Companyof Canada, Limited. Depending on the planyou purchase, Ford Protect extendedservice plan provides benefits such as:• Rental reimbursement.• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items.• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited WarrantyCoverage expires.

• Roadside Assistance benefits.There are several Ford Protect extendedservice plans available in various time,distance and deductible combinations.Each plan is tailored to fit your own drivingneeds, including reimbursement for towingand rental. When you purchase FordProtect extended service plan, you receiveadded peace-of-mind protectionthroughout Canada, the United States andMexico, provided by a network ofparticipating authorized Ford MotorCompany dealers.Note: Repairs performed outside of Canadaand the United States are not eligible forFord Protect extended service plancoverage.This information is subject to change. Formore information; visit your local Ford ofCanada dealer or www.ford.ca to find theFord Protect extended service plan that isright for you.

430


Ford Protect

GENERAL MAINTENANCEINFORMATIONWhy Maintain Your Vehicle?Carefully following the maintenanceschedule helps protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance and may help toincrease the value of your vehicle whenyou sell or trade it. Keep all receipts forcompleted maintenance with your vehicle.We have established regular maintenanceintervals for your vehicle based uponrigorous testing. It is important that youhave your vehicle serviced at the propertimes. These intervals serve two purposes;one is to maintain the reliability of yourvehicle and the second is to keep your costof owning your vehicle down.It is your responsibility to have allscheduled maintenance performed and tomake sure that the materials used meetthe specifications identified in this owner'smanual. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 343).Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceinvalidates warranty coverage on partsaffected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at YourDealership?Factory-Trained TechniciansService technicians participate in extensivefactory-sponsored certification training tohelp them become experts on theoperation of your vehicle. Ask yourdealership about the training andcertification their technicians havereceived.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®Replacement PartsDealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft andFord-authorized branded re-manufacturedreplacement parts. These parts meet orexceed our specifications. Parts installedat your dealership carry a nationwide24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)parts and labor limited warranty.If you do not use our authorized parts theymay not meet our specifications anddepending on the part, it could affectemissions compliance.

ConvenienceMany dealerships have extended eveningand Saturday hours to make your servicevisit more convenient and they offer onestop shopping. They can perform anyservices that are required on your vehicle,from general maintenance to collisionrepairs.Note: Not all dealers have extended hoursor body shops. Please contact your dealerfor details.

Protecting Your InvestmentMaintenance is an investment that paysdividends in the form of improvedreliability, durability and resale value. Tomaintain the proper performance of yourvehicle and its emission control systems,make sure you have scheduledmaintenance performed at the designatedintervals.Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-LifeMonitor system, a message appears in theinformation display at the proper oilchange interval. This interval may be up toone year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybridvehicles may exceed 10,000 mi(16,000 km).

431


Scheduled Maintenance

When the oil change message appears inthe information display, it is time for an oilchange. Make sure you perform the oilchange within two weeks or 500 mi(800 km) of the message appearing. Makesure you reset the Intelligent Oil-LifeMonitor after each oil change. See OilChange Indicator Reset (page 284).If your information display resetsprematurely or becomes inoperative, youshould perform the oil change interval atsix months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) fromyour last oil change. Never exceed one yearor 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oilchange intervals,Your vehicle is very sophisticated and builtwith multiple, complex, performancesystems. Every manufacturer developsthese systems using differentspecifications and performance features.That is why it is important to rely upon yourdealership to properly diagnose and repairyour vehicle.We have recommended maintenanceintervals for various parts and componentsystems based upon engineering testing.We rely upon this testing to determine themost appropriate mileage for replacementof oils and fluids to protect your vehicle atthe lowest overall cost to you andrecommends against maintenanceschedules that deviate from the scheduledmaintenance information.We strongly recommend the use of onlygenuine Ford, Motorcraft orFord-authorized re-manufacturedreplacement parts engineered for yourvehicle.

Additives and ChemicalsThis owner's manual and the ourWorkshop Manual list the recommendedadditives and chemicals for your vehicle.We do not recommend using chemicals oradditives not approved by us as part ofyour vehicle’s normal maintenance. Pleaseconsult your warranty information.

Oils, Fluids and FlushingIn many cases, fluid discoloration is anormal operating characteristic and, byitself, does not necessarily indicate aconcern or that the fluid needs to bechanged. However, a qualified expert, suchas the factory-trained technicians at yourdealership, should inspect discolored fluidsthat also show signs of overheating orforeign material contaminationimmediately.Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils andfluids at the specified intervals or inconjunction with a repair. Flushing is aviable way to change fluid for many vehiclesub-systems during scheduledmaintenance. It is critical that systems areflushed only with new fluid that is the sameas that required to fill and operate thesystem or using a Ford-approved flushingchemical.

Owner Checks and ServicesMake sure you perform the following basicmaintenance checks and inspections everymonth or at six-month intervals.

Check Every Month

Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.

432



Check Every Month

Windshield washer fluid level.

Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).

Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.

Check Every Six Months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Parking brake for proper operation.

Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point InspectionIn order to keep your vehicle running right,it is important to have the systems on yourvehicle checked regularly. This can helpidentify potential issues and prevent majorproblems. We recommend having thefollowing multi-point inspection performedat every scheduled maintenance intervalto help make sure your vehicle keepsrunning great.

Multi-Point Inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioninghoses

Engine air filter

433



Multi-Point Inspection

Suspension components for leaks ordamage

Exhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires (including spare) for wear and properpressure2

Fluid levels1; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expirationUse By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

Be sure to ask your dealership serviceadvisor or technician about the multi-pointvehicle inspection. It is a comprehensiveway to perform a thorough inspection ofyour vehicle. Your checklist gives youimmediate feedback on the overallcondition of your vehicle.

NORMAL SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor™Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-LifeMonitor that determines when you shouldchange the engine oil based on how youuse your vehicle. By using severalimportant factors in its calculations, themonitor helps reduce the cost of owningyour vehicle and reduces environmentalwaste at the same time.

This means you do not have to rememberto change the oil on a mileage-basedschedule. Your vehicle lets you know whenan oil change is due by displaying amessage in the information display.The following table provides examples ofvehicle use and its impact on oil changeintervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oilchange intervals depend on several factorsand generally decrease with severity ofuse.

When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message

Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval

Normal7,500–10,000 mi(12,000–16,000 km) Normal commuting with highway driving

434



When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message

Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval

No, or moderate, load or towingFlat to moderately hilly roadsNo extended idling

Severe

5,000–7,500 mi(8,000–12,000 km)

Moderate to heavy load or towingMountainous or off-road conditionsExtended idlingExtended hot or cold operation

Extreme3,000–5,000 mi

(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towingExtreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1

Change the engine oil and filter.2

Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection - recommended.

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level, if applicable. Consult your dealer forrequirements.

Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and the parking brake.

Inspect the engine coolant level/strength and the hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and the heat shields.

Inspect the rear axle and U-joints - all-wheel drive only.

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-joints - all-wheel drive only.

435



At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness ordrag.

1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil ChangeIndicator Reset (page 284).

Other Maintenance Items1

Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi(32,000 km)

Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Replace the spark plugs.Every 100,000 mi(160,000 km) Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).2

Change the automatic transmission fluid.Every 150,000 mi(240,000 km) Replace the accessory drive belt(s). 3

Change the engine coolant. 4At 200,000 mi(320,000 km)

1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil andfilter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.2 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.3 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).4 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every five years or100,000 mi (160,000 km).

Brake Fluid Maintenance1

Change the brake fluid.2Every 3 Years

1 Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time forthe interval.2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.

436



SPECIAL OPERATINGCONDITIONS SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIf you operate your vehicle primarily in anyof the following conditions, you need toperform extra maintenance as indicated.If you operate your vehicle occasionallyunder any of these conditions, it is notnecessary to perform the extramaintenance. For specificrecommendations, see your dealershipservice advisor or technician.

Perform the services shown in thefollowing tables when specified or within3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the messageappearing in the information displayprompting you to change your oil.• Example 1: The message comes on at

28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatictransmission fluid replacement.

• Example 2: The message has notcome on, but the odometer reads30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor youreset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)).Perform the engine air filterreplacement.

Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Inspect rear axle and U-joints (All-Wheel Drive only).Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.


Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

437



Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormalnoise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure treaddepth.

Change engine oil and filter.1Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)or six months

Perform multi-point inspection.


1Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil ChangeIndicator Reset (page 284).

ExceptionsThere are several exceptions to the NormalSchedule:

Rear Axle and PTU MaintenanceThe Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rearaxle (All-wheel Drive only) in your vehicledoes not require any normal scheduledmaintenance, unless the vehicle hasexperienced extended periods of extremeor severe duty cycle driving or both PTUand the axle has been submerged in water.Checking the PTU and rear axle fluid is notnecessary unless the unit shows signs ofleakage. Contact an authorized dealer forservice.

California Fuel Filter ReplacementIf you register your vehicle in California, theCalifornia Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item does not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liabilitybefore the completion of your vehicle'suseful life. Ford Motor Company, however,urges you to have all recommendedmaintenance services performed at thespecified intervals and to record all vehicleservice.

Hot Climate Oil Change IntervalsVehicles operating in the Middle East,North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa orlocations with similar climates using anAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certificationmark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normaloil change interval is 3,000 mi (5,000 km).If the available API SM or SN oils are notavailable, then the oil change interval is2,000 mi (3,000 km).

438



Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air FilterReplacementThe life of the engine air filter and cabin airfilter is dependent on exposure to dustyand dirty conditions. Vehicles operated inthese conditions require frequentinspection and replacement of the engineair filter and cabin air filter.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCERECORDAfter the scheduled maintenance servicesare performed, record the Repair Order #,Distance and Engine Hours in the boxesprovided.

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

439



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

440



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

441



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

442



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

443



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

444



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

445



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

446



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

447



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

448



ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theairbag cover, on the side of the front orrear seatbacks, or in areas that maycome into contact with a deployingairbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not fasten antennacables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.

WARNING: Keep antenna andpower cables at least 4 in (10 cm) fromany electronic modules and airbags.

Note: We test and certify your vehicle tomeet electromagnetic compatibilitylegislation. It is your responsibility to makesure that any equipment an authorizeddealer installs on your vehicle complies withapplicable local legislation and otherrequirements. Installation of someaftermarket electronic devices coulddegrade the performance of vehiclefunctions, which use radio frequency signalssuch as broadcast radio receiver, tirepressure monitoring system, push buttonstart, Bluetooth connectivity or satellitenavigation.Note: Any radio frequency transmitterequipment in your vehicle (such as cellulartelephones and amateur radio transmitters)must keep to the parameters in thefollowing illustrations and table. We do notprovide any other special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Car

E239120

449


Appendices

Van

E239122

Truck

E239121

450


Appendices

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

1501-30

2, 35050-54

2, 35068-88

2, 350142-176

2, 350380-512

2, 310806-870

451


Appendices

END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTVEHICLE SOFTWARE END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)

have acquired a vehicle having severaldevices, including SYNC ® and variouscontrol modules, ("DEVICES") thatinclude software licensed or owned byFord Motor Company and its affiliates("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Thosesoftware products of FORD MOTORCOMPANY origin, as well as associatedmedia, printed materials, and "online"or electronic documentation("SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The SOFTWARE islicensed, not sold. All rights reserved.

• The SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPYTHE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENTTO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OFANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICES and asotherwise interfacing with systemsand/or services provide by or throughFORD MOTOR COMPANY or its thirdparty software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speechrecognition component(s), you shouldunderstand that speech recognition isan inherently statistical process andthat recognition errors are inherent inthe process. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its suppliers shall beliable for any damages arising out oferrors in the speech recognitionprocess. It is your responsibility tomonitor any speech recognitionfunctions included in the system.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly:You may not reverse engineer,decompile, translate, disassemble orattempt to discover any source codeor underlying ideas or algorithms of theSOFTWARE nor permit others toreverse engineer, decompile ordisassemble the SOFTWARE, exceptand only to the extent that such activityis expressly permitted by applicablelaw notwithstanding this limitation orto the extent as may be permitted bythe licensing terms governing use ofany open source components includedwith the SOFTWARE.

• Limitations on Distributing,Copying, Modifying and CreatingDerivative Works: You may notdistribute, copy, make modificationsto or create derivative works based onthe SOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation or tothe extent as may be permitted by thelicensing terms governing use of anyopen source components included withthe SOFTWARE.

452


Appendices

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICES andrelated systems and services maycontain multiple EULAs, such asmultiple translations and/or multiplemedia versions (e.g., in the userdocumentation and in the software).Even if you receive multiple EULAs, youare licensed to use only one (1) copy ofthe SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale ortransfer of the DEVICES, provided youretain no copies, you transfer all of theSOFTWARE (including all componentparts, the media and printed materials,any upgrades, and, if applicable, theCertificate(s) of Authenticity), and therecipient agrees to the terms of thisEULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must include all priorversions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYmay terminate this EULA if you fail tocomply with the terms and conditionsof this EULA.

• Internet-Based ServicesComponents: The SOFTWARE maycontain components that enable andfacilitate the use of certainInternet-based services. Youacknowledge and agree that FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and service suppliers, itsaffiliates and/or its designated agentmay automatically check the versionof the SOFTWARE and/or itscomponents that you are utilizing andmay provide upgrades or supplementsto the SOFTWARE that may beautomatically downloaded to yourDEVICES.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, its affiliates and/orits designated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services componentsof the SOFTWARE after the date youobtain your initial copy of theSOFTWARE ("SupplementalComponents".) SOFTWARE updatesmay cause you to incur additionalcharges from your wireless serviceprovider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANYor third party software and servicessuppliers provide or make available toyou Supplemental Components andno other EULA terms are providedalong with the SupplementalComponents, then the terms of thisEULA shall apply. FORD MOTORCOMPANY, its affiliates and/or itsdesignated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided toyou or made available to you throughthe use of the SOFTWARE.

453


Appendices

• Links to Third Party Sites: TheSOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites. Thethird party sites are not under thecontrol of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,its affiliates and/or its designatedagent. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its affiliates nor itsdesignated agent are responsible for(I) the contents of any third party sites,any links contained in third party sites,or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or anyother form of transmission receivedfrom any third party sites. If theSOFTWARE provides links to thirdparty sites, those links are provided toyou only as a convenience, and theinclusion of any link does not imply anendorsement of the third party site byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliatesand/or its designated agent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:You recognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICES operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safetyand you agree to assume any riskassociated with the use of theDEVICES.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY separate from theDEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,CD ROM disk(s) or via web download orother means, and is labeled "For UpgradePurposes Only" or "For Recovery PurposesOnly" you may install one (1) copy of suchSOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as areplacement copy for the existingSOFTWARE, and use it in accordance withthis EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:All title and intellectual property rights inand to the SOFTWARE (including but notlimited to any images, photographs,animations, video, audio, music, text and"applets" incorporated into theSOFTWARE), the accompanying printedmaterials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTORCOMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materialsaccompanying the SOFTWARE. All titleand intellectual property rights in and tothe content which may be accessedthrough use of the SOFTWARE is theproperty of the respective content ownerand may be protected by applicablecopyright or other intellectual propertylaws and treaties. This EULA grants you norights to use such content outside itsintended use. All rights not specificallygranted under this EULA are reserved byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,and third party software and serviceproviders and suppliers. Use of any on-lineservices which may be accessed throughthe SOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, includingthe U.S. Export Administration Regulations,as well as end-user, end-use anddestination restrictions issued by U.S. andother governments.

454


Appendices

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and thirdparty software and service providers.PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer toFORD MOTOR COMPANY instructionsprovided in the documentation for theDEVICES product support, such as thevehicle owner guide.Should you have any questions concerningthis EULA, or if you desire to contact FORDMOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,please refer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICES.No Liability for Certain Damages:EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES ARISING FROM OR INCONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANYREMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIESOTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BEEXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

SYNC® Automotive Important SafetyInformation Read and followinstructions:• Before using your SYNC® system, read

and follow all instructions and safetyinformation provided in this end usermanual ("Owner Guide".) Notfollowing precautions found in theOwner Guide can lead to an accidentor other serious injuries.

General Operation• Voice Command Control: Certain

functions within the SYNC® systemmay be accomplished using voicecommands. Using voice commandswhile driving helps you to operate thesystem without removing your handsfrom the wheel or eyes from the road.

• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring aprolonged view of the screen while youare driving. Pull over in a safe and legalmanner before attempting to access afunction of the system requiringprolonged attention.

• Volume Setting: Do not raise thevolume excessively. Keep the volumeat a level where you can still hearoutside traffic and emergency signalswhile driving. Driving while unable tohear these sounds could cause anaccident.

• Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefullyread and follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.

• Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual(non-verbal) setup. Attempting toperform such set-up or insert datawhile driving can distract your attentionand could cause an accident or otherserious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safeand legal manner before attemptingthese operations.

• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided onlyas an aid. Make your driving decisionsbased on your observations of localconditions and existing trafficregulations. Any such feature is not a

455


Appendices

substitute for your personal judgment.Any route suggestions made by thissystem should never replace any localtraffic regulations or your personaljudgment or knowledge of safe drivingpractices.

• Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result inan unsafe or illegal maneuver, if youwould be placed in an unsafe situation,or if you would be directed into an areathat you consider unsafe. The driver isultimately responsible for the safeoperation of the vehicle and therefore,must evaluate whether it is safe tofollow the suggested directions.

• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Mapsused by this system may be inaccuratebecause of changes in roads, trafficcontrols or driving conditions. Alwaysuse good judgment and common sensewhen following the suggested routes.

• Emergency Services: Do not rely onany navigation features included in thesystem to route you to emergencyservices. Ask local authorities or anemergency services operator for theselocations. Not all emergency servicessuch as police, fire stations, hospitalsand clinics are likely to be contained inthe map database for such navigationfeatures.

Your Responsibilities and Assumptions ofRisk• You agree to each of the following:(a)

Any use of the SOFTWARE whiledriving an automobile or other vehiclein violation of applicable law orotherwise driving in an unsafe mannerpresents a significant risk of distracteddriving and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(b) Use ofthe SOFTWARE at excessive volumeposes a significant risk of hearingdamage and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(c) TheSOFTWARE may not be compatiblewith new or different versions of anoperating system, third party software,or third party services, and theSOFTWARE may potentially cause acritical failure of an operating system,third party software, or third partyservice.(d) Any third party serviceaccessed by or third party softwareused with the SOFTWARE (I) maycharge an additional fee for access, (ii)may not work correctly, on anuninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)may change streaming formats ordiscontinue operation, (iv) may containadult, profane or offensive content; and(v) may contain inaccurate, false ormisleading traffic, weather, financialor safety information or other content;and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE maycause you to incur additional chargesfrom your wireless service provider(WSP) and any data or minutecalculators that may be included in thesoftware program are for referenceonly, are not warranted in any way andshould not be relied upon in anyway.

• When using the SOFTWARE, you agreeto be responsible for and assume theentire risk to the items set forth inSection (a) – (e) above.

456


Appendices

Disclaimer of WarrantyYOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE ANDAGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES ANDSOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK ANDTHAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TOSATISFACTORY QUALITY,PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTEDBY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWAREAND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALLFAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANYHEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESAND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TOTHE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTYSERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED ORSTATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESAND/OR CONDITIONS OFMERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORYQUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR ANARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTYRIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOESNOT WARRANT (a) AGAINSTINTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENTOF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICESWILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)THAT THE OPERATION OF THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BECORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTENINFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BYFORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITSAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVEDEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRECOST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOMEJURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THEDISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIESOR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLESTATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOTFULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLEWARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTORCOMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THEWARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDINGWITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THEEXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICTBETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTIONAND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THEWARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction• The laws of the State of Michigan

govern this EULA and Your use of theSOFTWARE. Your use of theSOFTWARE may also be subject toother local, state, national, orinternational laws. Any litigation arisingout of or related to this EULA shall bebrought and maintained exclusively ina court of the State of Michiganlocated in Wayne County or in theUnited States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan. You herebyconsent to submit to the personaljurisdiction of a court in the State ofMichigan located in Wayne County andthe United States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan for anydispute arising out of or relating to thisEULA.

457


Appendices

Binding Arbitration and Class ActionWaiver(a) Application. This Section applies toany dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOTINCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TOCOPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THEENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OFFORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.Dispute means any dispute, action, or othercontroversy between You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, other than theexceptions listed above, concerning theSOFTWARE (including its price) or thisEULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,statute, regulation, ordinance, or any otherlegal or equitable basis.(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of aDispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANYmust give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,which is a written statement of the name,address, and contact information of theparty giving it, the facts giving rise to thedispute, and the relief requested. You andFORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt toresolve any dispute through informalnegotiation within 60 days from the datethe Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY maycommence arbitration.(c) Small claims court. You may alsolitigate any dispute in small claims courtin your county of residence or FORDMOTOR COMPANY’S principal place ofbusiness, if the dispute meets allrequirements to be heard in the smallclaims court. You may litigate in smallclaims court whether or not Younegotiated informally first.(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve anydispute by informal negotiation or in smallclaims court, any other effort to resolvethe dispute will be conducted exclusivelyby binding arbitration. You are giving up

the right to litigate (or participate in as aparty or class member) all disputes in courtbefore a judge or jury. Instead, all disputeswill be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,whose decision will be final except for alimited right of appeal under the FederalArbitration Act. Any court with jurisdictionover the parties may enforce thearbitrator’s award.(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedingsto resolve or litigate any dispute in anyforum will be conducted solely on anindividual basis. Neither you nor FORDMOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have anydispute heard as a class action, as a privateattorney general action, or in any otherproceeding in which any party acts orproposes to act in a representativecapacity. No arbitration or proceeding willbe combined with another without theprior written consent of all parties to allaffected arbitrations or proceedings.(f) Arbitration procedure. Anyarbitration will be conducted by theAmerican Arbitration Association (the“AAA”), under its Commercial ArbitrationRules. If You are an individual and use theSOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, orif the value of the dispute is $75,000 orless whether or not You are an individualor how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAASupplementary Procedures forConsumer-Related Disputes will alsoapply. To commence arbitration, submit aCommercial Arbitration Rules Demand forArbitration form to the AAA. You mayrequest a telephonic or in-person hearingby following the AAA rules. In a disputeinvolving $10,000 or less, any hearing willbe telephonic unless the arbitrator findsgood cause to hold an in-person hearinginstead. For more information, see adr.orgor call 1-800-778-7879. You agree tocommence arbitration only in your countyof residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’Sprincipal place of business. The arbitrator

458


Appendices

may award the same damages to Youindividually as a court could. The arbitratormay award declaratory or injunctive reliefonly to You individually, and only to theextent required to satisfy Your individualclaim.(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY willpromptly reimburse your filing fees andpay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. If you reject FORD MOTORCOMPANY’S last written settlementoffer made before the arbitrator wasappointed (“last written offer”), yourdispute goes all the way to anarbitrator’s decision (called an“award”), and the arbitrator awardsyou more than the last written offer,FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give youthree incentives: (1) pay the greater ofthe award or $1,000; (2) pay twice yourreasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and(3) reimburse any expenses (includingexpert witness fees and costs) thatyour attorney reasonably accrues forinvestigating, preparing, and pursuingyour claim in arbitration. The arbitratorwill determine the amounts.

• ii. Disputes involving more than$75,000. The AAA rules will governpayment of filing fees and the AAA’sand arbitrator’s fees and expenses.

• iii. Disputes involving any amount. Inany arbitration you commence, FORDMOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAAor arbitrator’s fees and expenses, orYour filing fees it reimbursed, only if thearbitrator finds the arbitration frivolousor brought for an improper purpose. Inany arbitration FORD MOTORCOMPANY commences, it will pay all

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. It will not seek its attorney’sfees or expenses from you in anyarbitration. Fees and expenses are notcounted in determining how much adispute involves.

(h) Claims or disputes must be filedwithin one year. To the extent permittedby law, any claim or dispute under thisEULA to which this Section applies mustbe filed within one year in small claimscourt (Section c) or in arbitration (Sectiond). The one-year period begins when theclaim or dispute first could be filed. If sucha claim or dispute is not filed within oneyear, it is permanently barred.(I) Severability. If the class action waiver(Section e) is found to be illegal orunenforceable as to all or some parts of adispute, then that portion of Section e willnot apply to those parts. Instead, thoseparts will be severed and proceed in a courtof law, with the remaining parts proceedingin arbitration. If any other provision of thatportion Section e is found to be illegal orunenforceable, that provision will besevered with the remainder of Section eremaining in full force and effect.

Telenav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TeleNavSoftware. Your use of the TeleNavSoftware indicates that you accept theseterms and conditions. If you do not acceptthese terms and conditions, do not breakthe seal of the package, launch, orotherwise use the TeleNav Software.TeleNav may revise this Agreement andthe privacy policy at any time, with orwithout notice to you. You agree to visithttp://www.telenav.com from time to timeto review the then current version of thisAgreement and of the privacy policy.

459


Appendices

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attentionto the TeleNav Software may pose a riskof injury or death to you and others insituations that otherwise require yourundivided attention, and you thereforeagree to comply with the following whenusing the TeleNav Software:(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwisedrive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggestedby the TeleNav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,places you in an unsafe situation, or directsyou into an area that you consider to beunsafe, do not follow such instructions;(c) do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the TeleNav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked;(d) do not use the TeleNav Software forany illegal, unauthorized, unintended,unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,or in any manner inconsistent with thisAgreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devicesand cables necessary for use of theTeleNav Software in a secure manner inyour vehicle so that they will not interferewith your driving and will not prevent theoperation of any safety device (such as anairbag).You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the TeleNav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failureto comply with the directions above.

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering theTeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav withtrue, accurate, current, and completeinformation about yourself, and (b) toinform TeleNav promptly of any changesto such information, and to keep it true,accurate, current and complete.

3. Software License• Subject to your compliance with the

terms of this Agreement, TeleNavhereby grants to you a personal,non-exclusive, non-transferable license(except as expressly permitted belowin connection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Softwarelicense), without the right tosublicense, to use the TeleNavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TeleNavSoftware. This license shall terminateupon any termination or expiration ofthis Agreement. You agree that you willuse the TeleNav Software only for yourpersonal business or leisure purposes,and not to provide commercialnavigation services to other parties.

3.1 License Limitations• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alteror otherwise change the TeleNavSoftware or any part thereof; (b)attempt to derive the source code,audio library or structure of theTeleNav Software without the priorexpress written consent of TeleNav;(c) remove from the TeleNavSoftware, or alter, any of TeleNav's orits suppliers' trademarks, trade names,logos, patent or copyright notices, orother notices or markings; (d)

460


Appendices

distribute, sublicense or otherwisetransfer the TeleNav Software toothers, except as part of yourpermanent transfer of the TeleNavSoftware; or (e) use the TeleNavSoftware in any manner that

I. infringes the intellectual property orproprietary rights, rights of publicity orprivacy or other rights of any party,ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming,privacy, consumer and child protection,obscenity or defamation, oriii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,obscene, libelous, or otherwiseobjectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, orotherwise permit unauthorized access bythird parties to the TeleNav Softwarewithout advanced written permission ofTeleNav.

4. Disclaimers• To the fullest extent permissible

pursuant to applicable law, in no eventwill TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,or agents or employees of any of theforegoing, be liable for any decisionmade or action taken by you or anyoneelse in reliance on the informationprovided by the TeleNav Software.TeleNav also does not warrant theaccuracy of the map or other data usedfor the TeleNav Software. Such datamay not always reflect reality due to,among other things, road closures,construction, weather, new roads andother changing conditions. You areresponsible for the entire risk arisingout of your use of the TeleNavSoftware. For example but withoutlimitation, you agree not to rely on theTeleNav Software for criticalnavigation in areas where thewell-being or survival of you or others

is dependent on the accuracy ofnavigation, as the maps or functionalityof the TeleNav Software are notintended to support such high riskapplications, especially in more remotegeographical areas.

• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMSAND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISEFROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOMOR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENTOF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITHRESPECT TO THE TELENAVSOFTWARE.

• Certain jurisdictions do not permit thedisclaimer of certain warranties, so thislimitation may not apply to you.

5. Limitation of Liability• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAVOR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERSBE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRDPARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THEINABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENTOR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OFPROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONOR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THEUSE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THETELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IFTELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

461


Appendices

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALLDIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES INCONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THEENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV ANDOF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERSSHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNTACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THETELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATESAND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOTALLOW THE EXCLUSION ORLIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THEABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONSMAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing Law• You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating tothis Agreement or the TeleNavSoftware shall be settled byindependent arbitration involving aneutral arbitrator and administered bythe American Arbitration Associationin the County of Santa Clara, California.The arbitrator shall apply theCommercial Arbitration Rules of theAmerican Arbitration Association, andthe judgment upon the award renderedby the arbitrator may be entered by anycourt having jurisdiction. Note thatthere is no judge or jury in an arbitrationproceeding and the decision of thearbitrator shall be binding upon bothparties. You expressly agree to waiveyour right to a jury trial. This Agreementand performance hereunder will begoverned by and construed inaccordance with the laws of the Stateof California, without giving effect toits conflict of law provisions. To theextent judicial action is necessary inconnection with the binding arbitration,both TeleNav and you agree to submit

to the exclusive jurisdiction of thecourts of the County of Santa Clara,California. The United NationsConvention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods shall notapply.

7. Assignment• You may not resell, assign, or transfer

this Agreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, inconnection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Software, andexpressly conditioned upon the newuser of the TeleNav Software agreeingto be bound by the terms andconditions of this Agreement. Any suchsale, assignment or transfer that is notexpressly permitted under thisparagraph will result in immediatetermination of this Agreement, withoutliability to TeleNav, in which case youand all other parties shall immediatelycease all use of the TeleNav Software.Notwithstanding the foregoing,TeleNav may assign this Agreement toany other party at any time withoutnotice, provided the assignee remainsbound by this Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between TeleNav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, TeleNav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTeleNav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreementare intended to, or shall be, granted or

462


Appendices

conferred by implication, statute,inducement, estoppel or otherwise, andTeleNav and its suppliers and licensorshereby reserve all of their respective rightsother than the licenses explicitly grantedin this Agreement.

8.3By using the TeleNav Software, youconsent to receive from TeleNav allcommunications, including notices,agreements, legally required disclosuresor other information in connection with theTeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")electronically. TeleNav may provide suchNotices by posting them on TeleNav'sWebsite or by downloading such Noticesto your wireless device. If you desire towithdraw your consent to receive Noticeselectronically, you must discontinue youruse of the TeleNav Software.

8.4TeleNav's or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall notaffect that party's right to requireperformance at any time thereafter, norshall a waiver of any breach or default ofthis Agreement constitute a waiver of anysubsequent breach or default or a waiverof the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is heldunenforceable, then such provision will bemodified to reflect the intention of theparties, and the remaining provisions ofthis Agreement will remain in full force andeffect.

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement,and will not be referred to in connectionwith the construction or interpretation ofthis Agreement. As used in this Agreement,the words "include" and "including" andvariations thereof, will not be deemed tobe terms of limitation, but rather will bedeemed to be followed by the words"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions• The Telenav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to Telenav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreementincludes end-user terms applicable tothese companies (included at the endof this Agreement), and thus your useof the Telenav Software is also subjectto such terms. You agree to complywith the following additional terms andconditions, which are applicable toTelenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERENorth America, LLCThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) andits licensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®, © Department ofNatural Resources Canada.

463


Appendices

HERE holds a non-exclusive license fromthe United States Postal Service® topublish and sell ZIP+4® information.©United States Postal Service® 2014.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService®. The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4The Data for Mexico includes certain datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2(Shanghai) Co., LtdThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on the otherhand. 20xx. All rights reserved

Terms and ConditionsPermitted Use. You agree to use this Datatogether with the Telenav Software solelyfor the internal business and personalpurposes for which you were licensed, andnot for service bureau, time-sharing orother similar purposes. Accordingly, butsubject to the restrictions set forth in thefollowing paragraphs, you agree not tootherwise reproduce, copy, modify,decompile, disassemble, create anyderivative works of, or reverse engineer anyportion of this Data, and may not transferor distribute it in any form, for any purpose,except to the extent permitted bymandatory laws.

Restrictions. Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so by Telenav,and without limiting the precedingparagraph, you may not use this Data (a)with any products, systems, or applicationsinstalled or otherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs.Warning. The Data may containinaccurate or incomplete information dueto the passage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which may lead toincorrect results.No Warranty. This Data is provided to you“as is,” and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. Telenav and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make noguarantees, representations or warrantiesof any kind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not limitedto, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliability,fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,use or results to be obtained from thisData, or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

464


Appendices

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may not applyto you.Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; ORFOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries do notallow certain liability exclusions ordamages limitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.Export Control. You shall not export fromanywhere any part of the Data or any directproduct thereof except in compliance with,and with all licenses and approvalsrequired under, applicable export laws,rules and regulations, including but notlimited to the laws, rules and regulationsadministered by the Office of ForeignAssets Control of the U.S. Department ofCommerce and the Bureau of Industry andSecurity of the U.S. Department ofCommerce. To the extent that any such

export laws, rules or regulations prohibitHERE from complying with any of itsobligations hereunder to deliver ordistribute Data, such failure shall beexcused and shall not constitute a breachof this Agreement.Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entire agreementbetween Telenav (and its licensors,including their licensors and suppliers) andyou pertaining to the subject matter hereof,and supersedes in their entirety any andall written or oral agreements previouslyexisting between us with respect to suchsubject matter.Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the lawsof the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used],without giving effect to (i) its conflict oflaws provisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which isexplicitly excluded. You agree to submit tothe jurisdiction of the State of Illinois[insert “The Netherlands” where EuropeanHERE Data is used] for any and alldisputes, claims and actions arising fromor in connection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by the UnitedStates government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with these End-User Terms,and each copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and shall betreated in accordance with such Notice:

465


Appendices

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425

West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois60606

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to

these End-User Terms under which thisData was provided.

© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend provided herein,the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialmust notify HERE prior to seekingadditional or alternative rights in the Data.

I. US/Canada Territory

A. United States Data. The End-UserTerms for any Application containingData for the United States shall containthe following notices:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive licensefrom the United States PostalService® to publish and sell ZIP+4®information.”

“©United States Postal Service®20XX. Prices are not established,controlled or approved by the UnitedStates Postal Service®. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

B. Canada Data. The following provi-sions apply to the Data for Canada,which may include or reflect data fromthird party licensors (“Third PartyData”), including Her Majesty the Queenin Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),Canada Post Corporation (“CanadaPost”) and the Department of NaturalResources of Canada (“NRCan”):

1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Clientagrees that its use of the Third PartyData is subject to the following provi-sions:

a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Datais licensed on an “as is” basis. Thelicensors of such data, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,make no guarantees, representa-tions or warranties respecting suchdata, either express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, includingbut not limited to, effectiveness,completeness, accuracy or fitnessfor a particular purpose.

b. Limitation on Liability: The ThirdParty Data licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,shall not be liable: (i) in respect ofany claim, demand or action, irre-spective of the nature of the causeof the claim, demand or actionalleging any loss, injury or damages,direct or indirect, which may resultfrom the use or possession of suchData; or (ii) in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in theData.

466


Appendices

2. Copyright Notice: In connection witheach copy of all or any portion of theData for the Territory of Canada, Clientshall affix in a conspicuous manner thefollowing copyright notice on at leastone of: (i) the label for the storagemedia of the copy; (ii) the packagingfor the copy; or (iii) other materialspackaged with the copy, such as usermanuals or end user license agree-ments: “This data includes informationtaken with permission from Canadianauthorities, including © Her Majestythe Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © CanadaPost Corporation, GeoBase®, © TheDepartment of Natural ResourcesCanada. All rights reserved.”

3. End-User Terms: Except as other-wise agreed by the parties, in connec-tion with the provision of any portionof the Data for the Territory of Canadato End-Users as may be authorizedunder the Agreement, Client shallprovide such End-Users, in a reason-ably conspicuous manner, with terms(set forth with other end user termsrequired to be provided under theAgreement, or as otherwise may beprovided, by Client) which shall includethe following provisions on behalf ofthe Third Party Data licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan:

The Data may include or reflectdata of licensors, including HerMajesty the Queen in the Right ofCanada (“Her Majesty”), CanadaPost Corporation (“Canada Post”)and the Department of NaturalResources Canada (“NRCan”). Suchdata is licensed on an “as is” basis.The licensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, make noguarantees, representations orwarranties respecting such data,

either express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but notlimited to, effectiveness, complete-ness, accuracy or fitness for aparticular purpose. The licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan, shall not be liable inrespect of any claim, demand oraction, irrespective of the nature ofthe cause of the claim, demand oraction alleging any loss, injury ordamages, direct or indirect, whichmay result from the use or posses-sion of the data or the Data. Thelicensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, shall notbe liable in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in the dataor the Data.End User shall indemnify and saveharmless the licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,and their officers, employees andagents from and against any claim,demand or action, irrespective ofthe nature of the cause of the claim,demand or action, alleging loss,costs, expenses, damages or injuries(including injuries resulting in death)arising out of the use or possessionof the data or the Data.

4. Additional Provisions: The termscontained in this Section are in addi-tion to all of the rights and obligationsof the parties under the Agreement.To the extent that any of the provi-sions of this Section are inconsistentwith, or conflict with, any other provi-sions of the Agreement, the provisionsof this Section shall prevail.

467


Appendices

II. Mexico. The following provision appliesto the Data for Mexico, which includescertain data from the Instituto Nacionalde Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):

A. Any and all copies of the Data and/orpackaging containing Data for Mexicoshall contain the following notice:“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional deEstadística y Geografía)”

III. Latin America Territory

A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeTerritory

IGN “INSTITUTOGEOGRAFICO NACIONALARGENTINO”

Argen-tina

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICOMILITAR DEL ECUADORAUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DEENERO DE 2011”

Ecuador

“source: © IGN 2009 - BDTOPO ®”

“Fuente: INEGI (InstitutoNacional de Estadística yGeografía)”

Guade-loupe,FrenchGuianaandMarti-niqueMexico

IV. Middle East Territory


NoticeCountry

“© Royal JordanianGeographic Centre”. Theforegoing notice requirementfor Jordan Data is a materialterm of the Agreement. IfClient or any of its permitted

Jordan

sublicensees (if any) fail tomeet such requirement,HERE shall have the right toterminate Client’s licensewith respect to the JordanData.

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permittedsublicensees (if any) are restricted fromlicensing and/or otherwise distributingHERE’s database for the country ofJordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanianentities for use of the Jordan Data solelyin Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.In addition, Client, its permitted subli-censees (if any) and End-Users arerestricted from using the Jordan Data inEnterprise Applications if such party is(i) a non-Jordanian entity using theJordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) aJordan-based customer. For purposesof the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-ations, GIS applications, mobile businessasset management applications, callcenter applications, telematics applica-tions, public organization Internetapplications or for providing geocodingservices.

468


Appendices

V. Europe Territory

A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe

1. General Restrictions Applicable toTraffic Codes. Client acknowledgesand agrees that in certain countries ofthe Europe Territory, Client will needto obtain rights directly from thirdparty RDS-TMC code providers toreceive and use the Traffic Codes inthe Data and to deliver to End-UsersTransactions in any way derived fromor based on such Traffic Codes. Forsuch countries, HERE shall deliver theData incorporating Traffic Codes toClient only after receiving certificationfrom Client of its having obtained suchrights.

2. Display of Third Party RightsLegends for Belgium. Client shall, foreach Transaction that uses TrafficCodes for Belgium, provide thefollowing notice to the End-User:“Traffic Codes for Belgium areprovided by the Ministerie van deVlaamse Gemeenschap and theMinistèrie de l’Equipement et desTransports.”

B. Paper Maps. With respect to anylicense granted to Client relating tomaking, selling or distributing papermaps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper orpaper-like medium): (a) such licensewith respect to Data for the Territory ofGreat Britain is conditioned on Client’sentering into and complying with aseparate written agreement with theOrdnance Survey (“OS”) to create andsell paper maps, Client’s paying to theOS any and all applicable paper maproyalties, and Client’s complying withthe OS copyright notice requirements;(b) such license for selling or otherwisedistributing for charge with respect toData for the Territory of Czech Republic

is conditioned on Client’s obtaining priorwritten consent from Kartografie a.s.;(c) such license for selling or distributingwith respect to Data for the Territory ofSwitzerland is conditioned on Client’sobtaining a permit from Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland; (d)Client is restricted from using Data forthe Territory of France to create papermaps with a scale between 1:5,000 and1:250,000; and (e) Client is restrictedfrom using any Data to create, sell ordistribute paper maps that are the sameor substantially similar, in terms of datacontent and specific use of color,symbols and scale, to paper mapspublished by the European nationalmapping agencies, including withoutlimitation, Landervermessungämter ofGermany, Topografische Dienst of theNetherlands, Nationaal GeografischInstituut of Belgium, Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland,Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-swesen of Austria, and the NationalLand Survey of Sweden.

C. OS Enforcement. Without limitingSection IV(B) above, with respect toData for the Territory of Great Britain,Client acknowledges and agrees thatthe Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bringa direct action against Client to enforcecompliance with the OS copyright notice(see Section IV(D) below) and papermap requirements (see Section IV(B)above) contained in this Agreement.

D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeCountry(ies)

469


Appendices

“© Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen”

Austria

“© EuroGeographics”

CroatiaCyprus,Estonia,Latvia,Lithuania,Moldova,Poland,Sloveniaand/orUkraine

“source: © IGN 2009 – BDTOPO ®”

France

“Die Grundlagendatenwurden mit Genehmigungder zuständigen Behördenentnommen”

Germany

“Contains OrdnanceSurvey data © Crowncopyright and databaseright 2010 Contains RoyalMail data © Royal Mailcopyright and databaseright 2010”

Great Britain

“Copyright GeomaticsLtd.”

Greece

“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map Ltd.”

Hungary

“La Banca Dati Italiana èstata prodotta usandoquale riferimento anchecartografia numerica edal tratto prodotta e fornitadalla Regione Toscana.”

Italy

“Copyright © 2000;Norwegian MappingAuthority”

Norway

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal

“Información geográficapropiedad del CNIG”

Spain

“Based upon electronicdata © National LandSurvey Sweden.”

Sweden

“TopografischeGrundlage: © Bundesamtfür Landestopographie.

Switzerland

E. Respective Country Distribution. Clientacknowledges that HERE has notreceived approvals to distribute mapdata for the following countries in suchrespective countries: Albania, Belarus,Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.HERE may update such list from time totime. The license rights granted to Clientunder this TL with respect to the Datafor such countries are contingent uponClient’s compliance with all applicablelaws and regulations, including, withoutlimitation, any required licenses orapprovals to distribute the Applicationincorporating such Data in suchrespective countries.

VI. Australia Territory


Copyright. Based on data providedunder license from PSMA AustraliaLimited (www.psma.com.au).

470


Appendices

Product incorporates data which is ©20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GMHolden Limited, Intelematics AustraliaPty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.

B. Third Party Notices for Australia. Inaddition to the foregoing, the End-UserTerms for any Application containingRDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australiashall contain the following notice:“Product incorporates traffic locationcodes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-tion Limited and its licensors.”

AT&T Vehicle Network CarrierTelematics DisclosureEND USER FOR PURPOSES OF THISSECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONALREPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITEDASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THISSECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESSSERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITSAFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS ANDTHEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORSAND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NOCONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITHTHE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICECARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRDPARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANYAGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD ANDUNDERLYING CARRIER. END USERUNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THEUNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANYKIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THEACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OFCONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OROTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVEREMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANYWAY IN CONNECTION WITH THISAGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSEWHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR

DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDEDHEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENTOF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TOEXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USERFOR THE SERVICES DURING THETWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THEDATE THE CLAIM AROSE.(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFYAND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYINGWIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITSOFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTSAGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATIONCLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANYPROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURYOR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, INCONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENTOR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, ORINABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPTWHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THEUNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSSNEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THETERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHTIN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THEDEVICE.(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THATFORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIERCANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OFWIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILLNOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OFSECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THESERVICESTHE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USEONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELLTHE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY ENDUSER UNDERSTANDS THAT THEUNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOTGUARANTEE ANY END USERUNINTERRUPTED SERVICE ORCOVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIERDOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERSCAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THESERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER

471


Appendices

MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY ORFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCEREGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BELIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITSOWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OROMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICEPROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THEUNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE ORINJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION ORTERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYINGCARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURYCAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY INCONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHEREMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULLEXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE ENDUSER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES ANDHOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIERHARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANYAND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON ORENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATUREARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATINGTO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICESPROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIEROR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLEOR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGEDNEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYINGCARRIER.

VII. China Territory

Personal Use OnlyYou agree to use this Data together with[insert name of Client Application] for thesolely personal, non-commercial purposesfor which you were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, but subjectto the restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you may copy this Data onlyas necessary for your personal use to (i)

view it, and (ii) save it, provided that youdo not remove any copyright notices thatappear and do not modify the Data in anyway. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,copy, modify, decompile, disassemble orreverse engineer any portion of this Data,and may not transfer or distribute it in anyform, for any purpose, except to the extentpermitted by mandatory laws.

RestrictionsExcept where you have been specificallylicensed to do so by NAV2 , and withoutlimiting the preceding paragraph, you maynot (a) use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs. You agree to ceaseusing this Data if you fail to comply withthese terms and conditions.

Limited WarrantyNAV2 warrants that (a) the Data willperform substantially in accordance withthe accompanying written materials for aperiod of ninety (90) days from the dateof receipt, and (b) any support servicesprovided by NAV2 shall be substantially asdescribed in applicable written materialsprovided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’ssupport engineers will make commerciallyreasonable efforts to solve any problemissues.

472


Appendices

rigCustomer RemediesNAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability andyour exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’ssole discretion, either (a) return of the pricepaid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement ofthe Data that do not meet NAV2’s LimitedWarranty and that are returned to NAV2with a copy of your receipt. This LimitedWarranty is void if failure of the Data hasresulted from accident, abuse, ormisapplication. Any replacement Data willbe warranted for the remainder of theoriginal warranty period or thirty (30) days,whichever is longer. Neither these remediesnor any product support services offeredby NAV2 are available without proof ofpurchase from an authorized internationalsource.

No Other Warranty:EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTYSET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENTPERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warrantyexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Liability:TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDERNO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s ORITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDEREXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liabilityexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Export ControlYou agree not to export to anywhere anypart of the Data provided to you or anydirect product thereof except incompliance with, and with all licenses andapprovals required under, applicableexport laws, rules and regulations.

IP ProtectionThe Data are owned by NAV2 or itssuppliers and are protected by applicablecopyright and other intellectual propertylaw and treaties. The Data are providedsolely on the basis of a license to use, notsale.

Entire AgreementThese terms and conditions constitute theentire agreement between NAV2(and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to the subjectmatter hereof, and supersedes in theirentirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing betweenus with respect to such subject matter.

473


Appendices

Governing Law.The above terms and conditions shall begoverned by the laws of the People’sRepublic of China, without giving effect to(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) theUnited Nations Convention for Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods, whichis explicitly excluded. Any dispute arisingfrom or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder shall besubmitted to the Shanghai InternationalEconomic and Trade ArbitrationCommission for arbitration.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright©2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007Gracenote. This product and service maypractice one or more of the following U.S.Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;6,330,593 and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied underlicense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent 6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608("Gracenote").The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers

("Gracenote Servers"), and to performother functions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this device. This devicemay contain content belonging toGracenote's providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to suchcontent and such content providers shallbe entitled to all of the benefits andprotections set forth herein that areavailable to Gracenote. You agree that youwill use the content from Gracenote("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personal,non-commercial use only. You agree notto assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Content, Gracenote Softwareor any Gracenote Data (except in a Tagassociated with a music file) to any thirdparty. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and alluse of the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers andGracenote Content, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will eitherGracenote become liable for any paymentto you for any information that you provide,

474


Appendices

including any copyrighted material ormusic file information. You agree thatGracenote may enforce its respectiverights, collectively or separately, under thisagreement against you, directly in eachcompany's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow Gracenote to countqueries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see theweb page at www.gracenote.com for theGracenote Privacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSEDTO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTEMAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS ORWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANYGRACENOTE DATA FROM THEGRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTECONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELYAND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHTTO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENTFROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVESERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATACATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THATGRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NOWARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHERGRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREEOR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREETO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICESAT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITSOR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

Radio Frequency StatementFCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-LIC: 216B-SYNCG3-LThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.


The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

475


Appendices

Taiwan TerritoryNote: In accordance with the managementapproach of low-power radio waveradiation motors:Article 12: For approved and certifiedlow-power radiation motor models,companies, firms or users must not alterthe frequency, increase the power orchange the characteristics and functionsof the original design without authorization.Article 14: The usage of low-powerradio-frequency motors must not affectaviation safety and interfere with legaltelecommunications. Should interferencebe detected, immediately stop using thedevice and only resume usage afterensuring that there is no longer anyinterference. For the legaltelecommunication and wirelesstelecommunication of the telco, thelow-power radio frequency motor must beable to tolerate legal limits of interferencefrom telecommunication, industrial,scientific and radio wave equipment.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMSAND CONDITIONSBy activating, using and/or accessing theSUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive orother content or material provided byIntelematics (together, SUNA Productsand/or Services), you must acceptcertain terms and conditions. The followingis a brief summary of the terms andconditions that apply to you. To view thefull terms and conditions relevant to youruse of the SUNA Products and/or Services,please consult:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

1. Acceptance

By using SUNA Products and/or Services,you will be deemed to have accepted andagreed to be bound by the terms andconditions fully detailed at:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

2. Intellectual PropertySUNA Products and/or Services are foryour personal use. You may not record, orretransmit the content, nor use the contentin association with any other trafficinformation or route guidance service ordevice not approved by Intelematics. Youobtain no right of ownership in anyIntellectual Property Rights (includingcopyright) in the data that is used toprovide SUNA Products and/or Services.3. Appropriate UseSUNA Products and/or Services areintended as an aid to personal motoringand travel planning, and do not providecomprehensive or accurate information onall occasions. On occasions, you mayexperience additional delay as a result ofusing SUNA Products and/or Services. Youacknowledge that it is not intended, orsuitable, for use in applications where timeof arrival or driving directions may impactthe safety of the public or yourself.4. Use of SUNA Products and Serviceswhile drivingYou, and other authorised drivers of thevehicle in which SUNA Products and/orServices are available or installed andactive, remain at all times responsible forobserving all relevant laws and codes ofsafe driving. In particular, you agree to onlyactively operate SUNA Products and/orServices when the Vehicle is at a completestop and it is safe to do so.

476


Appendices

5. Service Continuity and Reception ofthe SUNA Traffic ChannelWe will use reasonable endeavours toprovide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year. The SUNA TrafficChannel may occasionally be unavailablefor technical reasons or for plannedmaintenance. We will try to performmaintenance at times when congestion islight. We reserve the right to withdrawSUNA Products and/or Services at anytime.Also, we cannot assure the uninterruptedreception of the SUNA Traffic ChannelRDS-TMC signal at any particular location.6. Limitation of LiabilityNeither Intelematics (nor its suppliers orthe manufacturer of your device (the“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or toany third party for any damages eitherdirect, indirect, incidental, consequentialor otherwise arising out of the use of orinability to use SUNA Products and/orServices even if Intelematics or a Supplierhas been advised of the possibility of suchdamages. You also acknowledge that theneither Intelematics nor any Supplierguarantees nor make any warranties thatrelate to the availability, accuracy or

completeness of SUNA Products and/orServices, and to the extent which it islawful to do so, both Intelematics and eachSupplier excludes any warranties whichmight otherwise be implied by any Stateor Federal legislation in relation to SUNAProducts and/or Services.7. Please NoteGreat care has been taken in preparing thismanual. Constant product developmentmay mean that some information is notentirely up-to-date. The information in thisdocument is subject to change withoutnotice.

DECLARATION OFCONFORMITYYour vehicle could have components thattransmit and receive radio waves and aretherefore subject to governmentregulation.These components must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that could cause undesiredoperation. For certification labels anddeclarations of conformity, visitwww.wirelessconformity.ford.com.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3Radio Frequency Statement

IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version

216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0

216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1

216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2

477


Appendices

www.wirelessconformity.ford.com


These devices comply with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. The device does not cause harmful

interference.2. The device accepts any interference

received, including interference thatcould cause undesired operation.

478


Appendices

1180 Degree Camera......................................211

Camera Views.......................................................211Using the Front 180 Degree Camera

System................................................................211

AA/C

See: Climate Control..........................................131About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes...........................................................188ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes................................................................188

Accessories....................................................428Accessories

See: Replacement PartsRecommendation............................................14

ACCSee: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............213

Active Park Assist.........................................201Using Active Park Assist..................................202

Adaptive Headlamps...................................88System Check.......................................................88

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................293Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................293

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - VehiclesWith: Manual Adjustable SteeringColumn............................................................78

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - VehiclesWith: Power Adjustable SteeringColumn............................................................78End of Travel Position.........................................79Memory Feature....................................................79

AFSSee: Adaptive Headlamps...............................88

Airbag Disposal................................................51Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control..........................................131Air Filter

See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............285Alarm

See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76All-Wheel Drive.............................................183

Ambient Lighting...........................................89Adjusting the Brightness...................................90Changing the Color.............................................90Switching Ambient Lighting Off....................90Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................90

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76Arming the Alarm.................................................76Disarming the Alarm...........................................76

Appendices...................................................449Apps..................................................................410

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................412Using Apps on an Android Device.................411Using Apps on an iOS Device..........................411Using Mobile Navigation on an Android

Device..................................................................411At a Glance........................................................18At a Glance - ST...............................................18

Engine Specifications..........................................18Suspension Specifications................................19

Audible Warnings and Indicators...........104Headlamps On Warning Chime....................104Keyless Warning Alert.......................................104Parking Brake On Warning Chime................104

Audio Control...................................................79You can operate the following functions

with the control:...............................................79Audio System................................................374

General Information..........................................374Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC 3/Bang

and Olufsen Audio System...................376Accessing the Sound Settings......................376Adjusting the Volume.......................................376Changing Radio Stations................................376Ejecting the CD...................................................376Inserting a CD......................................................376Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........377Using Seek, Fast Forward and

Reverse..............................................................377Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC

3.......................................................................374Adjusting the Volume.......................................375Changing Radio Stations................................375Ejecting the CD....................................................375Inserting a CD......................................................375Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........375Using Seek, Fast Forward and

Reverse..............................................................375

479


Index

Autolamps........................................................86Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps........................................................86Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3/Bang and Olufsen AudioSystem...........................................................132Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................132Setting the Temperature..................................132Switching Auto Mode On and Off................133Switching Defrost On and Off........................133Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off...............................................................133Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off........................................................................133Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off........................................................................133Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off........................................................................133Switching the Climate Control On and

Off........................................................................133Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3................................................131Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................131Setting the Temperature...................................131Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................131Switching Defrost On and Off.........................131Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off................................................................131Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off........................................................................132Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off........................................................................132Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off.........................................................................131Switching the Climate Control On and

Off.........................................................................131Automatic High Beam Control...................91Automatic High Beam Control

Indicators.........................................................91Automatic Transmission.............................177

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearning.............................................................182

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud orSnow...................................................................182

Manual Park Release........................................180SelectShift Automatic™

Transmission....................................................179

Understanding the Positions of Your RotaryShift Transmission.........................................177

Automatic Transmission FluidCheck............................................................290

Auto-Start-Stop...........................................164Disabling Auto-Start-Stop.............................165Enabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................164

Autowipers.......................................................82Autowipers Settings............................................83

Auxiliary Power Points................................153110 Volt AC Power Point...................................15312 Volt DC Power Point.....................................153USB Port and Power Point Locations.........153

AWDSee: All-Wheel Drive.........................................183

BBattery

See: Changing the 12V Battery......................291Blind Spot Information System..............228

..................................................................................228Switching the System On and Off..............230System Errors......................................................230Using the Blind Spot Information

System..............................................................229BLIS

See: Blind Spot Information System..........228Body Styling Kits.........................................306Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........279Booster Seats..................................................29

Types of Booster Seats......................................30Brake Fluid Check.......................................290

Brake Fluid Service Interval.............................291Brakes...............................................................188

General Information..........................................188Breaking-In.....................................................253Bulb Specification Chart..........................368

CCabin Air Filter................................................135Canceling the Set Speed...........................212Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L

EcoBoost™.................................................348Air Conditioning System.................................348

480


Index

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely ColdClimates............................................................351

Automatic Transmission................................348Engine Coolant...................................................349Engine Oil.............................................................350Fuel Tank................................................................351Grease.....................................................................351Hydraulic Brake System..................................352Locks.......................................................................352Power Transfer Unit..........................................353Rear Axle...............................................................353Washer Reservoir...............................................353

Capacities and Specifications - 2.7LEcoBoost™, ST.........................................354Air Conditioning System.................................354Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold

Climates............................................................357Automatic Transmission.................................355Engine Coolant...................................................356Engine Oil.............................................................356Fuel Tank..............................................................358Grease....................................................................358Hydraulic Brake System..................................359Locks......................................................................359Power Transfer Unit..........................................359Rear Axle..............................................................360Washer Reservoir..............................................360

Capacities and Specifications - 2.7LEcoBoost™..................................................361Air Conditioning System..................................361Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold

Climates...........................................................364Automatic Transmission.................................362Engine Coolant...................................................363Engine Oil..............................................................363Fuel Tank..............................................................365Grease....................................................................365Hydraulic Brake System..................................366Locks......................................................................366Power Transfer Unit..........................................366Rear Axle...............................................................367Washer Reservoir...............................................367

Capacities and Specifications................343Cargo Nets......................................................239Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................299Catalytic Converter.......................................174

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................175

Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) Testing....................................................175

Center Console..............................................157Changing a Bulb..........................................296

Headlamp.............................................................297LED Lamps...........................................................297License Plate Lamp..........................................298

Changing a Fuse...........................................277Fuses.......................................................................277

Changing a Road Wheel...........................335Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information.....................................................336Stowing the flat tire .........................................340Tire Change Procedure.....................................337

Changing the 12V Battery..........................291Changing the Engine Air Filter................285Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or

Password......................................................373Changing the Wiper Blades.....................295

Front Wiper Blades...........................................295Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................295

Checking MyKey System Status................61MyKey Distance.....................................................61Number of Admin Keys.......................................61Number of MyKeys...............................................61

Checking the Wiper Blades.....................295Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance..................................................41Child Restraint Positioning..........................31Child Safety......................................................22

General Information............................................22Child Safety Locks..........................................33

Left-Hand Side......................................................34Right-Hand Side...................................................34

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................303Cleaning Products.......................................299

Materials...............................................................299Cleaning the Engine....................................301Cleaning the Exterior..................................299

Cleaning the Headlamps...............................300Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................300Exterior Plastic Parts.......................................300Stripes or Graphics...........................................300Underbody...........................................................300Under Hood.........................................................300

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens........................302

481


Index

Cleaning the Interior...................................302Mirrors....................................................................302

Cleaning the Wheels..................................304Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades............................................................301Clearing All MyKeys........................................61Climate.............................................................401

Accessing Rear Climate Controls................403Accessing the Climate Control Menu.........401Directing the Airflow.........................................401Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........403Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................401Setting the Temperature.................................401Switching Auto Mode On and Off................401Switching Dual Zone Mode On and

Off......................................................................402Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off.............................................................402Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off......................................................................402Switching Rear Auto Mode On and

Off......................................................................403Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off......................................................................403Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off.......................................................................401Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On

and Off.............................................................402Switching the Climate Control On and

Off......................................................................402Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On

and Off.............................................................402Switching the Heated Rear Window On and

Off......................................................................402Switching the Heated Seats On and

Off......................................................................402Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On

and Off.............................................................402Switching the Heated Windshield On and

Off......................................................................402Switching the Rear Climate Controlled

Seats On and Off.........................................403Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and

Off......................................................................403Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On

and Off.............................................................403Switching the Ventilated Seats On and

Off......................................................................403

Climate Control..............................................131Climate Controlled Seats..........................146

Cooled Seats.........................................................147Cold Weather Precautions.......................253Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile

Network........................................................370Enabling the Modem Using

FordPass..........................................................370Enabling the Modem Using the

Touchscreen...................................................370What Is the Modem..........................................370

Coolant CheckSee: Engine Coolant Check...........................286

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50Creating a MyKey...........................................60

Programming and Changing ConfigurableSettings..............................................................60

Creating a Wi-Fi Hotspot..........................373Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi

Hotspot.............................................................373Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and

Password..........................................................373Cross Traffic Alert........................................230

Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Traileris Attached.......................................................232

Cross Traffic Alert Indicator............................232Cross Traffic Alert Information

Messages.........................................................233Cross Traffic Alert System

Limitations.......................................................232Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors.............232Switching the System On and Off...............232Using Cross Traffic Alert.................................230

Cruise Control.................................................212Cruise Control Indicators............................213Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive

Cruise Control/Lane Centering.............80Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise

Control............................................................80Customer Assistance................................260

DData Recording..................................................9

Comfort, Convenience and EntertainmentData........................................................................11

Event Data.................................................................11Service Data............................................................10

482


Index

Services That Third Parties Provide...............12Services That We Provide..................................12Vehicles With a Modem......................................12Vehicles With an Emergency Call

System..................................................................13Vehicles With SYNC.............................................12

Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:Configurable Daytime RunningLamps..............................................................87

Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............87

Declaration of Conformity........................477Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles

With: SYNC 3...............................................477Radio Frequency Statement..........................477

Digital Radio...................................................377HD Radio Reception and Station

Troubleshooting............................................378Direction Indicators.......................................88Doors and Locks.............................................63Drive Control..................................................238

Adaptive Steering..............................................238Driver Alert......................................................223

Principle of Operation......................................223Using Driver Alert...............................................223

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................44Children and Airbags...........................................45Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment........................................................44Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........49Driving Aids.....................................................223Driving Hints...................................................253Driving Through Water...............................253DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:Configurable Daytime Running Lamps....87

See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................87

EEconomical Driving.....................................253Electric Parking Brake.................................189

Applying the Electric Parking Brake............189Automatically Releasing the Electric

Parking Brake..................................................190Manually Releasing the Electric Parking

Brake..................................................................189

Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if theVehicle Battery is Running Out ofCharge...............................................................190

Electromagnetic Compatibility..............449Emission Law..................................................173

Noise Emissions Warranty, ProhibitedTampering Acts and Maintenance..........174

Tampering With a Noise ControlSystem...............................................................173

End User License Agreement..................452VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................452Engine Block Heater....................................162

Using the Engine Block Heater......................162Engine Coolant Check...............................286

Adding Coolant..................................................286Coolant Change.................................................288Engine Coolant Temperature

Management..................................................289Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................288Recycled Coolant...............................................287Severe Climates.................................................288

Engine Emission Control............................173Engine Immobilizer

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75Engine Oil Check..........................................283

Adding Engine Oil..............................................284Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L

EcoBoost™.................................................283Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L

EcoBoost™.................................................283Engine Specifications - 2.0L

EcoBoost™.................................................343Drivebelt Routing...............................................343

Engine Specifications - 2.7LEcoBoost™.................................................343Drivebelt Routing...............................................344

Entertainment...............................................391AM/FM Radio......................................................392Apps.......................................................................400Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................399CD (If equipped)................................................398HD Radio™ Information (If

Available)........................................................395SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)........................................................393Sources..................................................................392

483


Index

Supported Media Players, Formats andMetadata Information...............................400

USB Ports............................................................400Environment......................................................17EPB

See: Electric Parking Brake.............................189Essential Towing Checks..........................249

Before Towing a Trailer....................................250Hitches...................................................................249Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal

Watercraft (PWC)........................................250Safety Chains......................................................249Trailer Brakes.......................................................249Trailer Lamps.......................................................249When Towing a Trailer.....................................250

Event Data RecordingSee: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options.................................16Exterior Mirrors................................................94

360-Degree Camera...........................................95Auto-Dimming Feature......................................95Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................95Blind Spot Monitor..............................................96Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................94Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................95Memory Mirrors.....................................................95Power Exterior Mirrors........................................94Puddle Lamps.......................................................95Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................95

FFastening the Seatbelts..............................36

Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37Using a Sliding Clip..............................................36Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................37

Flat TireSee: Changing a Road Wheel........................335

Flat Tire InflationSee: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................308

Floor Mats.......................................................254Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................87Ford Credit.........................................................13

US Only.....................................................................13Ford Protect...................................................429

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan(CANADA ONLY)..........................................430

Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.Only)..................................................................429

Front Fog Lamps............................................87Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................88Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or

Off.........................................................................87Front Parking Aid..........................................198

Object Distance Indicator...............................199Front Passenger Sensing System............45Fuel and Refueling.......................................166Fuel Consumption.........................................171

Advertised Capacity............................................171Filling the Fuel Tank............................................171Fuel Economy.......................................................172

Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................167Fuel Filter........................................................294Fuel Quality....................................................166

Choosing the Right Fuel..................................166Fuel Shutoff...................................................256Fuses.................................................................267Fuse Specification Chart...........................267

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........273Power Distribution Box....................................267

GGarage Door Opener...................................148Garage Door Opener

See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........148Gauges...............................................................98

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............99Fuel Gauge.............................................................99Information Display.............................................98Left Information Display..................................100Type 1........................................................................98Type 2.....................................................................100

GearboxSee: Transmission...............................................177

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................52Intelligent Access.................................................52

General Maintenance Information.........431Multi-Point Inspection.....................................433Owner Checks and Services..........................432Protecting Your Investment............................431Why Maintain Your Vehicle?...........................431Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?......................................................431

484


Index

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. andCanada.........................................................263

Getting the Services You Need..............260Away From Home.............................................260

Global Opening...............................................94Remote Control Front Windows....................94

HHazard Flashers...........................................256Headlamp Adjusting

See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................293Headlamp Exit Delay....................................86Headlamp Removal

See: Removing a Headlamp..........................296Headrest

See: Head Restraints.........................................137Head Restraints.............................................137

Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................138Tilting Head Restraints ....................................138

Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................135Heated Rear Window..................................135Heated Seats..................................................145

Front Seats............................................................145Rear Seats.............................................................145

Heated Steering Wheel................................81Heated Windshield.......................................135

Windshield Wiper De-Icer................................135Heating

See: Climate Control..........................................131Hill Start Assist.............................................190

Switching the System On and Off................191Using Hill Start Assist........................................191

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate..........................................................134Defogging the Side Windows in Cold

Weather.............................................................134General Hints.......................................................134Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................134Quickly Heating the Interior............................134Recommended Settings for Cooling...........134Recommended Settings for Heating..........134

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................188

Hood LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood..........279

Horn......................................................................81

IIn California (U.S. Only).............................261Information Display Control......................80Information Displays...................................105

General Information..........................................105Information Messages.................................115

Active Park..............................................................115Adaptive Cruise Control....................................116Airbag.......................................................................116Alarm........................................................................117All-Wheel Drive.....................................................117Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................117Automatic High Beam Control.......................118Auto Start-Stop...................................................118Battery and Charging System.........................119Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic

Alert System....................................................120Doors and Locks.................................................120Driver Alert..............................................................121Electronic Stability Control..............................121Engine.......................................................................121Fuel...........................................................................122Hill Start Assist....................................................122Keys and Keyless Entry.....................................122Lane Centering Assist........................................123Lane Keeping System........................................123Maintenance.........................................................124MyKey......................................................................124Park Aid...................................................................125Park Brake..............................................................125Power Steering....................................................126Pre-Collision Warning System.......................127Remote Start........................................................127Seats........................................................................127Starting System ..................................................127Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................128Towing.....................................................................128Traction Control..................................................128Transmission........................................................129

Installing Child Restraints...........................24Child Seats..............................................................24Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................24Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH)............................................27Using Tether Straps.............................................28

Instrument Cluster........................................98Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................86

485


Index

Instrument Panel...........................................20Interior Lamps.................................................89

Front Interior Lamp.............................................89Rear Interior Lamps............................................89

Interior Mirror...................................................96Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................96Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................96

Introduction.........................................................7

JJump Starting the Vehicle.........................257

Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................257To Connect the Booster Cables....................257To Start the Engine...........................................258

KKeyless Entry....................................................67

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPAD...............................................................67

Keyless Starting............................................158Ignition Modes.....................................................158

Keys and Remote Controls.........................52

LLane Keeping System................................224

Switching the System On and Off...............225Liftgate...............................................................70Lighting Control..............................................85

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............86Headlamp High Beam........................................85

Lighting..............................................................85General Information............................................85

Load CarriersSee: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............240

Load Carrying................................................239Load Limit......................................................240

Special Loading Instructions for Owners ofPick-up Trucks and Utility-typeVehicles............................................................244

Vehicle Loading - with and without aTrailer................................................................240

Locking and Unlocking.................................63Activating Intelligent Access............................65Autolock..................................................................66Auto Relock............................................................66

Battery Saver..........................................................67Illuminated Entry..................................................66Illuminated Exit.....................................................67Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the

Key Blade...........................................................64Power Door Locks................................................63Remote Control....................................................63Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access

Keys......................................................................65Luggage Covers............................................239Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................335

MMaintenance..................................................279

General Information..........................................279Manual Liftgate...............................................70

Closing the Liftgate.............................................70Opening the Liftgate...........................................70

Manual Seats.................................................139Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................139

Media Hub......................................................382Memory Function..........................................142

Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................144Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote

Control or Intelligent Access KeyFob......................................................................143

Saving a PreSet Position..................................143Message Center

See: Information Displays...............................105Mirrors

See: Windows and Mirrors................................93Mobile Communications Equipment.......15Moonroof..........................................................96

Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............97Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L

EcoBoost™.................................................344Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L

EcoBoost™.................................................345MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................62MyKey™.............................................................59

Principle of Operation........................................59

NNavigation......................................................405

Changing the Format of the Map................407

486


Index

cityseeker.............................................................409Michelin Travel Guide.......................................410Navigation Map Accuracy and

Updates............................................................410Route Guidance..................................................407Setting a Destination.......................................406SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................410Zoom......................................................................407

Network Connectivity.................................370Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile

Network............................................................370Network Connectivity –

Troubleshooting.........................................371Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........434

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................434Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................435

OOil Change Indicator Reset......................284Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check......................................283Opening and Closing the Hood..............279

Closing the Hood...............................................280Opening the Hood.............................................279

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature.....................................................265Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........265

Overhead Console........................................157Overriding Automatic High Beam

Control.............................................................91

PParking Aids....................................................196

Principle of Operation......................................196Passive Anti-Theft System.........................75

SecuriLock®...........................................................75PATS

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75Perchlorate........................................................13Personal Safety System™..........................42

How Does the Personal Safety SystemWork?..................................................................42

Phone..............................................................403Android Auto.......................................................405Apple CarPlay.....................................................405

Pairing Your Cell Phone for the FirstTime..................................................................404

Text Messaging..................................................404Using Your Cell Phone.....................................404

Post-Crash Alert System..........................259Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................63Power Liftgate...................................................71

Hands-Free Feature.............................................73Obstacle Detection..............................................73Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................71Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................72Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................72Switching the Power Liftgate On or

Off..........................................................................73Power Seats...................................................140

Adjusting the 10-Way Seat..............................142Adjusting the 8-Way Seat................................141Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................142

Power Steering Fluid Check......................291Power Windows..............................................93

Accessory Delay...................................................94Bounce-Back.........................................................93One-Touch Down.................................................93One-Touch Up.......................................................93Window Lock.........................................................94

Pre-Collision Assist.....................................234Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist

Settings............................................................236Blocked Sensors.................................................237Distance Indication and Alert........................235Evasive Steering Assist....................................236Using the Pre-Collision Assist

System..............................................................235Protecting the Environment........................17Puncture

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................335

RRear Parking Aid...........................................196

Object Distance Indicator...............................198Rear Seat Armrest........................................157Rear Seats.......................................................144

Adjusting the Rear Seats.................................144Rear Under Floor Storage.........................239

Cargo Management System.........................239

487


Index

Rear View Camera......................................208Camera Guidelines...........................................209Manual Zoom.......................................................210Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................210Rear Camera Delay............................................210Using the Rear View Camera

System.............................................................208Rear View Camera

See: Rear View Camera..................................208Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........84

Rear Camera Washer.........................................84Rear Window Washer.........................................84

Recommended Towing Weights............247Refueling.........................................................169

Refueling System Overview...........................169Refueling System Warning...............................171Refueling Your Vehicle......................................169

Remote Control...............................................52Global Opening and Closing............................58Intelligent Access Key.........................................52Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote

Control................................................................56Locating Your Vehicle.........................................56Memory Feature...................................................58Remote Control Information

Messages...........................................................58Remote Start.........................................................56Replacing the Battery.........................................53Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................56Using the Key Blade............................................55

Remote Start..................................................135Automatic Settings............................................136Heated and Cooled Features.........................136Last Settings........................................................136

Removing a Headlamp.............................296Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............304Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................14Collision Repairs....................................................14Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs..................................................................14Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................14

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl............................................................58

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly)..............................................................265

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only)..............................................................265

Resuming the Set Speed...........................213Roadside Assistance..................................255

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting RoadsideAssistance.......................................................256

Vehicles Sold in the United States: GettingRoadside Assistance...................................255

Vehicles Sold in the United States: UsingRoadside Assistance...................................255

Roadside Emergencies..............................255Roof Racks and Load Carriers................240Running-In

See: Breaking-In.................................................253Running Out of Fuel.....................................167

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer..........................................................168

Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................167

SSafety Canopy™............................................49Safety Precautions......................................166Satellite Radio...............................................379

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number(ESN)................................................................380

Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............380SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................380Troubleshooting..................................................381

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........439Scheduled Maintenance............................431Seatbelt Extensions.......................................41Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38Seatbelt Reminder........................................39

Belt-Minder™........................................................39Seatbelts...........................................................35

Principle of Operation.........................................35Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................38Conditions of operation.....................................39

Seats..................................................................137Security...............................................................75Settings............................................................413

911 Assist................................................................413Ambient Lighting................................................414Audio.......................................................................413Automatic Updates...........................................413Bluetooth...............................................................413Charge Settings...................................................414Clock........................................................................413

488


Index

Display....................................................................414Driver Assist..........................................................413FordPass................................................................413General...................................................................413Message Center..................................................414Mobile Apps..........................................................413Multi Contour Seats...........................................414Navigation.............................................................414Personal Profiles.................................................414Phone......................................................................413Seats.......................................................................414Sound......................................................................413Valet Mode............................................................414Vehicle....................................................................413Voice Control........................................................414

Setting the Cruise Control Speed...........212Changing the Set Speed..................................212

Side Airbags.....................................................48Side Sensing System.................................200

Object Distance Indicator................................201Sitting in the Correct Position..................137Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains..................................331Spare Wheel

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................335Special Notices................................................14

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................14Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and

Utility Type Vehicles........................................15On Board Diagnostics Data Link

Connector............................................................15Special Instructions..............................................14Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............15Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow...........15

Special Operating Conditions ScheduledMaintenance...............................................437Exceptions............................................................438

Speed ControlSee: Cruise Control.............................................212

Stability Control............................................193Principle of Operation.......................................193

Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................159Automatic Engine Shutdown........................160Failure to Start....................................................160Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................161Important Ventilating Information................161Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving................................................................161

Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle isStationary........................................................160

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........158General Information..........................................158

Steering...........................................................233Adaptive Learning.............................................234Electric Power Steering....................................233

Steering Wheel................................................78Storage Compartments.............................157Sunroof

See: Moonroof......................................................96Sun Visors.........................................................96

Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................96Supplementary Restraints System.........43

Principle of Operation........................................43Switching Automatic High Beam Control

On and Off......................................................91Activating the Automatic High Beam

Control..................................................................91Switching Cruise Control On and

Off....................................................................212Switching Cruise Control Off..........................212Switching Cruise Control On...........................212

Switching Off the Engine............................161Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................161

Symbols Glossary.............................................7SYNC™ 3........................................................383

General Information.........................................383SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................415

Additional Information andAssistance........................................................427

Apps........................................................................422Navigation.............................................................421Personal Profiles................................................425Phone......................................................................419Resetting the System.......................................427USB and Bluetooth Audio...............................416Voice Recognition...............................................415Wi-Fi Connectivity.............................................424

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications............343The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).......................262Tire Care...........................................................315

Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................318

489


Index

Important Information About Low-ProfileTires.....................................................................315

Important Information About Sport Tiresand Wheels......................................................315

Information About Uniform Tire QualityGrading..............................................................316

Information Contained on the TireSidewall............................................................319

Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners...........316Temperature A B C..............................................317Tire Rotation........................................................330Traction AA A B C................................................317Treadwear..............................................................317

Tire Inflation When PuncturedSee: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................308

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........332Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.......................................333Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System ......................................333Tire Repair Kit

See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................308Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................308

First Stage: Inflating the Tire with SealingCompound and Air........................................310

General Information.........................................309Second Stage: Checking Tire

Pressure.............................................................312Tips for Use of the Kit......................................309What to Do After the Tire Has Been

Sealed................................................................313What to do When a Tire Is Punctured........310

TiresSee: Wheels and Tires.....................................307

Towing a Trailer............................................246Load Placement................................................246

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -2.0L.................................................................251Emergency Towing.............................................251Recreational Towing..........................................251

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -2.7L..................................................................251Emergency Towing.............................................251Recreational Towing.........................................252

Towing.............................................................246Traction Control............................................192

Principle of Operation.......................................192Trailer Sway Control....................................247

Transmission Code Designation.............347Transmission...................................................177Transporting the Vehicle...........................259

UUnder Hood Overview - 2.0L

EcoBoost™..................................................281Under Hood Overview - 2.7L

EcoBoost™.................................................282Unique Driving Characteristics................164Universal Garage Door Opener...............148

HomeLink Wireless Control System...........148USB Port.........................................................382Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................213

Automatic Cancellation...................................216Blocked Sensor....................................................218Canceling the Set Speed.................................216Changing the Set Speed..................................216Detection Issues..................................................217Following a Vehicle............................................214Following a Vehicle to a Complete

Stop.....................................................................215Hilly Condition Usage........................................216Overriding the Set Speed................................216Park Brake Application.....................................216Resuming the Set Speed.................................216Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............214Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When

Your Vehicle is Stationary...........................214Setting the Gap Distance................................215Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

Off........................................................................217Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

On........................................................................214Switching to Normal Cruise Control............219System Not Available........................................218Using Lane Centering.......................................220

Using All-Wheel Drive.................................183Driving in Special Conditions with All-Wheel

Drive (AWD).....................................................183Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems...........................................................61Using Snow Chains......................................331Using Stability Control...............................194

Electronic Stability Control ............................194Using Summer Tires....................................331

490


Index

Using Traction Control................................192Switching the System Off...............................192System Indicator Lights and

Messages..........................................................192Using a Switch.....................................................192

Using Voice Recognition...........................385Apps.......................................................................390Automatic Blower Motor Speed

Reduction.........................................................391Climate..................................................................387Entertainment....................................................386General..................................................................385Navigation............................................................389Phone....................................................................388SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................390Voice Settings......................................................391

Utilizing the Mediation/ArbitrationProgram (Canada Only)........................263

VVehicle Care...................................................299

General Information.........................................299Vehicle Certification Label.......................347Vehicle Identification Number...............346Vehicle Storage............................................304

Body.......................................................................304Brakes....................................................................305Cooling system...................................................305Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery.............305Engine....................................................................305Fuel system.........................................................305General..................................................................304Miscellaneous.....................................................305Removing Vehicle From Storage.................305Tires........................................................................305

VentilationSee: Climate Control..........................................131

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............346

Voice Control...................................................80

WWarning Lamps and Indicators................101

Adaptive Cruise Control....................................101Anti-Lock Braking System...............................101

Automatic Headlamp High BeamIndicator.............................................................101

Auto Start-stop....................................................101Battery.....................................................................101Blind Spot Monitor..............................................101Brake System........................................................101Cruise Control......................................................102Direction Indicator..............................................102Door Ajar................................................................102Electric Park Brake.............................................102Engine Coolant Temperature.........................102Engine Oil..............................................................102Fasten Seatbelt...................................................102Front Airbag..........................................................102Front Fog Lamps Indicator..............................102High Beam.............................................................102Hill Start Assist Indicator.................................102Hood Ajar...............................................................103Lane Keeping Aid................................................103Liftgate Ajar..........................................................103Low Fuel Level.....................................................103Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................103Low Washer Fluid...............................................103Parking Lamps.....................................................103Powertrain Fault.................................................103Service Engine Soon..........................................103Stability Control..................................................103Stability Control Off..........................................104

Washer Fluid Check....................................294Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................299See: Wipers and Washers.................................82

Waxing..............................................................301What Is Automatic High Beam

Control.............................................................91What Is Cruise Control................................212Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................335Wheels and Tires.........................................307

General Information.........................................307Technical Specifications..................................341

Wi-Fi Hotspot................................................373Windows and Mirrors....................................93Windshield Washers.....................................83

Front Camera Washer........................................83Windshield Wipers.........................................82

Intermittent Wipe.................................................82Speed Dependent Wipers................................82

491


Index

Wiper BladesSee: Checking the Wiper Blades..................295

Wipers and Washers.....................................82Wireless Accessory Charging...................154

492


Index

2020 EDGE Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of 2020 EDGE Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process